S-Class Operator's Manual

S-Class Operator’s Manual S430 S 430 4MATIC S500 S 500 4MATIC S 55 AMG S600 Our company and staff congratulate you ț Please read this manual carefully, then on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference. Your selection of our product is a demon- ț Please follow the recommendations stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de- name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your designed to acquaint you with the opera- sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz. easy as possible to operate and provide ț Please pay attention to the warnings years of service. and cautions contained in this manual. Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc- men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants. and also the safety of you and your passen- We extend our best wishes for many miles gers, we ask you to make a small invest- of safe, pleasurable driving. ment of time: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Contents

Introduction...... 9 At a glance...... 19 Getting started...... 29 Product information...... 9 Cockpit...... 20 Unlocking ...... 30 Operator’s Manual...... 10 Instrument cluster...... 22 Unlocking with the SmartKey ...... 30 Service and warranty information .. 10 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 24 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*...... 32 Important notice for California Center console ...... 25 Adjusting...... 34 retail buyers and lessees of Upper part ...... 25 Seats ...... 34 Mercedes-Benz automobiles ...... 11 Lower part ...... 26 Steering wheel...... 37 Maintenance ...... 12 Overhead control panel ...... 27 Mirrors...... 38 Roadside Assistance ...... 12 Door control panel...... 28 Driving...... 40 Change of address or ownership.... 12 Fastening the seat belts ...... 40 Operating your vehicle outside Starting the engine ...... 43 the USA or Canada...... 13 Switching on headlamps...... 47 Where to find it...... 14 Turn signals and high beam ...... 47 Symbols...... 15 Windshield wipers...... 48 Operating safety ...... 16 Problems while driving...... 50 Proper use of the vehicle ...... 16 Parking and locking...... 51 Problems with your vehicle...... 17 Parking brake ...... 52 Reporting safety defects...... 18 Switching off headlamps...... 53 Reporting safety defects ...... 18 Turning off the engine...... 53 Contents

Rear seat head restraints...... 110 Safety and Security...... 57 Controls in detail...... 87 Lumbar support ...... 112 Occupant safety...... 58 Locking and unlocking...... 88 Multicontour backrest*...... 112 Airbags...... 59 SmartKey ...... 88 Drive-dynamic seat* ...... 113 Seat belts...... 64 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 91 Seat heating*...... 114 Preventive occupant safety Opening the doors from the inside. 96 Seat ventilation*...... 117 (PRE-SAFE) ...... 68 Opening the trunk lid from the Rear seats...... 118 Children in the vehicle...... 69 outside...... 97 Memory function ...... 121 Override switch for rear passenger Opening the trunk lid from the Storing positions into memory..... 122 compartment...... 74 inside ...... 97 Recalling positions from memory. 122 Panic alarm...... 76 Closing the trunk lid...... 98 Storing exterior rear view mirror Activating ...... 76 Trunk lid opening/closing system* 99 parking position ...... 122 Deactivating ...... 76 Trunk lid emergency release ...... 104 Lighting ...... 124 Driving safety systems...... 77 Separately locking the trunk lid ... 105 Exterior lamp switch ...... 124 ABS ...... 77 Separately unlocking the trunk lid 105 Combination switch ...... 128 BAS ...... 78 Power closing assist for doors and Hazard warning flasher ...... 128 ESP...... 79 trunk lid...... 106 Interior lighting ...... 129 Four wheel electronic traction Automatic central locking ...... 106 Courtesy lighting...... 130 system (4MATIC) with the ESP...... 82 Locking and unlocking from the Instrument cluster...... 131 Anti-theft systems...... 83 inside ...... 107 Instrument cluster illumination .... 131 Immobilizer...... 83 Seats ...... 108 Coolant temperature gauge ...... 132 Anti-theft alarm system...... 83 Easy-entry/exit feature...... 108 Trip odometer ...... 132 Tow-away alarm ...... 85 Removing and installing front seat Tachometer...... 133 head restraints...... 109 Outside temperature indicator..... 133 Contents

Control system ...... 134 Good visibility...... 174 Ventilated storage compartment Multifunction display...... 134 Rear view mirror ...... 174 (except S 55 AMG) ...... 192 Multifunction steering wheel...... 135 Electrically folding exterior rear Rear passenger compartment Menus ...... 137 view mirrors...... 176 adjustable air vents ...... 192 Standard display menu ...... 139 Windshield wipers...... 177 Rear passenger compartment AUDIO menu ...... 139 Headlamp cleaning system* climate control*...... 193 CD changer* operating mode ...... 142 (Standard on S 500, S 600, Power windows ...... 195 TEL menu* ...... 144 S 55 AMG) ...... 177 Opening and closing the windows 195 NAVI menu...... 147 Sun visors ...... 178 Synchronizing the power windows 198 Distronic* menu...... 147 Rear window sunshade* ...... 179 Sliding/pop-up roof...... 199 Trip computer menu...... 148 Rear door window sunshade*...... 179 Opening and closing the Malfunction memory menu ...... 150 Automatic climate control ...... 180 sliding/pop-up roof...... 199 Settings menu...... 151 Setting the temperature...... 183 Synchronizing the sliding/ Automatic transmission...... 164 Adjusting air distribution...... 184 pop-up roof...... 202 One-touch gearshifting...... 165 Adjusting air volume ...... 186 Driving systems...... 203 Gear ranges ...... 166 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL...... 186 Cruise control ...... 203 Gear selector lever position ...... 167 Defrosting...... 187 Distronic* ...... 206 Steering wheel gearshift control Air recirculation mode ...... 187 AIRMATIC ...... 218 (Speedshift) S 55 AMG...... 168 Charcoal filter ...... 188 Active Body Control (ABC)* ...... 220 Program mode selector switch..... 170 Rear window defroster...... 189 Parktronic* (Parking assist)...... 224 Accelerator position...... 170 Deactivating the climate control Loading ...... 229 Manual shift program S 55 AMG.. 171 system ...... 190 Roof rack* ...... 229 Emergency operation Air conditioning...... 190 Loading instructions ...... 229 (Limp home mode)...... 173 Residual heat and ventilation...... 191 Cargo tie-down hooks...... 230 Contents

Useful features ...... 231 At the gas station ...... 269 Storage compartments...... 231 Operation ...... 257 Refueling...... 269 Ashtrays ...... 238 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ...... 258 Check regularly and before a Cigarette lighters...... 239 Driving instructions...... 259 long trip ...... 270 Heated steering wheel* ...... 240 Drive sensibly – save fuel...... 259 Engine compartment ...... 272 Telephone*...... 241 Drinking and driving ...... 259 Hood ...... 272 Tele Aid ...... 242 Pedals ...... 259 Engine oil ...... 273 Garage door opener ...... 250 Power assistance ...... 259 Transmission fluid level...... 278 Infrared reflecting windshield...... 256 Brakes...... 260 Active Body Control* (ABC*) Driving off ...... 261 fluid level ...... 278 Parking...... 261 Coolant ...... 278 Tires ...... 262 Battery ...... 280 Hydroplaning...... 263 Windshield washer system and Tire traction...... 263 headlamp cleaning system*...... 281 Tire speed rating ...... 263 Tires and wheels...... 282 Winter driving instructions ...... 264 Important guidelines ...... 282 Standing water...... 265 Life of tires...... 283 Passenger compartment ...... 266 Direction of rotation...... 283 Driving abroad...... 266 Checking tire inflation pressure ... 283 Control and operation of radio Rotating wheels ...... 291 transmitters ...... 266 Winter driving ...... 292 Catalytic converter...... 267 Winter tires ...... 292 Emission control ...... 267 Block heater (Canada only)...... 293 Coolant temperature...... 268 Snow chains...... 293 Contents

Maintenance...... 294 Replacing wiper blades ...... 359 Clearing the service indicator ...... 294 Practical hints ...... 303 Removing wiper blades...... 359 Service term exceeded ...... 294 What to do if …? ...... 304 Installing wiper blades ...... 360 Calling up the service indicator.... 295 Lamps in instrument cluster ...... 304 Flat tire...... 361 Resetting the service indicator..... 295 Lamp in center console...... 311 Preparing the vehicle...... 361 Vehicle care...... 296 Messages in the display...... 312 Mounting the spare wheel ...... 361 Cleaning and care of vehicle ...... 296 Where will I find ...? ...... 344 Battery ...... 366 First aid kit...... 344 Disconnecting the battery ...... 367 Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, Removing the battery ...... 367 luggage bowl, spare wheel...... 344 Charging and reinstalling battery.. 367 Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 348 Reconnecting the battery ...... 368 Unlocking the vehicle...... 348 Jump starting...... 369 Locking the vehicle ...... 349 Towing the vehicle...... 371 Replacing batteries in Installing towing eye bolt...... 373 the SmartKey/ SmartKey with Fuses...... 374 KEYLESS-GO* ...... 349 Fuse boxes in passenger Fuel filler flap ...... 351 compartment...... 374 Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 352 Fuse boxes in engine Sliding/pop-up roof ...... 352 compartment...... 375 Replacing bulbs ...... 353 Emergency engine shut-down...... 376 Bulbs...... 353 Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 355 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 358 Contents

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc...... 391 Technical data...... 377 Capacities ...... 391 Technical terms...... 401 Spare parts service...... 378 Engine oils...... 393 Warranty coverage...... 379 Engine oil additives ...... 393 Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant ...... 393 Index...... 407 Information Booklet...... 379 Brake fluid...... 394 Identification labels...... 380 Premium unleaded gasoline ...... 394 Layout of poly-V-belt drive ...... 381 Fuel requirements ...... 394 S 430 / S 500 (all models)...... 381 Gasoline additives...... 395 S 55 AMG...... 381 Coolants...... 395 S 600 ...... 381 Windshield and headlamp washer Engine...... 382 system ...... 398 Rims and tires...... 384 Consumer information...... 399 Same size tires...... 385 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 399 Mixed size tires ...... 387 Spare wheel ...... 388 Electrical system...... 389 Main dimensions and weights...... 390 Main dimensions ...... 390 Weights ...... 390 Introduction Product information ̄ Product information Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories ap- held responsible for them, even if in indi- proved by us are available at your autho- We recommend using genuine vidual cases an official approval or authori- rized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion zation by governmental or other agencies receive comprehensive information, also parts and accessories explicitly approved should exist. Use of such parts and acces- on permissible technical modifications, by us for your vehicle model. sories could adversely affect the safety, and where proper installation will be per- We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. formed. their reliability, safety and special suitabili- Please do not use them. ty for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

9 Introduction Operator’s Manual ̄ Operator’s Manual This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your For your own safety and longer service life this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including: of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in- your vehicle. structions and warnings contained in this ț New Car Limited Warranty manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in ț Emission System Warranty age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc- or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are ț Emission Performance Warranty ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and ț California, Maine, Massachusetts, and the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System the actual equipment of your vehicle. Your vehicle may have some or all of the Warranty equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only) optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz ț State Warranty Enforcement Laws vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws) the operation of any equipment, your au- care and operating procedures. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be The Operator’s Manual and Service Book- glad to demonstrate the proper proce- let are important documents and should be dures. kept with the vehicle.

10 Introduction Operator’s Manual

Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub- automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calender days. Written notification a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have should be sent to us, not a dealer, at of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair, Assistance Center, One Mercedes thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350. (2) the same substantial defect or mal- one or more substantial defects or malfunction of a less serious nature than functions in the vehicle that are covered by category (1) has been subject to repair its express warranty after a reasonable four or more times and you have direct- number of repair attempts. During the pe- ly notified us in writing of the need for riod of 18 months from original delivery of its repair, or the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs:

11 Introduction Operator’s Manual

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

The Service Booklet describes all the nec- The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to essary maintenance work which should be Program provides factory trained technical send in the “Change of Address Notice” performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty Informa- Always have the Service Booklet with you the toll-free Roadside Assistance number tion Booklet, or simply call the when you take the vehicle to your autho- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance rized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser- The service advisor will record each ser- will be answered by Mercedes-Benz vice in the booklet for you. vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in Customer Assistance Representatives your own interest that we can contact you 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. should the need arise. For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- literature with the vehicle to make it avail- gram Brochure in your glove box. able to the next operator. If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and Warranty In- formation Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

12 Introduction Operator’s Manual

Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail- or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro- pean Delivery Program. For details, consult If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or eign countries, please be aware that: write to: ț service facilities or replacement parts In the USA: may not be readily available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ț unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- European Delivery Department alytic converters may not be available; One Mercedes Drive the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 catalysts, In Canada: ț gasoline may have a considerably low- Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. er octane rating, and improper fuel can European Delivery Department cause engine damage. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

13 Introduction Where to find it ̄ Where to find it This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data for you, the vehicle operator. For you to Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi- find information quickly each section has about the equipment installed in your vehicle can be found in this section. its own reference color: cle. This section expands on the “Getting started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes At a glance with the basic functions of your vehicle, The glossary provides explanations of the Here you will find an overview of all the this section will be of particular interest to most important technical terms. controls that can be operated from the you. driver’s seat. The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly Operation and easily. Getting started Here you will find all the information you The following publications are part of your Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi- vehicle documentation: need for your first drive. You should read cle. ț this Operator’s Manual this section first if this is your first ț Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent- the Service Booklet ing or borrowing this vehicle. Practical hints Separate operating instructions will be This section provides fast assistance for provided as required depending on the dealing with problems you may encounter. equipment options installed in your vehi- Safety and Security cle. Here you will find descriptions of the safety features of your vehicle.

14 Introduction Symbols ̄ Symbols The following symbols are found in this ̈ This symbol points to instructions for Operator’s Manual: Warning! G you to follow. ̈ * Optional equipment is identified Warning notices draw your attention to haz- A number of these symbols appearing with an asterisk. Since standard ards that may endanger your health or life, in succession indicates a multiple-step equipment varies between models, or the health or life of others. procedure. the descriptions and illustrations in ୴ Page This symbol tells you where to this manual may differ slightly from look for further information on a the actual equipment of your vehi- ! topic. cle. Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle. ୴୴ This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which will be continued on the next i page. Helpful hints or further information you may find useful. -> In the glossary of technical terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term definitions. DISPLAY Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in the type shown here.

15 Introduction Operating safety ̄ Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle Warning! G Warning! G Proper use of the vehicle requires that you Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules: cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, ț the safety precautions in this manual the vehicle’s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a ț the “Technical data” section in this produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri- bance, or you suspect that damage to your ț traffic rules and regulations ously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow ț motor vehicle laws and safety standards See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center down, and drive with caution to an area for repairs or modifications to electronic which is a safe distance from the road. components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve- Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle could also have a negative impact on hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the vehicle. These warning labels are intended the operating safety of the vehicle. nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair fa- to make you and others aware of various Some safety systems only function while the cility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these engine is running. You should therefore nev- warning labels unless explicitly instructed to er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re- moval of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.

16 Introduction Problems with your vehicle ̄ Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada: Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9

17 Introduction Reporting safety defects ̄ Reporting safety defects For the USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”

Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

18 At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Door control panel

19 At a glance Cockpit ̄ Cockpit

20 At a glance Cockpit

Item Page Item Page Item Page 1 Combination switch 7 Front Parktronic* (Parking 226 g Parking brake pedal 45 assist) warning indicator ț Turn signals 47 h Hood lock release 272 for right front area ț Windshield wipers 48 j Parking brake release 45 8 Overhead control panel 27 ț High beam 128 k Door control panel 28 9 Glove box lock 231 Cruise control lever 210 l Exterior lamp switch 124 2 a Glove box lid release 231 ț Cruise control 203 m Headlamp washer button* 177 b Glove box 231 Front Parktronic* (Parking 226 ț Distronic* 206 n c Center console 25 assist) warning indicator Instrument cluster 22 3 d Starter switch 31 for left front area Multifunction steering 24 4 e Horn wheel f Steering wheel adjustment 37 5 Gear range indicator, clock 22 stalk 6 Lever for voice control sys- Heated steering wheel* 240 tem*, see separate operating instructions

21 At a glance Instrument cluster ̄ Instrument cluster

22 At a glance Instrument cluster

Item Page Item Page Item Page 1 Coolant temperature gauge 132 A High beam headlamp 48 a Outside temperature indica- 133 indicator tor 2 Fuel gauge with: - Fuel reserve warning lamp 308 Antilock Brake Sys- 304 b Left display with: tem (ABS) warning L 1 Supplemental 310 3 Left turn signal 47 lamp indicator lamp restraint system 7 Reset button 131 indicator lamp K Right turn signal ; indicator lamp 8 Display with: Brake warning lamp, 305 ț Program mode 170 USA only 4 Speedometer with: 3 Brake warning lamp, v ț Gear range indicator 166 ESP warning lamp 308 Canada only l ț Digital clock (see Distance warning 307 ? Engine malfunction 306 lamp COMAND operating instructions) indicator lamp, USA Vehicles without Distronic*: only Multifunction display Warning lamp without func- 9 ± with: Engine malfunction tion. It illuminates when the indicator lamp, ț ignition is on. It should go Trip odometer 132 Canada only out when the engine is run- ț Main odometer 132 ning. H Tire pressure warning 287, Stored speed for: lamp 309 5 Tachometer 133 ț Cruise control 203 c Knob for instrument cluster 131 Right display with: 6 ț Distronic* 206 illumination < Seat belt telltale 308

23 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel ̄ Multifunction steering wheel Item Page Item Page 1 Multifunction display 134 4 Menu systems: Press 135 Operating control 134 button system è for next system 2 Selecting the submenu or 135 ÿ for previous system setting the volume 5 Moving within a menu: 135 æ up / to increase Press button ç down / to decrease j for next display 3 Telephone*: Press button 144 k for previous display s to take a call to dial a call t to end a call to reject an incoming call

24 At a glance Center console ̄ Center console Upper part Item Page Item Page 1 Switch for rear window 179 9 Rear seat head restraints, 110 sunshade switch for folding down 2 Parking assist (Parktronic* 227 a Tow-away alarm switch 85 system) deactivation b COMAND system (see switch separate operating instruc- 3 Airmatic or ABC* switch 220 tions) 4 Level control switch 222 c Automatic climate control 194 5 Central locking switch 107 d Ashtray 238 Anti-theft alarm system in- 84 Lighter 239 dicator lamp 6 Hazard warning flasher 128 on/off switch 7 Central unlocking switch 107 8 ESP control switch 80

25 At a glance Center console

Lower part Item Page 1 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 33 button 2 Gear selector lever for 43 automatic transmission 3 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 71 indicator lamp 4 Thumbwheel for setting 213 distance in Distronic* 5 Distance warning func- 213 tion* on/off switch 6 Lower storage compart- 232 ments 7 Program mode selector for 170 automatic transmission

26 At a glance Overhead control panel ̄ Overhead control panel Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 130 2 Rear interior lighting 130 on/off 3 Right reading lamp on/off 130 4 Interior lighting control 129 5 Sliding/pop-up roof 199 6 Hands-free microphone for 242 Tele Aid (emergency call system), telephone*, and voice control system* (see separate operating instructions) 7 Rear view mirror 38 8 Garage door opener 250 9 Tele Aid (emergency call 245 system) button

27 At a glance Door control panel ̄ Door control panel Item Page Item Page 1 Door handle 96 7 Rear passenger compart- 74 ment override switch 2 Memory function (for stor- 121 ing seat, exterior mirror, 8 Switches for opening/clos- 195 and steering wheel set- ing rear windows tings) 9 Remote trunk lid release 97 3 Seat heating* 114 switch Seat ventilation* 117 Trunk lid opening/closing 99 system* switch 4 Seat adjustment 35 5 Exterior mirror adjustment 38, 174 6 Switches for opening/clos- 195 ing front door windows

28 Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking

29 Getting started Unlocking ̄ Unlocking The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey ̈ Press unlock button Œ on the overview of the vehicle’s most basic func- SmartKey. tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners All turn signal lamps flash once. The should pay special attention to the infor- locking knobs in the doors move up. mation given here. ̈ Get in the vehicle and insert the If you are already familiar with the basic SmartKey in the starter switch. functions described here, the “Controls in detail” section will provide you with further For more information, see “Locking and information. The corresponding page refer- unlocking” (୴ page 88). ences are located at the end of each segment. SmartKey with remote control 1 ‹ Lock button 2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid 3 Œ Unlock button 4 Â Panic button

30 Getting started Unlocking

Starter switch positions G ! Warning! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch, the battery may not be When leaving the vehicle, always remove the sufficiently charged. SmartKey from the starter switch, take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and ̈ Check the battery and charge it lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- if necessary (୴ page 366). attended in the vehicle, or with access to an ̈ Get a jump start (୴ page 369). unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident To prevent accelerated battery dis- and/or serious personal injury. charge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from Starter switch the starter switch when the engine is 0 For removing SmartKey i not in operation. 1 Power supply to some electrical con- The SmartKey can only be removed sumers, such as seat adjustment from the starter switch with the gear 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical selector lever in position P. consumers) and driving position 3 Starting position

31 Getting started Unlocking

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* i Warning! G To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey If your vehicle is equipped with the with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the KEYLESS-GO function, your vehicle checks When leaving the vehicle, always remove the vehicle, no further than approximately whether the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is SmartKey from the starter switch, take the 3 feet (1 meter) away from the door. valid when you grasp the door handle. If SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and your SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- ̈ the doors will unlock, and you can open Grasp the outside door handle. attended in the vehicle, or with access to an them. All turn signal lamps flash once. The unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident The function of the SmartKey overrules the locking knobs in the doors move up. and/or serious personal injury. KEYLESS-GO function. If the SmartKey is inside the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever corresponds to turning the SmartKey to the various starter switch positions.

32 Getting started Unlocking

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be Ignition (or position 2) located in the vehicle. ̈ Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop ̈ Make sure the gear selector lever is set button 1 twice. to P. This supplies power to all electrical ̈ Do not depress the brake pedal. consumers. All the lamps in the instrument cluster come on. Position 1 ̈ Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO button 1 once. 1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button start/stop button once, the power sup- This supplies power to some electrical ply is again switched off. Before you press the KEYLESS-GO consumers, such as seat adjustment. start/stop button , the vehicle’s 1 For more information, see “SmartKey with on-board electronics have status 0 (as with i KEYLESS-GO*” (୴ page 91). SmartKey removed). If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, ț once again, the ignition (position 2) see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*” is switched on (୴ page 44). ț twice, the power supply is again switched off

33 Getting started Adjusting ̄ Adjusting

Your seat must be adjusted so that you can Warning! G Warning! G correctly fasten your seat belt (୴ page 40). All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Never place hands under the seat or near Children 12 years old and under must never rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- any moving parts while a seat is being ad- ride in the front seat, except in a tening of seat belts, must be done before justed. Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM the vehicle is put into motion. compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve- G Seats Warning! hicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise When leaving the vehicle, always remove the they will be struck by the airbag when it in- Warning! G SmartKey from the starter switch, take the flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and fatal injury will result. lock your vehicle. Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. According to accident statistics, children Adjusting the seat while driving could cause Even with the SmartKey removed from the are safer when properly restrained in the the driver to lose control of the vehicle. starter switch or the SmartKey with rear seating positions than in the front seat- Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, ing positions. Infants and small children back in an excessively reclined position as the power seats can be operated when the must ride in back seats and be seated in an this can be dangerous. You could slide un- respective door is open. Therefore, do not appropriate infant or child restraint system, der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide leave children unattended in the vehicle, or which is properly secured with the vehicle's under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu- seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via domen or neck. That could cause serious or pervised use of vehicle equipment may lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat cause an accident and/or serious personal accordance with the child seat manufactur- belts provide the best restraint when the injury. er’s instructions. wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body.

34 Getting started Adjusting

̈ Switch on ignition. Seat cushion tilt A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints or ̈ Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow until your upper are not properly secured in the vehicle and ̈ Open the respective door. 3 the child is not properly secured in the child legs are lightly supported. restraint. Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion depth ̈ Press the switch forward or backward Seat adjustment ̈ Press the switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow 5. The seat adjustment switches are located in the direction of arrow 4 until your on the front doors. Adjust seat to a comfortable seating legs are supported comfortably. position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. Seat backrest tilt The position should be as far to the rear ̈ as possible, consistent with ability to Press the switch forward or backward properly operate controls. in the direction of arrow 6 until your arms are slightly angled when holding i the steering wheel. When moving the seat, make sure there are no items in the footwell or be- Seat height hind the seats. Otherwise you could ̈ Press the switch up or down in the di- damage the seats. rection of arrow 2. 1 Head restraint height ୴ 2 Seat height The memory function ( page 121) lets 3 Seat cushion tilt you store the setting for the seat posi- 4 Seat cushion depth tion together with the settings for the 5 Seat fore and aft adjustment steering wheel and the exterior rear 6 Seat backrest tilt view mirrors.

35 Getting started Adjusting

Head restraint height Head restraint tilt The front passenger seat head restraint ̈ Press the switch up or down in the di- automatically lowers after a few seconds when the front passenger seat is rection of arrow 1. not occupied. This improves the G driver's outward view as well as the for- Warning! ward view from the rear passenger compartment. For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. When the front passenger seat is occupied again, the front passenger seat Adjust head restraint so that the center of head restraint returns to the last set the head restraint supports the back of the position within a few seconds. head at eye level. This will reduce the poten- Manually adjust the angle of the head re- tial for injury to the head and neck in the straint. If the front passenger seat was moved fore or aft while not being occupied, event of an accident or similar situation. ̈ Push or pull on the lower edge of the the front passenger seat head restraint Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraint cushion. returns to a position that corresponds head restraints. Head restraints are intend- best with the seat’s axial position when ed to help reduce injuries during an acci- i the seat is occupied again. dent. The feature below is deactivated at the factory. If you wish to have it activated, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz For more information, see “Seats” ୴ Center: ( page 108).

36 Getting started Adjusting

Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering column in or out The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is ̈ Move stalk forward or back in the direc- located on the steering column (lower left). tion of arrow until a comfortable Warning! G 1 steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv- Adjusting steering column up or down ing could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ̈ Move the stalk up or down in the direc- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the tion of arrow 2. SmartKey from the starter switch, take the Make sure your legs can move freely SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and and all the displays (incl. malfunction lock your vehicle. and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible. Even with the SmartKey removed from the 1 Adjusting steering column, in or out starter switch or the SmartKey with 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, i ̈ Switch on ignition. ୴ the steering wheel adjustment feature can The memory function ( page 121) lets be operated when the driver’s door is open. or you store settings for the steering wheel together with the settings for the Therefore, do not leave children unattended ̈ Open the driver’s door. in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked exterior rear view mirrors and the seat vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- position. ment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. For more information, see “Heated steering wheel*” (୴ page 240).

37 Getting started Adjusting

Mirrors Interior rear view mirror Exterior rear view mirror ̈ Manually adjust the interior rear view Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirror. Warning! G mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic condi- ! Exercise care when using the passenger tions. Electrolyte drops coming into contact side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror with the vehicle paint finish can only be surface is convex (outwardly curved surface Warning! G completely removed while in their liq- for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror uid state and by applying plenty of wa- are closer than they appear. Check your in- In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte ter. terior rear view mirror or glance over your may escape the mirror housing if the mirror shoulder before changing lanes. glass breaks. For more information, see “Rear view mir- Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al- ror” (୴ page 174). low the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

38 Getting started Adjusting

The buttons are located on the driver’s ̈ Switch on ignition. i door. ̈ Press button 1 for the left mirror or The memory function (୴ page 121) lets button 2 for the right mirror. you store the setting for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the set- ̈ Push adjustment button up, down, 3 ting for the steering wheel and the seat left, or right according to the desired position. setting. At low ambient temperatures, the mir- ! rors will be heated automatically. For information on how to reposition the exterior mirror housing when it was For more information, see “Folding the ex- forcibly pushed forward (hit from the terior mirrors in and out automatically” rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit ୴ 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror ( page 176). button from the front), see “Folding the exteri- Passenger-side exterior rear view mir- or mirrors in and out manually” 2 ୴ ror button ( page 176). 3 Adjustment button

39 Getting started Driving ̄ Driving Fastening the seat belts In the same crash, the possibility of injury or Warning! G death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The airbags can only provide the Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot- Warning! G well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear- Always fasten your seat belt before driving (୴ page 58). ance for the pedals. off. Always make sure your passengers are During sudden driving or braking maneuvers properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women. the objects could get caught between the Warning! G pedals. You could then no longer brake or Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- accelerate. sition your seat belt greatly increases your Children 12 years old and under must never risk of injuries and their likely severity in an ride in the front seat, except in a accident. You and your passengers should Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1 always wear seat belts. compatible child seat, which operates with TM If you are ever in an accident, your injuries the BabySmart system installed in the ve- can be considerably more severe without hicle to deactivate the passenger front air- your seat belt properly buckled. Without bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise your seat belt buckled, you are much more they will be struck by the airbag when it in- likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or ejected from it. You can be seriously injured fatal injury will result. or killed. 1 BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens Automo- tive Corp.

40 Getting started Driving

According to accident statistics, children Warning! G Warning! G are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat- Never let more people ride in the vehicle Read and observe the additional warning no- ing positions. Infants and small children than there are seat belts available. Be sure tices printed in the “Safety and Security” must ride in back seats and be seated in an everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re- section (୴ page 62). appropriate infant or child restraint system, strained with a separate seat belt. Never use which is properly secured with the vehicle's a seat belt for more than one person at a seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via time. lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Warning! G A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat are not properly secured in the vehicle and backrest in an excessively reclined position the child is not properly secured in the child as this can be dangerous. You could slide restraint. under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- 1 Release button domen or neck. That could cause serious or 2 Buckle even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and 3 Latch plate seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the ̈ Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt is properly positioned on the body. seat belt outlet. ୴୴

41 Getting started Driving

୴୴̈ Place the shoulder portion of the belt ț Place the seat backrest in a nearly up- across the top of your shoulder and the right position. Warning! G lap portion across your hips. ț Never use a seat belt for more than one Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They ̈ Push latch plate 3 into buckle 2 until person at a time. could tear. it clicks. ț Do not fasten a seat belt around a per- Do not allow the belt to get caught in the ̈ If necessary, tighten the lap portion to son and another object at the same door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion time. This could damage the belt. up. ț Check your seat belt during travel to Never attempt to make modifications to make sure that it is properly posi- Proper use of seat belts seat belts. This could impair the effective- tioned. ness of the belts. ț Do not twist the belt when fastening. ț Make sure that the seat belt is always Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may ț Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder fitted snugly. Take special care of this severely weaken them. In a crash, they may portion is located as close as possible when wearing loose clothing. not be able to provide adequate protection. to the middle of the shoulder (it should Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly not touch the neck). Never pass the stressed in an accident must be replaced. shoulder portion of the belt under your Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- arm. ter. ț Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen.

42 Getting started Driving

Starting the engine Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey ̈ Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P. Warning! G ̈ Do not depress accelerator. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to ̈ Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon to position 3 and hold until the engine monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon- starts (୴ page 31). sciousness and lead to death. Do not run the engine in confined areas i (such as a garage) which are not properly You can also use the “touch-start” ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for automatic function. Turn the SmartKey to fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, transmission position 3 and release it again immedi- have the cause determined and corrected P Park position with gear selector lever ately. The engine then starts automati- immediately. If you must drive under these lock cally. conditions, drive with at least one window R Reverse gear fully open. N Neutral ̈ Depress the brake pedal. D Drive position The gear selector lever lock is released. For more information, see the “Controls in detail” section (୴ page 164). For information on turning off the engine with the SmartKey, see “Turning off with the SmartKey” (୴ page 53).

43 Getting started Driving

Starting with KEYLESS-GO* ̈ Make sure the gear selector lever is set Starting difficulties You can start your vehicle without the to P. If the engine does not start as described, SmartKey in the starter switch using the ̈ Depress the brake pedal during the carry out the following steps: KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the starting procedure. Do not depress ac- ̈ If you are starting the engine with the gear selector lever. celerator. SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be The gear selector lever lock is released. switch to position 0 and repeat starting located in the vehicle. procedure. ̈ Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 once. ̈ If you are starting the engine with The engine starts automatically if the KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the may be open to allow for better detec- vehicle . tion of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. For information on turning off the engine or: with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off the en- Start the engine with the SmartKey as gine with KEYLESS-GO*” (୴ page 54). radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. 1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

44 Getting started Driving

̈ Repeat the starting procedure Parking brake (୴ page 43). Remember that extended Warning! G starting attempts can drain the battery. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ̈ ୴ Get a jump start ( page 369). SmartKey from the starter switch, take the If the engine does not start after several SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and starting attempts, there could be a mal- lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- function in the engine electronics or in the attended in the vehicle, or with access to an fuel supply system. unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an acci- ̈ Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz dent and/or serious injury. Center.

̈ Release the parking brake by pulling handle 2. The indicator lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument 1 Parking brake pedal cluster goes out. 2 Parking brake release handle

45 Getting started Driving

Driving Once the vehicle is in motion, the automat- Warning! G ic central locking system engages and the ̈ Depress the brake pedal. locking knobs drop down. ̈ Move gear selector lever to position D On slippery road surfaces, never downshift or R. in order to obtain braking action. This could ! result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- If you hear a warning signal and a mes- cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre- sage appears in the multifunction dis- Warning! G vent this type of loss of control. play when driving off, you have It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le- forgotten to release the parking brake. ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high- ! Release the parking brake. er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly In order to avoid damaging the trans- on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel- mission, After a cold start, the automatic transmis- erate quickly forward or in reverse. You ț wait for the gear selection process sion shifts at a higher engine revolution. could lose control of the vehicle and hit to complete before setting the vehi- This allows the catalytic converter to reach someone or something. Only shift into gear cle in motion. its operating temperature earlier. when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. ț place the gear selector lever in ! position R only when the vehicle is Do not run cold engine at high engine stopped. speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service ̈ Release the brake pedal. life of the engine. ̈ Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

46 Getting started Driving

! Switching on headlamps Turn signals and high beam Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake re- The combination switch is located on the duces engine performance and causes left of the steering column. premature brake and drivetrain wear.

i You can open a locked door from the inside. Open doors only when conditions are safe to do so.

You can deactivate the automatic lock- Exterior lamp switch ing using the control system (୴ page 159). 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on Combination switch For more information, see “Driving instruc- ̈ Turn the switch to B. 1 Turn signals, right ୴ Turn signals, left tions” ( page 259). For more information, see “Exterior lamp 2 switch” (୴ page 124). ̈ Press the combination switch up 1 or down 2. i To signal minor directional changes, move combination switch to point of resistance only and release. The turn signal flashes three times.

47 Getting started Driving

High beam Windshield wipers Switching on windshield wipers ̈ Push the combination switch forward. ̈ Turn the combination switch to the de- The combination switch is located on the sired position depending on the inten- The high beam headlamps are switched left of the steering column. sity of the rain. on. The high beam headlamp 0 Windshield wipers off A indicator in the tachometer I Intermittent wiping (interval depen- comes on. dent on wetness of windshield) For more information, see “High beam II Normal wiper speed flasher” (୴ page 128). III Fast wiper speed

i The intermittent wiping interval is de- Combination switch pendent on wetness of windshield. Wiping will not occur with a door open. 1 Single wipe 2 Switching on windshield wipers ̈ Make sure the ignition is switched on. All the lamps in the instrument cluster come on.

48 Getting started Driving

! Wiping with windshield washer fluid ț turn off the engine by pressing the Do not leave windshield wipers in inter- ̈ Press switch in the direction of KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and open the driver’s door (with the mittent setting when vehicle is taken to arrow 1 past the resistance point. an automatic car wash or during wind- driver’s door open, starter switch is The windshield wiper operates with shield cleaning. Wipers will operate in in position 0, same as with washer fluid. the presence of water sprayed on the SmartKey removed from starter windshield, and wipers may be dam- For information on filling up the washer switch) aged as a result. reservoir, see “Windshield washer system before attempting to remove any block- and headlamp cleaning system*” The switch should not be left in inter- age. (୴ page 281). mittent setting as the wipers will wipe ț Remove blockage. the windshield once every time the en- ! gine is started. Dust that accumulates ț Turn the windshield wipers on If anything blocks the windshield wip- on the windshield might scratch the again. ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off glass and/or damage the wiper blades immediately. If windshield wipers fail to function at when wiping occurs on a dry wind- all in switch position I, shield. ț For safety reasons, ț set the combination switch to the ț turn off the engine by turning next highest wiper speed Single wipe the SmartKey to position 0 and ț have the windshield wipers ̈ Press switch briefly in the direction of withdraw SmartKey from starter switch checked at the nearest authorized arrow 1. Mercedes-Benz Center The windshield wipers wipe one time or without washer fluid.

49 Getting started Driving

Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above In case of accident 248°F (120°C) If the vehicle is leaking gasoline: The coolant is too hot and is no longer The engine runs erratically and misfires ̈ Do not start the engine under any cir- cooling the engine. ț An ignition cable may be damaged. cumstances. ̈ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible ț The engine electronics may not be op- ̈ Notify local fire and/or police authori- and turn off the engine. Allow engine erating properly. ties. and coolant to cool. ț Unburned gasoline may have entered If the extent of the damage cannot be de- ̈ Check the coolant level and add cool- the catalytic converter and damaged it. termined: ant if necessary (୴ page 278). ̈ Give very little gas. ̈ Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ̈ Have the problem repaired by an au- i thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as Excessive coolant temperatures trigger If no damage can be determined on the soon as possible. a warning message in the multifunction display (୴ page 323). ț major assemblies ț fuel system ț engine mount: ̈ Start the engine in the usual manner.

50 Getting started Parking and locking ̄ Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive. ț Turn the SmartKey to starter switch Warning! G You have properly stopped and parked position 0 and remove, or press your vehicle. End your drive as follows. start/stop button (vehicles with Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- KEYLESS-GO*). bustible materials such as grass, hay, or G ț Warning! leaves can come into contact with the hot Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when exhaust system, as these materials could be Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re- leaving. ignited and cause a vehicle fire. moving the SmartKey from the starter switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re- the SmartKey is removed. sult of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always: ț Keep right foot on brake pedal. Warning! G ț Firmly depress parking brake pedal. ț Move the gear selector lever to With the engine not running, there is no position P. power assistance for the brake and the ț steering systems. In this case, it is impor- Slowly release brake pedal. tant to keep in mind that a considerably ț When parked on an incline, turn front higher degree of effort is necessary to brake wheel towards the road curb. and steer the vehicle.

51 Getting started Parking and locking

Parking brake Warning! G Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se- SmartKey from the starter switch, take the lector lever not fully engaged in position P is SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- position P alone may not prevent your vehi- attended in the vehicle, or with access to an cle from moving, possibly hitting people or unlocked vehicle. Children could release the objects. parking brake and/or move the gear selec- Always set the parking brake in addition to tor lever from position P, either of which shifting to position P (୴ page 166). could result in an accident and/or serious injury. When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb.

1 Parking brake 2 Release handle ̈ Step firmly on parking brake 1. When the engine is running, the indicator lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster illuminates.

52 Getting started Parking and locking

Switching off headlamps i Warning! G The SmartKey can only be removed ̈ Turn the exterior lamp switch to M. from the starter switch with the gear To prevent possible personal injury, always For more information, see “Lighting” selector lever in position P. keep hands and fingers away from the door (୴ page 124). openings when closing the doors. Be espe- ̈ Press the seat belt release button cially careful when small children are Turning off the engine ୴ ( page 41). around. ̈ Place the gear selector lever in Allow the retractor to completely re- Before closing doors, make sure there is no position P. wind the seat belt by guiding the latch possibility of someone getting caught in a plate. door during closing. i i Always set the parking brake in addi- ̈ After exiting the vehicle press the lock With the SmartKey removed and the tion to shifting to position P. button ‹ on the SmartKey driver’s door open, a warning sounds if (୴ page 30). On steep slopes, turn the front wheels the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not towards the curb. switched off. All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs on the doors move Turning off with the SmartKey down. ̈ Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch (୴ page 31) to position 0 and remove it. The immobilizer is activated.

53 Getting started Parking and locking

G Turning off the engine with ! Warning! KEYLESS-GO* If you hear a warning signal, you have ̈ either When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Place the gear selector lever in SmartKey from the starter switch and lock position P. ț forgotten to turn off the lights be- your vehicle. Do not leave children unat- ̈ Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop fore opening the driver’s door tended in the vehicle, or with access to an button to shut off the engine. or unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- With the driver's door closed, the start- cle equipment may cause an accident ț tried to turn off the engine while the er switch is now in position 1. With the and/or serious injury. gear selector lever is not in P. driver’s door opened, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey Turn off the lights or place the gear se- For more information, see “Locking and removed from starter switch lector lever in P. unlocking” (୴ page 88). (୴ page 31). ̈ Press the seat belt release button Warning! G (୴ page 41). Allow the retractor to completely re- To prevent possible personal injury, always wind the seat belt by guiding the latch keep hands and fingers away from the door plate. openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are around. Before closing doors, make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing.

54 Getting started Parking and locking

̈ After exiting the vehicle, press lock G button 1 on the door handle or on the Warning! trunk lid. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the All turn signal lamps flash three times. SmartKey from the starter switch, take the The locking knobs on the doors move SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and down. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 Lock button on the door handle

For more information, see “Locking and unlocking” (୴ page 88).

55 56 Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti-theft systems

57 Safety and Security Occupant safety ̄ Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most im- The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument The restraint systems are fully operational portant facts about the restraint systems cluster comes on if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when of the vehicle. the engine is running. ț for about four seconds when you turn The restraint systems are: the SmartKey in the starter switch to A malfunction in the system has been de- position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO* tected if the 1 indicator lamp: ț Seat belts start/stop button once. It then goes ț fails to extinguish after approximately ț Emergency tensioning device out briefly, comes on again and re- four seconds. ț Airbags mains lit until you start the engine. ț does not come on at all. ț Child seats ț for about four seconds when you start the engine by turning the SmartKey or ț comes on after the engine was started ț Child seat recognition pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop or while driving. ț Lower anchors and tethers for children button. For safety reasons, we strongly recom- (LATCH) mend that you visit an authorized i As independent systems, their protective Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if effects work in conjunction with each oth- have the system checked. the SmartKey is turned to position 2 er. and left there or the KEYLESS-GO* For more information, see “Practical hints” start/stop button is pressed twice. The (୴ page 303). i indicator lamp will go out when you For information on infants and children start the engine. traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (୴ page 69).

58 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Airbags Warning! G Warning! G

In the event that the 1 indicator lamp Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front comes on during driving or does not come airbags inflate, it is very important for the on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a Airbags are designed to reduce the potential driver and passenger front to always be in a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly of injury and fatality in certain frontal improperly seated position and to wear your recommend that you visit an authorized pacts (front airbags), side impacts (side im- seat belts. Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have pact airbags and head protection window For maximum protection in the event of a the system checked; otherwise the SRS may curtain airbags) or rollovers (head protec- collision always be in normal seated position not be activated when needed in an acci- tion window curtain airbags). However, no with your back against the seat backrest. dent, which could result in serious or fatal system available today can totally eliminate Fasten your seat belt and ensure that it is injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and injuries and fatalities. properly positioned on your body. unnecessarily which could also result in The activation of the airbags temporarily re- injury. Since the airbag inflates with considerable leases a small amount of dust from the air- speed and force, a proper seating and hands In addition, improper repair work on the SRS bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious on steering wheel position will help to keep creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera- to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in you at a safe distance from the airbag. Oc- tive or causing unintended airbag deploy- the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem- cupants who are unbelted, out of position or ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only porary breathing difficulty for people with too close to the airbag can be seriously in- be performed by qualified technicians. Con- asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid jured by an airbag as it inflates with great tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle force in the blink of an eye: as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any ț Sit properly belted in a nearly upright breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the position with your back against the seat vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get backrest. ୴୴ fresh air by opening a window or door.

59 Safety and Security Occupant safety

୴୴ ț Adjust the driver seat as far as possible This could result in serious injuries or Warning! G rearward, still permitting proper opera- death should the airbag be triggered. Al- tion of vehicle controls. The distance ways sit nearly upright, properly use the Accident research shows that the safest from the center of the driver’s breast- seat belts and appropriate size infant or place for children in an automobile is in the bone to the center of the airbag cover on child restraint system. the steering wheel must be at least 10 in rear seat. Should you choose to place a child (25 cm) or more. You should be able to ț Children 12 years old and under must 12 years old or under in the front passenger accomplish this by a combination of ad- never ride in the front seat, except in a seat of your vehicle, you must properly use justments to the seat and steering Mercedes-Benz authorized a BabySmartTM child restraint which will TM wheel. If you have any problems, please BabySmart compatible child seat, turn off the passenger front airbag. TM see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- which operates with the BabySmart BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any system installed in the vehicle to deacti- ter. side impact airbag. vate the passenger front airbag when it ț Do not lean with your head or chest is properly installed. Otherwise they will It should be noted that with respect to both close to the steering wheel or dash- be struck by the airbag when it inflates front and rear side impact airbags there is a board. in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa- possibility for a side airbag related injury if ț Keep hands on the outside of steering tal injury will result. occupants, especially children, are not prop- wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in- Failure to follow these instructions can re- erly seated or restrained when next to a side side the rim can increase the risk and sult in severe injuries to you or other occu- airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a potential severity of hand/arm injury side impact in order to do its job. when driver front airbag inflates. pants. ț Adjust the front passenger seat as far as If you sell your vehicle, it is extremely impor- To help avoid the possibility of injury, please possible rearward from the dashboard tant that you make the buyer aware of this follow these guidelines: when the seat is occupied. safety information. Be sure to give the buyer (1) Occupants, especially children, should ț Occupants, especially children, should this Operator's Manual. never place their bodies or lean their never lean their heads in the area of the heads in the area of the door where the door where the side airbag inflates. side airbag inflates. This could result in

60 Safety and Security Occupant safety

serious injuries or death should the side i We caution you not to rely on the pres- airbag be activated. Airbags are designed to activate only in ence of the airbags in order to avoid certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, wearing your seat belt. (2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use side impacts (side impact and head the seat belts and use an appropriately Your vehicle was originally equipped protection window curtain airbags) sized infant or child restraint system for with airbags that are designed to acti- which exceed preset thresholds, and in all children 12 years old or under. vate in certain impacts exceeding a certain rollovers (head protection win- preset threshold to reduce the poten- (3) Always wear seat belts properly. dow curtain airbags). Only during these tial and severity of injury. It is important If you believe that, even with the use of events will they provide their supple- for your safety and that of your passen- these guidelines, it would be safer for your mental protection. gers that you replace deployed airbags rear seat occupants to have the rear mount- The driver and passengers should al- and repair any malfunctioning airbags ed side airbags deactivated, then deactiva- ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it to ensure that the vehicle will continue tion can be accomplished upon your written is not possible for airbags to provide to provide supplemental crash protec- request to do so at your authorized their supplemental protection. tion for occupants. Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost. In case of other types of impacts and Please contact your local authorized impacts below airbag deployment Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer thresholds, airbags will not be activat- Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes ed. The driver and passengers will then (1-800-367-6372) for details. be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover.

61 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Safety guidelines for the seat belt, cover, door trim panels, or door frame ț An airbag system component within the emergency tensioning device and trims, and installation of additional elec- steering wheel gets hot after the airbag airbag trical/electronic equipment on or near has inflated. Do not touch. SRS components and wiring. Keep area ț In addition, improper repair work on the Warning! G between airbags and occupants free SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS from objects (e.g. packages, purses, inoperative or causing unintended air- ț Damaged seat belts or belts that were umbrellas, etc.). bag deployment. Work on the SRS must highly stressed in an accident must be therefore only be performed by qualified ț Do not pass belts over sharp edges. replaced and their anchoring points technicians. Contact an authorized They could tear. must also be checked. Use only belts in- Mercedes-Benz Center. ț stalled or supplied by an authorized Do not make any modification that could ț For your protection and the protection Mercedes-Benz Center. change the effectiveness of the belts. of others, when scrapping the airbag ț Airbags and pyrotechnic emergency ten- ț Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this unit or emergency tensioning device, sioning devices (ETDs) are designed to may severely weaken them. In a crash our safety instructions must be fol- function on a one-time only basis. An they may not be able to provide ade- lowed. These instructions are available airbag or ETD that was activated must quate protection. from your authorized Mercedes-Benz be replaced. PRE-SAFE has electrically ț Do not hang items such as coat hangers Center. operated reversible pre-tensioners in from the coat hooks or handles over the ț Given the considerable deployment addition to the pyrotechnic ETDs. door. These items may turn into projec- speed and the textile structure of the ț No modifications of any kind may be tiles and cause head and other injuries airbags, there is the possibility of abra- made to any components or wiring of when curtain airbag is deployed. sions or other injuries resulting from air- the SRS. This includes changing or re- ț Never place your feet on the instrument bag deployment. moving any component or part of the panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always SRS, the installation of additional trim keep both feet on the floor in front of the material, badges, etc. over the steering seat. wheel hub, passenger front airbag

62 Safety and Security Occupant safety

When you sell your vehicle we strongly Driver and passenger front airbags are de- ! urge you to give notice to the subsequent ployed: Do not place objects heavier than owner that it is equipped with an SRS by ț in the event of a frontal impact 20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger alerting them to the applicable section in seat. This could cause the front or side ț if impact exceeds a preset deployment the Operator’s Manual. impact airbag on the front passenger threshold side to deploy in a crash which exceeds Front airbags ț independently of the side impact air- the system's deployment threshold. bags The airbags will not deploy in impacts Side impact airbags, window curtain which do not exceed the system’s deploy- airbags ment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts. The passenger front airbag will only be deployed if: ț the front passenger seat is occupied ț the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console is not lit (୴ page 71) ț the impact exceeds a preset deploy- 1 Window curtain airbag ment threshold Side impact airbags 1 Driver airbag 2 2 Passenger front airbag

63 Safety and Security Occupant safety

The side impact airbags and window cur- Seat belts i tain airbags are deployed: For information on infants and children When the engine is started, the seat belt ț on the impacted side of the vehicle traveling with you in the vehicle and re- telltale < illuminates to remind you and straint systems for infants and chil- ț in impacts exceeding a preset deploy- your passengers to fasten your seat belts. dren, see “Children in the vehicle” ment threshold If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened be- (୴ page 69). ț independently of the front airbags fore the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < illuminates and a warning In addition, the window curtain airbags are chime sounds for approximately Warning! G deployed: six seconds when the engine is started. ț in certain vehicle rollovers The use of seat belts and infant and child Always fasten your seat belt before driving The side impact airbags and window cur- restraint systems is required by law in all off. Always make sure your passengers are tain airbags are not deployed in impacts 50 states, the District of Columbia, the properly restrained, even those sitting in the which do not exceed the system’s deploy- U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. rear and pregnant women. ment threshold. Even where this is not the case, all vehicle Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- occupants should have their seat belts fas- sition your seat belt greatly increases your The front passenger side impact airbag will tened whenever the vehicle is in motion. only deploy if the system senses that the risk of injuries and their likely severity in an front passenger seat is occupied. For more information, see “Fastening the accident. You and your passengers should seat belts” (୴ page 40). always wear seat belts.

64 Safety and Security Occupant safety

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries Warning! G Warning! G can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly your seat belt buckled, you are much more backrest in an excessively reclined position stressed in an accident must be replaced likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be cas this an be dangerous. You could slide and their anchoring points must also be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide checked. or killed. under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Only use seat belts which have been ap- In the same crash, the possibility of injury or domen or neck. That could cause serious or proved by Mercedes-Benz. death is lessened if you are properly wearing even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as seat belt provide the best restraint when the Do not make any modifications to the seat they are designed if the occupants are prop- wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belts. This can lead to unintended activation erly wearing their seat belts. belt is properly positioned on the body. or to failure. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may Warning! G not be able to provide adequate protection. Have all work carried out only by qualified Never let more people ride in the vehicle technicians. Contact an authorized than there are seat belts available. Be sure Mercedes-Benz Center. everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

65 Safety and Security Occupant safety

rollovers (window curtain airbags and ț Belts should not be worn twisted. In a Warning! G ETD). crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces. The USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY ț Never wear the shoulder belt under your twisted belt against your body could arm, against your neck or off your shoul- ț Seat belts can only work when used cause injuries. der. In a crash, your body would move properly. Never wear seat belts in any too far forward. That would increase the ț Pregnant women should also use a other way than as described in this sec- chance of head and neck injuries. The lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion tion, as that could result in serious inju- belt would also apply too much force to should be positioned as low as possible ries in case of an accident. the ribs or abdomen, which could se- on the hips to avoid any possible pres- ț Each occupant should wear their seat verely injure internal organs such as sure on the abdomen. belt at all times, because seat belts help your liver or spleen. ț Never place your feet on the instrument reduce the likelihood of and potential ț Never wear belts over rigid or breakable panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always severity of injuries in accidents, includ- objects in or on your clothing, such as keep both feet on the floor in front of the ing rollovers. The integrated restraint eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these seat. system includes SRS (driver airbag, pas- might cause injuries. senger front airbag, side impact airbags, head protection window curtain airbags ț Position the lap belt as low as possible for side windows), ETD (seat belt emer- on your hips and not across the abdo- gency tensioning device), and front seat men. If the belt is positioned across your knee bolsters. The system is designed abdomen, it could cause serious injuries to enhance the protection offered to in a crash. properly belted occupants in certain ț Never use a seat belt for more than one frontal (front airbags and ETD) and side person at a time. Do not fasten a seat (side impact, window curtain airbags belt around a person and another per- and ETD) impacts which exceed preset son or other objects. deployment thresholds and in certain

66 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Emergency tensioning device (ETD), In an impact, emergency tensioning devic- ! seat belt force limiter es remove slack from the belts in such a Do not place objects heavier than 20 way that the seat belts fit more snugly The seat belts for the front and rear outer lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. against the body. Belt force limiters reduce seats are equipped with emergency ten- This could cause the front or side im- the force exerted by the seat belts on oc- sioning devices and belt force limiters. pact airbag on the front passenger side cupants during a crash. to deploy in a crash which exceeds the The ETD is designed to activate in the fol- system's deployment threshold. lowing cases: Warning! G ț in frontal or rear-end impact exceeding Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt a preset severity level A pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device An automatic comfort-fit feature for front (ETD) that was activated must be replaced. ț in certain vehicle rollovers seats and for the rear outer seats (only for ț if the restraint systems are operational When disposing of the pyrotechnic emer- vehicles with electrically adjustable rear and functioning correctly, see gency tensioning device, our safety instruc- bench seat* or with individual seats* in the 1 indicator lamp (୴ page 58) tions must be followed. These are available rear) reduces the retracting force of the at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. seat belts when they are in normal use. i PRE-SAFE has electrically operated revers- The ETDs for the front seats will only ible pre-tensioners that do not require activate if the respective front seat belt replacement after activation. is fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle). The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate with or without the respective seat belt fastened.

67 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Preventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE) In such cases, the following systems are i automatically activated: The PRE-SAFE systems are activated in ț A front seat belt with the seat belt the previously described circumstanc- Warning G buckled is pre-tensioned electrically. es only at speeds exceeding 22 mph (35 km/h). The PRE-SAFE system is intended to reduce ț If the occupied front passenger seat or the effects of an accident on properly seat rear seats are in an unfavorable posi- When the driving dynamic situation has belted vehicle occupants. Despite having tion, they are adjusted to a better posi- passed without an accident occurring, the PRE-SAFE systems in your car, the pos- tion. Rear seat adjustment occurs only the pre-tensioning on the seat belts is sibility of injuries occurring as a result of an in vehicles with individual seats* in the deactivated. accident cannot be totally eliminated. rear. You can then adjust the seats and the Therefore you should always drive carefully ț The sliding/pop-up roof closes if the sliding sunroof to their previous posi- and adjust your driving to the prevailing vehicle is in a severe skid or is spin- tion. road, weather, and traffic conditions. ning. If the seat belts do not release: Your vehicle automatically takes preven- ̈ tive measures to better protect the occu- Adjust the backrest or seat slightly to pants in the following hazardous the rear until the seat belt tension is di- situations: minished. ț You execute an emergency braking ma- The locking mechanism releases. neuver and the Brake Assist System (୴ page 78) is activated. ț The PRE-SAFE system detects a critical driving dynamics situation.

68 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Children in the vehicle All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have special seat belt retractors Warning! G If an infant or child is traveling with you in for secure fastening of child restraints. the vehicle: Never release the seat belt buckle while the To fasten a child restraint, follow child re- vehicle is in motion, since the special seat ț Secure the child using an infant or child straint instructions for mounting. Then pull belt retractor will be deactivated. restraint appropriate for the age and the shoulder belt out completely and let it size of the child. retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratch- ț Make sure the infant or child is proper- eting sound can be heard to indicate that ! ly secured by a belt at all times while the special seat belt retractor is activated. The use of infant or child restraints is the vehicle is in motion. The belt is now locked. Push down on child required by law in all 50 states, the Dis- restraint to take up any slack. trict of Columbia, the U.S. territories, Infant and child restraint seats and infor- and all Canadian provinces. mation on choosing an appropriate re- To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and straint system can be obtained from any let seat belt retract completely. The seat Infants and small children should be authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. belt can again be used in the usual man- seated in an appropriate infant or child ner. restraint system properly secured by a Infant and child restraint systems lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a child restraint lower anchorage system TM1 i Use only a BabySmart compatible child For more information on child seats that complies with U.S. Federal Motor restraint for the front passenger seat in with mounting fittings for tether an- Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 this vehicle. chorages, see “Installation of infant and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety We recommend all infants and children be and child restraint systems” Standards 213 and 210.2. properly restrained at all times while the (୴ page 72). vehicle is in motion. For information on LATCH-type child seat mounts (୴ page 73). 1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automo- tive Corp.

69 Safety and Security Occupant safety

A statement by the child restraint man- fatal injury will result. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is ufacturer of compliance with this stan- significantly increased if the child restraints dard can be found on the instruction According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the are not properly secured in the vehicle and label on the restraint and in the instruc- the child is not properly secured in the child tion manual provided with the restraint. rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children restraint. When using any infant or child restraint must ride in back seats and be seated in an When the child restraint is not in use, re- system, be sure to carefully read and appropriate infant or child restraint system, move it from the vehicle or secure it with the follow all manufacturer’s instructions which is properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt to prevent the child restraint from for installation and use. seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via becoming a projectile in the event of an ac- Please read and observe warning labels lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in cident. affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant accordance with the child seat manufactur- Do not leave children, unattended in the ve- or child restraints. er’s instructions. hicle, even if the children are secured in a Infants and small children should never child restraint system. Unsupervised chil- G share a seat belt with another occupant. dren in a child restraint system may use ve- Warning! During an accident, they could be crushed hicle equipment and cause an accident between the occupant and seat belt. and/or serious personal injury. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Children too big for child restraint systems Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM must ride in back seats using regular seat compatible child seat, which operates with belts. Position shoulder belt across chest the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve- and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster hicle to deactivate the passenger front air- seat may be necessary to achieve proper bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they will be struck by the airbag when it in- they reach a height where a lap/shoulder flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or belt fits properly without a booster.

70 Safety and Security Occupant safety

BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation The “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator For more information, see “Practical hints” system lamp 1 located in the center console will (୴ page 303). be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0. Warning! G

i The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys- The system does not deactivate the tem will ONLY work with a special child seat side impact airbag or the emergency designed to operate with it. It will not work tensioning device. with child seats which are not BabySmartTM compatible. Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat installed Never place anything between seat cushion Indicator lamp and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces 1 After turning the SmartKey in the starter the effectiveness of the deactivation sys- TM Special BabySmart compatible child switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the tem. The bottom of the child seat must seats, designed for use with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or make full contact with the passenger seat Mercedes-Benz system and available at twice, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indi- cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are cator lamp 1 located in the center con- could cause injuries to the child in case of an TM required for use with the BabySmart air- sole comes on for approximately accident, instead of protecting the child. bag deactivation system. With the special six seconds and then goes out. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for child seat properly installed, the passenger If the indicator lamp should not come on or installation of special child seats. front airbag will not deploy. is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat. 1 BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens Automo- tive Corp.

71 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Installation of infant and child restraint Head restraints must be positioned such Warning! G systems that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat TM This vehicle is equipped with tether an- When using a BabySmart compatible back. child seat on the front passenger seat, the chorages for a top tether strap at each of passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the rear seating positions. Make sure the tether strap is not twisted. the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains illuminated. Make sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child seat. Should the light go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the light remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 1 Cover of top anchorage ring 2 Hook Do not place powered-on laptops, cell Anchorage ring ̈ Remove cover from anchorage ring. 3 phones and like electronic devices on the 1 ̈ Securely fasten hook , which is part front passenger seat. Signals from such de- ̈ Store cover in a convenient place 2 1 of the tether strap, to anchorage vices may interfere with the BabySmartTM (e.g. glove box). ring 3. system. Such signal interference may cause ̈ Guide tether strap between head re- the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp straint and top of seat back. i not to come on during self-test or be contin- For safety reasons, make sure the hook uously lit, indicating that the system is not has attached to the ring beyond the functioning. safety catch, as illustrated.

72 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Once the top tether anchorage hook is at- Child seat anchors – LATCH type ̈ Move rear power seats*/bench* to the ୴ tached, the child restraint itself can be se- This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH rearmost position ( page 118). cured. Tighten the top tether strap (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) ̈ Fold upholstery blend upward. according to the child restraint manufac- 3 type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for turer’s instructions. ̈ Turn installation device to a vertical the installation of a LATCH child seat with 4 position so that upholstery blend ̈ Reinstall cover after removing the the matching anchor fittings. 3 does not fold down. tether strap. If you have not installed a child seat, the ̈ Install child seat according to the man- LATCH anchor fittings are covered with an ufacturer’s instructions. Warning! G upholstery blend. A solid connection is established be- Vehicles with adjustable rear seats/bench*: tween the child seat and the body of Never adjust the rear seat position after in- the vehicle. stalling the child restraint. Adjusting the rear Do not adjust rear power seat*/bench* seat position after installing the child reposition after installing child restraint. straint could damage the child restraint and/or introduce undesirable slack into the webbing and loosen or misposition the child restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the child restraint and thus increasing the chance or severity of injury in an accident. 1 Indicates the position of the anchors 2 Anchors 3 Upholstery blend 4 Installation device

73 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Override switch for rear passenger Warning! G Warning! G compartment

Vehicles with adjustable rear seats/bench*: Children too big for child restraint systems You can disable select functions in the rear Never adjust the rear seat position after in- must ride in back seats using regular seat passenger compartment for added safety stalling the child restraint. Adjusting the rear belts. Position shoulder belt across chest (for instance when you have children riding seat position after installing the child re- and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster in the rear passenger compartment). straint could damage the child restraint seat may be necessary to achieve proper You can disable the following functions in and/or introduce undesirable slack into the belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until the rear passenger compartment: webbing and loosen or misposition the child they reach a height where a lap/shoulder restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the belt fits properly without a booster. ț rear door window operation ୴ child restraint and thus increasing the Install child seat according to manufactur- ( page 195) chance or severity of injury in an accident. er’s instructions. ț adjustment of front passenger seat ୴ The child seat must be firmly attached in from the rear* ( page 119) i right and left side anchor fittings 2. ț cigarette lighter in rear (୴ page 240) The child seat must be firmly attached An incorrectly mounted child seat may come in the right and left side anchor fittings. loose during an accident which could result Make sure the seat belt for the center in serious injury or death to your child. seat can operate freely with a child Damaged or impact damaged child seats or seat installed. child seat mounting fittings must be re- Non-LATCH type child seats may also placed. be used and can be installed using the Do not leave children unattended in the ve- vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child hicle, even if the children are secured in a seat according to the manufacturer’s child restraint system. instructions.

74 Safety and Security Occupant safety

The override switch is located on the driv- i Warning! G er’s door. Operation of the rear door windows with the switches located in the driver’s Activate the override switch when children door is still possible. are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win- Deactivating override switch dow opening. ̈ Slide override switch 1 to the left. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the The functions in the rear are enabled SmartKey from the starter switch, take the again. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- 1 Override switch attended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- Activating override switch cle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. ̈ Slide override switch 1 to the right. A dot becomes visible. The functions in the rear are disabled.

75 Safety and Security Panic alarm ̄ Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior Activating i lamps will operate for approximately For operation in the USA only: This de- 1 ̈ Press and hold button for at least 2 /2 minutes. 1 vice complies with Part 15 of the one second. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Deactivating ț This device may not cause harmful ̈ Press button 1 again. interference, and or ț this device must accept any interference received, including interfer- ̈ Insert SmartKey in starter switch. ence that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this Â button 1 device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

76 Safety and Security Driving safety systems ̄ Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on ABS the following driving safety systems: Warning! G ț ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of ac- Warning! G ț BAS (Brake Assist System) cidents: ț ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ț Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump- ț Wet and slippery road surfaces ț 4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic Trac- ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of tion System) ț Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking The ABS, BAS, ESP, and 4MATIC cannot re- effectiveness. i duce this risk. In winter operation, the maximum ef- The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates fectiveness of the ABS, ESP, BAS and Always adjust your driving style to the pre- the brake pressure so that the wheels do 4MATIC is only achieved with winter vailing road and weather conditions. not lock during braking. This allows you to tires (M+S tires) or snow chains as re- maintain the ability to steer your vehicle. quired. The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pressure.

77 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

The - indicator lamp in the instrument Emergency brake maneuver BAS cluster comes on when you turn the ̈ Keep continuous full pressure on the SmartKey in the starter switch to The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in brake pedal. position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* emergency situations. If you apply the start/stop button twice. It goes out when brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically the engine is running. Warning! G provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. Apply Braking The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of continuous full braking pressure until the physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can emergency braking situation is over. The At the instant one of the wheels is about to it increase braking or steering efficiency be- ABS will prevent the wheels from locking. lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the yond that afforded by the condition of the When you release the brake pedal, the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af- brakes function again as normal. The BAS the regulating mode. forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, is then deactivated. ̈ Keep firm and steady pressure on the including those resulting from excessive brake pedal while experiencing the pul- speed in turns, following another vehicle too sation. closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped yields the advantages provided by the ABS, vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- namely braking power and the ability to less or dangerous manner which could jeop- steer the vehicle. ardize the user’s safety or the safety of The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- others. tion of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care For more information, see “Practical hints” while driving. (୴ page 303).

78 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

ESP Warning! G Warning! G The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of monitors the vehicle's traction (force of Never switch off the ESP when you see the physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can adhesive friction between the tires and the ESP warning lamp v flashing in the in- it increase braking efficiency beyond that af- road surface) and handling. strument cluster. In this case proceed as fol- forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes lows: The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin- and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap- ț While driving off, apply as little throttle prevent accidents, including those resulting plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and as possible. from excessive speed in turns, following an- by limiting engine output, the ESP works to ț While driving, ease up on the accelera- other vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially tor. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can useful while driving off and on wet or slip- ț prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS Adapt your speed and driving style to pery road surfaces. the prevailing road conditions. equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which The ESP warning lamp v in the instru- Failure to observe these guidelines could could jeopardize the user’s safety or the ment cluster flashes when the ESP is en- cause the vehicle to skid. safety of others. gaged. The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting The ESP warning lamp v in the instru- from excessive speed. ment cluster comes on when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice. It goes out when the engine is running.

79 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

G ! Switching off the ESP Warning! Vehicles without 4MATIC: Because of the ESP’s automatic opera- G The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of Warning! tion, the engine and ignition must be physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can shut off (SmartKey in starter switch The ESP should not be switched off during it increase the traction afforded. The ESP position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO normal driving other than in the circum- cannot prevent accidents, including those start/stop button* in position 0 or 1) stances described below. Disabling of the resulting from excessive speed in turns, or when: system will reduce vehicle stability in stan- hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and dard driving maneuvers. skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca- ț the parking brake is being tested on pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must a brake test dynamometer To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off never be exploited in a reckless or danger- ț the vehicle is being towed with the the ESP in driving situations where it would ous manner which could jeopardize the us- front/rear axle raised er’s safety or the safety of others. be advantageous to have the drive wheels Active braking action through the ESP spin and thus cut into surfaces for better may otherwise seriously damage the grip such as: ! brake system. The ESP will only function properly if ț starting out on slippery surfaces and in For information on vehicles with you use wheels of the recommended deep snow in conjunction with snow 4MATIC, see “Four wheel electronic tire size (୴ page 384). chains traction system (4MATIC) with the ț in sand or gravel ESP” (୴ page 82). i Distronic* is switched off when ESP is i For more information, see “Practical hints” Distronic* cannot be activated when activated. (୴ page 303). the ESP has been deactivated.

80 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

The switch is located on the center con- If one or more wheels are spinning, the sole. ESP warning lamp v in the speedome- Warning! G ter flashes, regardless of the speed. When the ESP warning lamp v is Traction control brakes a spinning wheel illuminated continuously, the ESP is even when the ESP is deactivated. switched off. The ESP always operates when you are Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- braking, even when it has been deactivating road conditions and to the non-operating ed. status of the ESP. ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an Switching on the ESP ESP off/on extended period with the ESP switched ̈ Press the ESP switch 1. 1 off. This may cause serious damage to The ESP warning lamp v in the in- ̈ Press ESP switch 1 until the ESP the drivetrain which is not covered by strument cluster goes out. You are now warning lamp v in the speedometer the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. comes on. again in normal driving mode. The ESP is deactivated.

81 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

Four wheel electronic traction system G ! (4MATIC) with the ESP Warning! Performance testing must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. Models with all-wheel drive only: If you see the ESP warning lamp v flashing in the speedometer dial, proceed as fol- Otherwise the transfer case can be The 4MATIC improves the vehicle’s ability lows: damaged, which is not covered by the to use available traction, e.g. during winter Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. operation in mountains under snowy con- ț While driving off, apply as little throttle ditions, by applying power to all four as possible. wheels. ț While driving, ease up on the accelera- ! tor. Because of the ESP’s automatic opera- ț Adapt your speed and driving style to tion, the engine and ignition must be the prevailing road conditions. shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO Failure to observe these guidelines could start/stop button* in position 0 or 1) cause the vehicle to skid. when the parking brake is being tested The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting on a brake test dynamometer. from excessive speed. Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the ! front or rear axle brake system. Do not tow with one axle raised. Operational tests with the engine run- Otherwise the transfer case can be ning can only be conducted on a damaged, which is not covered by the two-axle dynamometer. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

82 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems ̄ Anti-theft systems Immobilizer Deactivating Anti-theft alarm system ț With the SmartKey: Inserting the The immobilizer prevents unauthorized Once the alarm system has been armed, a SmartKey in the starter switch deacti- persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when vates the immobilizer. someone: Activating ț With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the en- ț opens a door gine by means of the start/stop button ț With the SmartKey: Removing the on the gear selector lever deactivates ț opens the trunk SmartKey from the starter switch acti- the immobilizer. vates the immobilizer. ț opens the hood ț With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the en- i The alarm will stay on even if the activating gine by means of the start/stop button In case the engine cannot be started element (a door, for example) is immedi- on the gear selector lever activates the (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), ately closed. immobilizer. the system is not operational. Contact The alarm system will also be triggered an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center when or call ț 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or someone attempts to raise the vehicle 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ț the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key

83 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems

i i Canceling the alarm If the alarm stays on for more than If the turn signal lamps does not flash To cancel the alarm: 20 seconds, an emergency call is initi- three times one of the following ele- ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys- ments may not be properly closed: With the SmartKey tem (୴ page 242) provided Tele Aid ț a door ̈ Insert the SmartKey in the starter service was subscribed to and properly switch. activated, and that necessary cellular ț the trunk lid service and GPS coverage are avail- ț the hood or able. ̈ Œ ‹ Close the respective element and lock Press the or button on the the vehicle again. SmartKey. Arming the alarm system With KEYLESS-GO* The alarm system is armed after locking Disarming the alarm system the vehicle with the SmartKey or ̈ Grasp the outside door handle. KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash- The alarm system is disarmed when you es three times to indicate that the alarm unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or or system is activated. The indicator lamp in KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash ̈ Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop the central locking switch (୴ page 107) once to indicate that the alarm system is button. will flash after approximately ten seconds deactivated when the alarm system is completely armed.

84 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems

Tow-away alarm Arming tow-away alarm The switch is located on the center console. When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual alarm is automatically armed after about and audible alarm will be triggered when 30 seconds. someone attempts to raise the vehicle. When you unlock your vehicle, the i tow-away protection disarms automatical- The tow-away protection alarm is trig- ly. gered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side. Disarming tow-away alarm If the alarm stays on for more than To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm, 20 seconds, an emergency call is initi- switch off the tow-away alarm feature be- ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys- fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on 1 Indicator lamp tem (୴ page 242) provided Tele Aid a surface subject to movement, such as a 2 Tow-away alarm off switch service was subscribed to and properly ferry or auto train. ̈ Switch off the ignition and remove the activated and that necessary cellular SmartKey. service and GPS coverage are available. i You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm if the ignition is switched on. ୴୴

85 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems

୴୴̈ Press switch 2. Canceling tow-away alarm With KEYLESS-GO* The indicator lamp 1 in the button To cancel the alarm: ̈ Grasp the outside door handle. comes on briefly. or ̈ With the SmartKey Exit vehicle and lock your vehicle with ̈ Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop ̈ the SmartKey or (vehicles with Insert the SmartKey in the starter button. KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button at each switch. door handle. or The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un- ̈ Press the Œ or ‹ button on the til you lock your vehicle again. SmartKey.

86 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Automatic transmission Good visibility Automatic climate control Power windows Sliding/pop-up roof Driving systems Loading Useful features

87 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking ̄ Locking and unlocking In the “Controls in detail” section you will SmartKey find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed in your vehicle. Your vehicle comes supplied with two If you are already familiar with the basic SmartKeys, each with remote control and functions of your vehicle, this section will a removable mechanical key. The locking be of particular interest to you. tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba- distinguish each SmartKey unit. sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the “Getting started” section of this manual. The SmartKey provides an extended oper- The corresponding page numbers are giv- ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is SmartKey with remote control en at the beginning of each segment. advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it. 1 ‹ Lock button Š Unlock button for trunk lid The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks: 2 3 Locking tab for mechanical key ț the doors 4 Œ Unlock button ț the trunk 5 Battery check lamp 6 Â Panic button (୴ page 76) ț the fuel filler flap

88 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Factory setting Selective setting Warning! G If you frequently travel alone, you may wish Global unlocking When leaving the vehicle, always remove the to reprogram the SmartKey so that ̈ Œ Œ SmartKey from the starter switch, take the Press button . pressing only unlocks the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and All turn signal lamps flash once. The lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unlocking knobs in the doors move up. ̈ Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ attended in the vehicle, or with access to an The vehicle will lock again automatically simultaneously for about six seconds unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children within approximately 40 seconds of un- until battery check lamp 5 flashes to open a locked door from the inside, which locking if: twice. could result in an accident and/or serious The SmartKey will then function as fol- personal injury. ț neither door nor trunk is opened lows: ț the SmartKey is not inserted in the Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler starter switch ! flap To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ț the central locking switch is not acti- ̈ Œ exposing the SmartKey to high levels of vated Press button once. electromagnetic radiation. Global unlocking Global locking ̈ Press button Œ twice. ̈ Press button ‹. i Global locking You can also open and close the power All turn signal lamps flash three times. windows (୴ page 197) and slid- ̈ Press button ‹. The locking knobs in the doors move ing/pop-up roof (୴ page 201) using down. the SmartKey.

89 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Restoring to factory setting ț Use the mechanical key to lock the i ̈ Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ doors (୴ page 348) and the trunk If the trunk lid does not open, it is still simultaneously for about six seconds lid (୴ page 349) as required. locked separately (if applicable) until battery check lamp 5 flashes If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, con- (୴ page 105). twice. tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- If the vehicle was previously centrally ter. locked, the trunk lid will lock automati- ! cally when closed. The turn signals will If you can no longer lock or unlock the Unlocking and opening the trunk lid flash three times to confirm locking. vehicle with the SmartKey, then the batteries in the SmartKey are dis- You can unlock and open the trunk lid sep- charged, the SmartKey is malfunction- arately. The trunk can also be opened from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emer- ing or the vehicle battery is drained. A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. gency release” (୴ page 104). ț Check the batteries in the (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. SmartKey and replace them if nec- ̈ Press and hold button Š until trunk essary (୴ page 349). unlocks and begins to open. ț Use the mechanical key to unlock the doors (୴ page 348) and the ! trunk lid (୴ page 349) as required. The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure that ț Have the vehicle battery and the there is sufficient overhead clearance. battery connections checked. Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing system: To stop the opening procedure, press button Š. The trunk lid stops moving.

90 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Checking the batteries Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ̈ Press button ‹ or Œ. If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key, Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come you should do the following: Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief- with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter- ̈ Have the SmartKey deactivated by an each with remote control and a removable ies are in order. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. mechanical key. The locking tabs for the ̈ Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key portion of the two Smart- ! mechanical key immediately to your Keys are a different color to help distin- If battery check lamp does not 5 car insurance company. guish each SmartKey unit. come on briefly during check, then the SmartKey batteries are discharged. ̈ If necessary, have the mechanical lock The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated replaced. into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the Replace the batteries (୴ page 349). validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You can obtain the required batteries is checked every time you grasp a door will be glad to supply you with a replace- at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- handle. ment. ter. If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, your vehicle unlocks: i ț the doors If the batteries are ckecked within sig- ț the trunk lid nal range of the vehicle, pressing the button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock ț the fuel filler flap the vehicle accordingly.

91 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

i Warning! G If the vehicle has been parked for a longer period of time, you must pull the When leaving the vehicle, always remove the door handle in order to activate the SmartKey from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO function. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- You can also close the power windows attended in the vehicle, or with access to an (୴ page 198) and sliding/pop-up roof unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- (୴ page 202) using the SmartKey with cle equipment may cause an accident KEYLESS-GO. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO and/or serious personal injury. Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO 1 ‹ Lock button 2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid ! ț You can also use the SmartKey with 3 Locking tab for mechanical key To prevent possible malfunction, avoid KEYLESS-GO like a normal 4 Œ Unlock button exposing the SmartKey with SmartKey (୴ page 88). 5 Battery check lamp KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electro- ț You can combine KEYLESS-GO func- Â ୴ 6 Panic button ( page 76) magnetic radiation. tions with normal SmartKey functions For more information on using the (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and SmartKey buttons, see “SmartKey” locking with the remote control). ୴ ( page 88). ț Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you.

92 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

ț Never store the SmartKey with ț If you have started the engine with the ț If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re- KEYLESS-GO together with: KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you moved from the vehicle while the en- can only turn it off again with this but- gine is switched on (e.g. if passenger ț Electronic items such as a cellular ton, even if you have put the SmartKey exits the vehicle with the SmartKey phone or another SmartKey with in the starter switch in the meantime. with KEYLESS-GO), the message KEY KEYLESS-GO NOT RECOGNIZED! ț This does not apply if, after starting, the will appear in the ț Metallic objects such as coins or gear selector lever is still in position P multifunction display. metal foil and the SmartKey is then inserted in Find the SmartKey or change its Doing so could impair the function of the starter switch. The SmartKey will present location immediately the KEYLESS-GO system. then have priority over the SmartKey (e.g. place it on the front passenger ț To lock or unlock the vehicle, the with KEYLESS-GO and the vehicle’s seat or insert it in shirt pocket). electrical system will operate accord- SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be ț Remember that the engine can be ing to the position of the SmartKey in located outside the vehicle within ap- started by anyone with a SmartKey the starter switch, even stopping the proximately 3 ft. (1 m) of a door or the with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the engine. trunk. vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with- ț In order to start the engine with the ț If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO: positioned farther away from the vehi- locking the vehicle, the message KEY cle, the system may no longer recog- DETECTED IN VEHICLE! will appear in ț The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. the multifunction display. must be located in the vehicle. The vehicle then cannot be locked or ț All doors must be closed. the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO system. ț The brake pedal must be firmly dep- resed. Do not depress the accelerator.

93 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Factory setting Selective setting Restoring to factory setting If you frequently travel alone, you may wish ̈ Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ Global unlocking to reprogram the SmartKey with simultaneously for about six seconds ̈ Grasp the door handle. KEYLESS-GO so when you, grasp the driv- until battery check lamp 5 flashes er’s door handle only the driver’s door and twice. The vehicle will lock again automatically the fuel filler flap unlocks. within approximately 40 seconds of un- ! locking if neither door nor trunk is opened. ̈ Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ If you can not lock or unlock the vehicle simultaneously for about six seconds with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, i until battery check lamp flashes 5 then the battery in the SmartKey is dis- The vehicle could inadvertently be un- twice. charged, the SmartKey with locked if the SmartKey with The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft. (1 m) of the then function as follows: vehicle battery is drained. vehicle and: Unlocking the driver’s door ț Check the battery in the SmartKey ț the door handle is splashed with with KEYLESS-GO and replace them water, or ̈ Grasp the driver’s door handle. if necessary (୴ page 349). ț you attempt to clean the door Global unlocking ț Use the mechanical key to unlock handle ̈ Grasp the door handle on the pas- the doors (୴ page 348) and the senger side. trunk lid (if applicable) Global locking Global locking (୴ page 349) as required. ̈ Press lock button at door handle ̈ ț Have the vehicle battery and the (୴ page 55) or trunk (୴ page 95). Press lock button at door handle or trunk lid. battery connections checked.

94 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

ț Use the mechanical key to lock the ̈ Press vehicle lock button 1. Checking the battery doors (୴ page 348) and the trunk or ̈ Press button ‹ or Œ. lid (୴ page 349) as required. ̈ Press the lock button at the outside Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief- If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is door handle (୴ page 55). ly to indicate that the SmartKey battery malfunctioning, contact an authorized is in order. Mercedes-Benz Center. or ̈ Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing ! Locking the vehicle system*, press the KEYLESS-GO lock- If battery check lamp 5 does not ing/closing switch at the trunk come on briefly during check, the (୴ page 103). SmartKey battery is discharged. The vehicle locks. The turn signals Replace the battery (୴ page 349). flashes three times to confirm locking. You can obtain the required battery at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If the battery is ckecked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the 1 Vehicle lock button button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.

95 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Opening the doors from the inside i If you lose your SmartKey with If the vehicle has previously been You can open a locked door from the in- KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you locked from the outside with the side. Open door only when conditions are should do the following: SmartKey, opening a door from the in- safe to do so. side will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys- ̈ Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO tem. deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: ̈ Report the loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key im- With the SmartKey mediately to your car insurance com- ț Insert the SmartKey in the starter pany. switch. ̈ Have the mechanical lock replaced if ț Press button Œ or ‹ on the necessary. SmartKey. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center 1 Locking knob With KEYLESS-GO* will be glad to supply you with a replace- 2 Inside door handle ment. ț Grasp the outside door handle. ̈ Pull on door handle 2. ț Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop If door was locked, locking knob 1 will button. move up.

96 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Opening the trunk lid from the outside Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing Opening the trunk lid from the inside system*: To stop the opening proce- A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. dure, press button Š. The trunk lid You can open the trunk from the inside if (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. stops moving. the vehicle is stationary. The trunk lid lock button is located in the A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. rear license plate recess. i (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. If the trunk lid does not open, it is still The switch is located on the driver’s door. locked separately (if applicable) (୴ page 349). Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The vehicle must be unlocked (୴ page 88). Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically after closing it (୴ page 98). The turn sig- 1 Trunk lid lock button nals will flash three times to confirm locking. ̈ Press the outer left-hand side of trunk 1 Indicator lamp lid button 1. 2 Remote trunk lid release switch The trunk can also be opened using the The trunk lid opens. SmartKey (୴ page 90) or from its inside in ̈ Pull remote trunk lid switch 2 until an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency trunk begins to open. ! release” (୴ page 104). The trunk lid opens. The indicator The trunk lid swings open upwards au- lamp comes on and remains lit until tomatically. Always make sure that 1 the trunk is closed. there is sufficient overhead clearance.

97 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

! Closing the trunk lid ̈ Push the trunk lid down gently at the The trunk lid swings open upwards au- extending handle 2 until it engages tomatically. Always make sure that into the lock. there is sufficient overhead clearance. The extending handle 2 is retracted after a few seconds. i The power closing assist automatically en- If the trunk lid does not open, it is still sures that the lid is pulled closed com- locked separately (if applicable) pletely (୴ page 106). (୴ page 349). If the vehicle was previously centrally Warning! G locked, the trunk lid will lock automati- 1 Handle cally when closed (୴ page 98). The To prevent possible personal injury, always turn signals will flash three times to ̈ Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on keep hands and fingers away from the trunk confirm locking. handle 1. lid opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are The trunk can also be opened using the around. SmartKey (୴ page 90) or from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (୴ page 104).

2 Extending handle

98 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Trunk lid opening/closing system* ̈ Pull remote trunk lid switch 2 until Warning! G trunk begins to open. You can open or close the trunk lid from The trunk lid opens. The indicator Only drive with the trunk closed as, among the inside if the vehicle is stationary. other dangers such as visibility blockage, lamp 1 comes and remains lit until the trunk is closed. exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi- Opening from the inside or. A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. ! (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure that i The switch for opening and closing the there is sufficient overhead clearance. Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk is located on the driver’s door. trunk. You may lock yourself out. To stop the opening procedure, press or pull the remote trunk lid switch. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a i SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recog- If the trunk lid does not open, it is still nized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. locked separately (if applicable) (୴ page 349). If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed (୴ page 98). The 1 Indicator lamp turn signals will flash three times to 2 Remote trunk lid switch confirm locking.

99 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

The trunk can also be opened using the Closing from the inside Even with the SmartKey removed from the SmartKey (୴ page 90) or from its inside in ̈ Press remote trunk lid switch starter switch or the SmartKey with an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency 2 (୴ page 99) until the indicator lamp KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, release” (୴ page 104). 1 goes out and trunk lid is closed. the remote trunk lid switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended Limiting opening height of trunk lid To interrupt the closing procedure: in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked The trunk lid opening height can be limited ̈ Release remote trunk lid switch 2. vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- when transporting goods on a roof rack ment may cause an accident and/or serious (e.g. presence of an MB sport luggage con- Warning! G personal injury. tainer*). When activated, the trunk lid opens to approximately the height of the Maintain sight of trunk area while operating If the trunk lid comes into contact with an roof edge. door mounted switch. Monitor the closing object while closing (e.g. luggage that has You can activate the limiting opening procedure carefully to ensure that no one is been piled too high) in the upper motion height of trunk lid using the control system in danger of being injured. sequence, the closing procedure is (୴ page 159). To interrupt the closing procedure, release stopped and the trunk reopens slightly. the door mounted remote trunk lid switch.

100 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Closing the trunk lid from the outside (vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*) Warning! G Warning! G

Monitor the closing procedure carefully to Only drive with the trunk closed as, among ensure that no one is in danger of being in- other dangers such as visibility blockage, jured. To prevent possible personal injury, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi- always keep hands and fingers away from or. the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, i press the remote trunk lid switch (on the Do not place the SmartKey in the open driver’s door), the trunk lid closing trunk. You may lock yourself out. switch , or the Š button on the 1 Trunk lid closing switch 1 SmartKey. ̈ Press trunk lid closing switch 1 briefly. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take the The trunk lid closes. SmartKey with you and lock your vehicle. Do If the trunk lid comes into contact with an not leave children unattended in the vehicle, object while closing (e.g. luggage that has or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu- been piled too high), the closing procedure pervised use of vehicle equipment may is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly. cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

101 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Closing the trunk lid from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) Warning! G Warning! G

Monitor the closing procedure carefully to Only drive with the trunk closed as, among ensure that no one is in danger of being in- other dangers such as visibility blockage, jured. To prevent possible personal injury, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi- always keep hands and fingers away from or. the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, i press the trunk lid closing switch (on the To prevent a possible inadvertent lock- driver’s door), the trunk lid closing out, the trunk lid will open automatical- switch or the Š button on the ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is 1 Trunk lid closing switch 1 SmartKey. recognized inside the vehicle or in the ̈ Make sure you have the SmartKey with trunk. KEYLESS-GO with you. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take the ̈ Press trunk lid closing switch 1 brief- SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and ly. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- The trunk lid closes. attended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- If the trunk lid comes into contact with an cle equipment may cause an accident object while closing (e.g. luggage that has and/or serious personal injury. been piled too high), the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.

102 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Closing the trunk lid and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with Warning! G Warning! G KEYLESS-GO*) Monitor the closing procedure carefully to Only drive with the trunk closed as, among On vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing ensure that no one is in danger of being in- other dangers such as visibility blockage, system and KEYLESS-GO, you can close jured. To prevent possible personal injury, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi- the trunk lid and lock the vehicle simulta- always keep hands and fingers away from or. neously. the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, i press the remote trunk lid switch (on the To prevent a possible inadvertent lock- driver’s door), the trunk lid closing out, the trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is switch 1, or the Š button on the SmartKey. recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- 1 attended in the vehicle, or with access to an ̈ Make sure you have the SmartKey with unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- KEYLESS-GO with you. cle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. ̈ Press switch 1 briefly. The vehicle is locked and the trunk lid closes automatically. The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking.

103 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Trunk lid emergency release i i The emergency release button unlocks If the emergency release button is The emergency release button is located and opens the trunk while the vehicle is pressed and the vehicle was centrally on the inside of the trunk lid. standing or driving. locked, the exterior lamps will flash and The emergency release button does the alarm will sound as the trunk lid not open the trunk lid if the vehicle bat- opens: tery is discharged or disconnected. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: Illumination of the emergency release but- With the SmartKey ton: ț Insert the SmartKey in the starter ț The button will flash for 30 minutes af- switch. ter opening the trunk. ț Press button Œ or ‹ on the ț The button will flash for 60 minutes af- 1 Emergency release button SmartKey. ter closing the trunk. ̈ Briefly press emergency release With KEYLESS-GO* button . 1 ț Grasp the outside door handle. The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid ț Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop opens. button.

104 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Separately locking the trunk lid The lock is located next to the recessed i handle. You can only cancel the separate trunk i locking mode by means of the Your vehicle may be equipped with a mechanical key. function permitting the separate locking of the trunk using the mechanical Separately unlocking the trunk lid key. If present, this feature can permit you to deny any unauthorized person ̈ Pull the mechanical key out of the access to the trunk by locking the trunk SmartKey (୴ page 348). separately and leaving the SmartKey ̈ Insert the mechanical key into the less the mechanical key with the trunk lid lock. vehicle. 1 Locked ̈ Turn the mechanical key counterclock- To verify the presence of this feature, 2 Neutral position wise to neutral position , see above. use the mechanical key to lock the 2 trunk and then attempt to open the ̈ Close the trunk lid (୴ page 98). You can now open the trunk (୴ page 97). trunk by pressing the trunk lid button ̈ Pull the mechanical key out of the A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. after the vehicle has been centrally SmartKey (୴ page 348). (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. unlocked with the SmartKey. ̈ Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock. Warning! G ̈ Turn the mechanical key clockwise to Only drive with the trunk closed as, among position 1. other dangers such as visibility blockage, The trunk remains locked even when the exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle vehicle is centrally unlocked. interior.

105 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Power closing assist for doors and i Warning! G trunk lid The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact ex- To prevent possible personal injury, always ceeds a preset threshold. Power closing assist for doors keep hands and fingers away from the door ̈ Press the doors gently past the initial or trunk opening when closing a door or the The vehicle locks automatically when engage position into the lock. trunk lid. Be especially careful when small the ignition is switched on and the children are around. wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of The doors close automatically. In case of danger, pull the inside or outside approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock yourself Power closing assist for trunk lid door handle, or press the trunk lid lock. out when the vehicle ̈ To prevent personal injury, never actuate Press the trunk lid gently into its lock. ț the closing assist mechanism by tampering is pushed or towed The trunk closes automatically. with the door or trunk lid latch. ț is on a test stand i It is not necessary to slam the door or Automatic central locking For more information on towing the vehi- trunk lid closed. A pneumatic pow- cle, see “Towing the vehicle” (୴ page 371). The doors and the trunk automatically lock er-assisted mechanism draws doors You can deactivate the automatic locking when the ignition is switched on and the and trunk lid closed quietly and auto- using the control system (୴ page 159). matically once door and trunk lid has wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap- been latched. When the pneumatic proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. power-assisted mechanism has You can open a locked door from the in- stopped, doors and/or trunk can be side. Open door only when conditions are re-opened. safe to do so.

106 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking from the inside The switches are located in the center con- i sole. You can open a locked door from the You can lock or unlock the doors and the inside. Open door only when conditions trunk from inside using the central locking are safe to do so. or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle be- If the vehicle was previously centrally fore starting to drive. locked with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* it will not The fuel filler flap will not be locked or un- unlock using the central locking switch. locked with the central locking or unlocking switch, respectively. If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch: G ț While in the global remote control Warning! Central locking/unlocking switches mode, the vehicle is unlocked com- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 1 Locking pletely when a door is opened from SmartKey from the starter switch, take the 2 Unlocking the inside. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and ț Locking While in the selective remote con- lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- trol mode, only the door opened attended in the vehicle, or with access to an ̈ Press central locking switch 1. from inside is unlocked. unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- If all door’s are closed, the vehicle cle equipment may cause an accident locks. and/or serious personal injury. Unlocking ̈ Press central unlocking switch 2. The vehicle unlocks.

107 Controls in detail Seats ̄ Seats For more information on seat adjustment, You can activate the following functions: see “Seat adjustment” (୴ Warning! G page 35). ț Steering column Easy-entry/exit feature You must ensure that no one can become Only the steering column is adjusted. trapped or injured by the moving steering ț Steering column and seat With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, wheel and driver’s seat when the the steering wheel tilts upwards and the easy-entry/exit feature is activated, the The steering column and the seat are driver’s seat moves to the rear. driver’s door is being opened, and the en- adjusted. gine is turned off or the SmartKey is re- This allows easier entry into and exit from The easy-entry/exit feature can be moved from the starter switch. the vehicle when the driver’s door is switched on or off in the convenience sub- opened. However, the engine must be Do not leave children unattended in the ve- menu of the control system (୴ page 160). turned off. hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and i When the SmartKey is inserted in the start- unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit To cancel seat/steering wheel move- er switch or you have pressed the feature*, which could result in an accident ment, do one of the following: KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once and and/or serious personal injury. the driver’s door is closed, the steering ț Press the seat adjustment switch wheel and the driver’s seat return to their (୴ page 35) last set positions. ț Move the steering column stalk (୴ page 37) ț Press the memory button (୴ page 121)

108 Controls in detail Seats

Removing and installing front seat i Removing front head restraints head restraints Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for ̈ Press switch 1 upwards and hold until easier removal and installation of the the head restraint is fully extended. For information on head restraint adjust- head restraints. ment, see the “Getting started” section ̈ Pull out head restraint. (୴ page 36) Front seat head restraints Installing front head restraints: Warning! G ̈ Press switch 1 upwards and hold for about five seconds. For your protection, drive only with properly ̈ Push the head restraint down until it positioned head restraints. engages. Adjust head restraint so that the center of ̈ Adjust head restraint to desired posi- the head restraint supports the back of the tion (୴ page 35). head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat 1 Head restraint height switch head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

109 Controls in detail Seats

Rear seat head restraints ̈ Make sure the ignition is switched on. Placing head restraints upright All the lamps in the instrument cluster ! come on. The rear head restraints cannot be re- ̈ Press switch in the front center con- moved. 1 sole briefly.

Folding head restraints back The rear head restraints will fold backward. The rear seat head restraints and the rear seat power head restraints* can be folded backward for increased visibility. Warning! G ̈ Pull the rear head restraint upright until For safety reasons, always drive with the it locks into position. rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied. ! Keep the area around head restraints clear Make sure the head restraints engage of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the when placing them upright manually. folding operation of the head restraints. Otherwise their protective function cannot be ensured.

1 Switch in the front center console

110 Controls in detail Seats

Placing power head restraints* upright Folding back and placing upright power ̈ Press switch up in direction of head restraints* with the switches in arrow . ̈ Make sure the ignition is switched on. 1 the rear doors The rear power head restraint will fold All the lamps in the instrument cluster You can fold the rear power head restraints upright. come on. backward or upright using the head re- ̈ Press switch down in direction of ̈ Press switch in the front center con- straint folding switches in the respective 1 arrow . sole and hold. rear doors. 1 The rear head restraints will fold up- The rear power head restraint will fold right. backward.

Warning! G

For safety reasons, always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied. Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the Head restraint switch, rear 1 folding operation of the head restraints. ̈ Make sure the ignition is switched on. All the lamps in the instrument cluster Head restraint tilt come on. You can adjust the angle manually by pulling or pushing the head restraints by hand.

111 Controls in detail Seats

Lumbar support Multicontour backrest*

You can adjust the contour of the seat’s The multicontour backrest has inflatable lumbar support to best support your spine. air cushions built into the seat backrest to The thumbwheel for the driver’s and front provide additional lumbar and side sup- passenger’s seat are located on the inner port. side of the seat. The seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the right side of the seat after turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* 1 Shoulder region support start/stop button twice. 2 Side bolster adjustment 3 Massage function (PULSE) 4 Lumbar region support ̈ Make sure the ignition is switched on. All lamps in the instrument cluster come on. 1 Thumbwheel ̈ Make sure the ignition is switched on. Shoulder region support All the lamps in the instrument cluster ̈ Press æ or ç on switch 1. come on. The air cushion inflates or deflates. ̈ Set the lumbar support between 0 and 5.

112 Controls in detail Seats

Lumbar region support Massage function (PULSE) Drive-dynamic seat* ̈ Press k or j on rocker You can reduce muscle tension during long The drive-dynamic seat automatically ad- switch . trips by periodically using the massage 4 justs the lateral support provided by the function. This selects the air cushion you wish to seat backrest to your driving style. adjust. ̈ Press button 3. ̈ Press æ or ç on rocker The indicator lamp on button 3 comes switch 4. on. The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate and deflate rhythmically. The air cushion inflates or deflates.

Side bolsters adjustment i The massage function switches off au- ̈ Adjust the side bolsters so that they tomatically after approximately eight provide good lateral support using minutes. The indicator lamp extinguish- switch 2. es. 1 Activate drive-dynamic function i The drive-dynamic seat electronically con- When the engine is turned off, the last trols the air pressure in the air chambers of cushion setting is retained in memory, the seat backrest side bolsters. This func- and the cushion is automatically ad- tion improves driving comfort and plea- justed to this setting when the engine sure. is restarted.

113 Controls in detail Seats

Activating Deactivating Seat heating* ̈ Press button 1. ̈ Press button 1 again. The indicator lamp in the switch comes The indicator lamp in the button goes Vehicles without seat ventilation* on and the following message appears out. The switch is located on the door. in the multifunction display for five sec- The message: onds: DRIV. DYN. SEAT ADJ. DRIVER OFF appears in the multifunction display.

i When the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting retained in memory. i The cushion is automatically adjusted You can adjust the characteristics of to this setting when the engine is re- 1 Normal heating the drive-dynamic seat using the con- started. 2 Rapid heating trol system (୴ page 163). ̈ Switch on ignition.

Switching on seat heating ̈ Press switch 1. A red indicator lamp above the switch comes on.

114 Controls in detail Seats

Switching off seat heating Switching off rapid seat heating mode Vehicles with seat ventilation* ̈ Press switch 1 again. ̈ Press switch 2 again. The switch is located on the door. The red indicator lamps on the switch show the i ! heating level selected: The seat heating will be automatically If one or both of the lamps on the seat switched off after approximately heating switch are flashing, there is in- Level 30 minutes. sufficient voltage available since too off No indicator lamp on many electrical consumers are turned 1 One indicator lamp on Switching on rapid seat heating on. The seat heating switches off automatically. 2 Two indicator lamps on ̈ Press switch 2. The seat heating will switch back on Both red indicator lamps above the again automatically as soon as suffi- switch come on. cient voltage is available. i The system switches over to normal heating mode after approximately five minutes. Only the right-hand indicator lamp remains lit.

1 Seat heating switch ̈ Switch on ignition.

115 Controls in detail Seats

Switching on seat heating Switching on rapid seat heating Switching off rapid seat heating mode ̈ Press switch 1 twice. ̈ Press switch 1 once. ̈ Press switch 1 twice. A red indicator lamp above the switch Both indicator lamps above the switch ! comes on. come on. If one or both of the lamps on the seat heating switch are flashing, there is in- Switching off seat heating i sufficient voltage available since too The system switches over to normal ̈ Press switch again. many electrical consumers are turned 1 heating mode after approximately on. The seat heating switches off auto- five minutes. Only the right-hand indi- i matically. cator lamp remains lit. The seat heating will be automatically The seat heating will switch back on switched off after approximately again automatically as soon as suffi- 30 minutes. cient voltage is available.

116 Controls in detail Seats

Seat ventilation* Switching off seat ventilation ̈ Press switch repeatedly until all in- The switch is located on the door. Seat 1 dicator lamps go out. ventilation can be activated manually with the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 i or 2 (୴ page 31). The driver’s seat ventila- The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat tion can be activated automatically by the is automatically set to the highest level summer opening feature (୴ page 197). if activated via summer opening fea- The blue indicator lamps on the switch ture (୴ page 197). show the ventilation level selected: 1 Seat ventilation switch Level ! ̈ Switch on ignition. If one or all of the lamps on the seat 3 Three indicator lamps on ventilation switch are flashing, there is 2 Two indicator lamps on Switching on seat ventilation insufficient voltage since too many ̈ electrical consumers are switched on. 1 One indicator lamp on Press switch 1. The seat ventilation switches off auto- Three blue indicator lamps above the off No indicator lamp on matically. switch come on. The seat ventilation will switch back on Continue pressing switch until the 1 again automatically as soon as suffi- desired seat ventilation level is cient voltage is available. reached.

117 Controls in detail Seats

Rear seats Seat bench fore and aft adjustment Individual power seats* ̈ Press switch forward or backward in di- The switches for adjusting the seats are lo- Power seat bench* rection of arrow 1. cated at the respective rear doors. The switches for adjusting the seat bench Head restraint folding are located at the respective rear doors. ̈ Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 2. The head restraint is folded or placed upright. For information on switching on seat heating* and seat ventilation*, see (୴ page 117) and (୴ page 114). 1 Seat fore and aft adjustment 2 Seat height 3 Head restraint fold/place upright 1 Seat bench fore and aft adjustment 2 Head restraint fold/place upright

118 Controls in detail Seats

Seat fore and aft adjustment Power seat, setting front passenger The switch is located on the right rear passenger door. ̈ Press switch forward or backward in di- seat position from rear* rection of arrow 1. This function lets you adjust the position of the front passenger seat from the rear. Seat height ̈ Press switch up or down in the direc- Warning! G tion of arrow 2. When adjusting the front passenger seat, Head restraint folding make sure the seat, if occupied, is as far from the passenger front airbag as possible. ̈ Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 3. Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously or even fatally injured in the event of an ac- Front passenger seat adjustment The head restraint is folded or placed 1 cident or braking maneuver. Rear seat adjustment upright. 2 Make sure that no one is caught or injured 3 Seat height For information on switching on seat heat- while the seat is being adjusted. 4 Head restraint height ing* and seat ventilation*, see 5 Backrest tilt The power seats can also be operated with (୴ page 117) and (୴ page 114). 6 Seat fore and aft adjustment the driver's or passenger door open. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu- pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury

119 Controls in detail Seats

̈ Switch on ignition. Passenger seat fore and aft adjustment or ̈ Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow . ̈ Open the right rear passenger door. 6 ̈ Press button 1 to adjust the front Passenger seat backrest tilt passenger seat. ̈ Press the switch forward or backward i in direction of arrow 5. Adjusting the passenger seat position from the rear is not possible if you de- Passenger seat height activate the operation of the rear door ̈ Press the switch up or down in the windows (୴ page 74). direction of arrow 3.

! Passenger seat head restraint height Do not move the front passenger seat ̈ Press the switch up or down in completely forward if objects are direction of arrow 4. stored in the parcel net in the front pas- Press button to adjust the rear seat senger-side footwell. Items in the net 2 (୴ page 119). may be damaged

120 Controls in detail Memory function ̄ Memory function ! You can store up to three different settings The memory button and stored position Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv- per SmartKey or SmartKey with switch are located on the door. er should check and adjust the seat KEYLESS-GO*. height, seat position fore and aft, and The following settings are saved for each seat backrest angle if necessary, to en- stored position: sure adequate control, reach, and com- ț Seat and backrest position fort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also the ț Settings for the multicontour seat* ୴ section on airbags ( page 59) for ț Steering wheel position proper seat positioning. ț Exterior rear view mirror position In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ț Automatic climate control ensure adequate control, reach, opera- Stored position buttons tion and comfort. Both the inside and 1 These key-dependent memory settings 2 Memory button outside rear view mirrors should be ad- can be deactivated if desired ̈ justed for adequate rear vision. (୴ page 160). Make sure the ignition is switched on or the relevant door is open and the Fasten seat belts. Infants and small SmartKey is inserted in the starter children should be seated in a properly Warning! G switch. secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Do not activate the memory function while Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian driving. Activating the memory function Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 while driving could cause the driver to lose and 210.2. control of the vehicle.

121 Controls in detail Memory function

Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position ̈ Adjust the seats, steering wheel and ̈ Press and hold one of the position exterior rear view mirrors to the de- buttons 1 until the seat, steering For easier parking, you can adjust the pas- sired position (୴ page 34). wheel and exterior rear view mirrors senger-side exterior rear view mirror so have fully moved to the stored posi- that you can see the right rear wheel as ̈ Press memory button . 2 tions. soon as you engage reverse gear R. ̈ Release memory button and push 2 For information on activating the parking one of the position buttons within 1 i position, see “Setting parking position for three seconds. Releasing the button immediately exterior rear view mirror” (୴ page 162). All the settings are stored with the se- stops movement to the stored posi- lected position. tions. i You can store a parking position for the G passenger-side exterior rear view mir- Warning! ror for each SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats. First move seat backrest to an upright position.

122 Controls in detail Memory function

̈ Stop the vehicle. ̈ Within three seconds, press bottom of adjustment button on ƒ. ̈ Switch on ignition. 2 The parking position is stored if the ̈ Press button . 1 mirror does not move. The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror is selected. i ̈ Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear If the mirror does move, repeat the above steps. After the setting is stored, view mirror with button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb. you can move the mirror again. 1 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir- ̈ Press memory button M. ror button 2 Adjustment button M Memory button

123 Controls in detail Lighting ̄ Lighting For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch M Off headlamps and use the turn signals, see U Automatic headlamp mode “Switching on headlamps” (୴ page 47). The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. C Parking lamps (also side marker i lamps, tail lamps, license plate If you drive in countries where vehicles lamps, instrument panel lamps) drive on the other side of the road than Canada only: When engine is run- the country in which the vehicle is reg- ning, the low beam is also switched istered, you must have the headlamps on. modified for symmetrical low beams. B Parking lamps plus low beam or Relevant information can be obtained high beam headlamps (combination at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- switch pushed forward). ter. ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop) ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)

124 Controls in detail Lighting

Manual headlamp mode i To minimize risk to you and to others, acti- If you remove the SmartKey and open The low beam headlamps and parking vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp the driver’s door while the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the switch to B when driving or when traffic lamps or low beam headlamps are exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp and/or ambient lighting conditions require switched on, then: switch, see (୴ page 124). you to do so. ț a warning sounds In low ambient lighting conditions, only Automatic headlamp mode U B ț $ appears in the multifunction switch from position to with the U display. The parking lamps, low beam headlamps vehicle at a standstill. Switching from and license plate lamps switch on and off to B will briefly switch off the head- ț the message SWITCH OFF LIGHTS! automatically depending on the brightness lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient appears in the multifunction display of the ambient light. lighting conditions may result in an accident. ̈ Turn the exterior lamp switch to U. i The automatic headlamp feature is only an With the daytime running lamp mode G aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for activated and the engine running, the Warning! the operation of the vehicle's lights at all low beam headlamps cannot be times. If the exterior lamp switch is set to U, switched off manually. ț the headlamps may switch off unexpect- To activate the daytime running lamp edly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp oncoming traffic. mode (USA only)” (୴ page 156). ț the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions.

125 Controls in detail Lighting

i Daytime running lamp mode USA only With the daytime running lamp mode ̈ Turn exterior lamp switch to The high beam headlamps can also be ac- activated, the low beam headlamps will position M or U. tivated when driving with the daytime run- not switch off automatically. ning lamp mode activated and exterior When the engine is running, the low beam lamp switch in position M. headlamps are automatically switched on. i In low ambient light conditions, the parking To activate the daytime running lamp The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp lamps will also switch on. mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp cannot be switched on manually with mode (USA only)” (୴ page 156). exterior lamp switch in position U. Canada only To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior When you shift from a driving position to i B See notes on the exterior lamp switch lamp switch to position and pull position N or P, the low beam switches off (୴ page 124). the exterior lamp switch to first or (with a three-minute delay). second stop (୴ page 127). For nighttime driving you should turn the Locator lighting and night security illu- B exterior lamp switch to position to mination permit activation of the high beam headlamps. Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system section under “Setting locator lighting” (୴ page 156) and “Setting night security illumination” (୴ page 157).

126 Controls in detail Lighting

Switching on fog lamps i Switching on rear fog lamp The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp ̈ Make sure the low beam headlamps Warning! G cannot be switched on manually with are switched on. exterior lamp switch in position U. ̈ Pull out exterior lamp switch to second In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior stop. only switch from position U to B with lamp switch to position B and pull the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from the exterior lamp switch to first or sec- The yellow indicator lamp † in the U to B will briefly switch off the head- ond stop (୴ page 124). lamp switch comes on. lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an acci- Switching on front fog lamps dent. ̈ Make sure the low beam headlamps are switched on. i ̈ Pull out exterior lamp switch to first Fog lamps will operate with the parking stop. lamps and/or the low beam headlamps ‡ on. Fog lamps should only be used in The green indicator lamp in the conjunction with low beam headlamps. lamp switch comes on. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.

127 Controls in detail Lighting

Combination switch Switching on high beams Hazard warning flasher ̈ Turn exterior lamp switch to The combination switch is located on the The hazard warning flasher can be activat- position B or to U left side of the steering column. ed with the starter switched on or off. It is (୴ page 124). activated automatically when an airbag is ̈ Push the combination switch in deployed. direction . 1 The switch is located on the center con- The high beam indicator A on the sole. instrument cluster comes on (୴ page 22).

High beam flasher ̈ Pull the combination switch briefly in direction . 1 High beam 2 2 High beam flasher

1 Hazard warning flasher switch

128 Controls in detail Lighting

Switching on the hazard warning Interior lighting Activating automatic control flasher ̈ Press rocker switch to the center The controls are located in the overhead 4 ̈ Press hazard warning flasher switch. position. control panel. All turn signals will flash. Interior lamps are switched on in darkness, even when you: i ț unlock the vehicle With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set ț open a door for either left or right turn, only the re- ț remove the SmartKey from the spective left or right turn signals will starter switch operate when the SmartKey in the starter switch is in position 1 or 2. The interior lamps are switched off after a present time (୴ page 158).

Switching off the hazard warning 1 Left front reading lamp flasher i 2 Rear interior lamps If the door remains open, the interior ̈ Press hazard warning flasher switch 3 Right front reading lamp lamps switch off automatically after ap- again. 4 Rocker switch for automatic control proximately five minutes, when the system SmartKey is removed or in the switch i position 0. If the hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, press switch 1 twice.

129 Controls in detail Lighting

Deactivating automatic control Switching rear interior lamps on and off Courtesy lighting ̈ Press the ñ symbol on rocker ̈ Press switch on the ò symbol. 2 For better orientation in the dark, courtesy switch . 4 The rear compartment lighting is lamps will illuminate the interior of your ve- The interior lighting remains switched switched on. hicle as follows: off in darkness, even when you: ̈ Press switch 2 on the ò symbol With parking lamps switched on: ț unlock the vehicle again. ț the door entry lamps ț open a door The rear compartment lighting is ț the driver and passenger footwells switched off. ț remove the SmartKey from the With SmartKey in starter switch position 1: starter switch Switching front reading lamps on and ț the door entry lamps off Manual control ț the center console ̈ Press switch 1 or 3. Switching front interior lamps on and off The corresponding reading lamp is i ̈ Press the ð symbol on rocker switched on. If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the switch 4. ̈ Press switch 1 or 3 again. exterior headlamps, the door entry The front interior lighting switches on. The corresponding reading lamp is lamps will remain lit for approximately ̈ Press the ñ symbol on rocker switched off. five minutes. switch 4 again. The interior lighting switches off. The automatic control function is activated.

130 Controls in detail Instrument cluster ̄ Instrument cluster A full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination ̈ Press knob 1. cluster can be found in the “At a glance” The knob will pop out. section of this manual (୴ page 22). The instrument cluster is activated when To brighten illumination you: ̈ Turn knob 1 in the instrument cluster ț open a door clockwise. ț turn on the ignition The instrument cluster illumination will brighten. ț press the reset button (୴ page 22) ț switch on the exterior lamps To dim illumination You can change the instrument cluster set- 1 Knob for adjusting instrument cluster ̈ Turn knob 1 in the instrument cluster tings in the instrument cluster submenu of illumination counterclockwise. the control system (୴ page 154). Use knob 1 to adjust the illumination The instrument cluster illumination will brightness for the instrument cluster. dim. i The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions. The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.

131 Controls in detail Instrument cluster

Coolant temperature gauge i Trip odometer Excessive coolant temperature triggers ̈ Make sure you are viewing the trip a warning in the multifunction display G odometer display. Warning! (୴ page 323). ̈ If it is not displayed, press the è or ț Driving when your engine is badly over- ÿ button on the multifunction heated can cause some fluids which During severe operating conditions, may have leaked into the engine com- e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem- steering wheel repeatedly until the trip ୴ partment to catch fire. You could be se- perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C), odometer appears ( page 134). riously burned. i.e. close to the red zone of the tempera- ̈ Press and hold reset button on the in- ț Steam from an overheated engine can ture gauge. strument cluster (୴ page 22) until the cause serious burns and can occur just The engine should not be operated with trip odometer is reset. by opening the hood. Stay away from the coolant temperature above 248°F the engine if you see or hear steam com- (120°C), i.e. in the red zone of the coolant ing from it. temperature gauge. Doing so may cause Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle serious engine damage which is not cov- and do not stand near the vehicle until the ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War- engine has cooled down. ranty.

132 Controls in detail Instrument cluster

Tachometer Outside temperature indicator The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the The red marking on the tachometer de- sensor can be affected by road or engine notes excessive engine speed. Warning! G heat during idling or slow driving. There- fore, the accuracy of the displayed temper- ! The outside temperature indicator is not de- ature can only be verified by comparison to Avoid driving at excessive engine signed to serve as an ice-warning device and a thermometer placed next to the sensor, speeds, as it may result in serious en- is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. not by comparison to external displays gine damage that is not covered by the Indicated temperatures just above the freez- (e.g. bank signs, etc.). Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- When moving the vehicle into colder ambi- face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your To help protect the engine, the fuel supply especially in wooded areas or on bridges. garage), you will notice a delay before the is interrupted if the engine is operated lower temperature is displayed. within the red marking. The outside temperature is diplayed in the A delay also occurs when ambient temper- instrument cluster (୴ page 22). For infor- S 55 AMG atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem- mation on how to select the unit of the dis- perature indications caused by heat The tachometer of the S 55 AMG does not played temperature, i.e. degrees radiated from the engine during idling or have a red marking denoting excessive en- Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F), slow driving. gine speed. see “Selecting temperature display mode” To help protect the engine, the fuel supply (୴ page 154). is interrupted if the engine is operated at an excessive engine speed.

133 Controls in detail Control system ̄ Control system The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G turned to position 1 or as soon as the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in A driver’s attention to the road and traffic position 1. The control system enables you conditions must always be his/her primary to: focus when driving. ț call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction ț change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the 1 Trip odometer For example, you can use the control sys- driver when traffic and road conditions per- 2 Main odometer tem to find out when your vehicle is next mit it to be done safely. due for service, to set the language for Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph messages in the instrument cluster dis- (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is play, and much more. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. i The displays for the audio systems (ra- The control system relays information to dio, CD player) will appear in English, the multifunction display. regardless of the language selected.

134 Controls in detail Control system

Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display in the speedometer The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are Operating the control system controlled using the buttons on the multi- 2 Selecting the submenu or setting function steering wheel. the volume æ up / to increase ç down / to decrease 3 Telephone* s to take a call t to end a call 4 Menu systems è for next menu ÿ for previous menu 5 Moving within a menu j for next display k for previous display

135 Controls in detail Control system

Pressing any of the buttons on the multi- It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions function steering wheel will alter what is functions within each menu, as being ar- you will find a number of submenus for shown in the multifunction display. ranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see The information available in the multifunc- ț If you press button è or ÿ “Settings menu” (୴ tion display is arranged in menus, each repeatedly, you will pass through each page 151). containing a number of functions or submenu one after the other. The number of menus available in the sys- menus. tem depends on which optional equipment ț If you press button k or j is installed in your vehicle. The individual functions are then found repeatedly, you will pass through each within the relevant menu (radio or CD op- function display, one after the other, in The menus are described on the following erations under AUDIO, for example). These the current menu. pages. functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle.

136 Controls in detail Control system

Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an through the menus. overview of the individual menus.

137 Controls in detail Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8 Standard dis- AUDIO Telephone* NAVI Distronic* Trip computer Malfunction Settings play memory Call up FSS Select radio Load phone Activate Call up set- Fuel consump- Call up malfunc- Reset to factory station book route guid- tings tion statistics af- tion messages settings ance ter start Check tire Select satellite Search for Fuel consump- Instrument clus- pressure* radio station* name in tion statistics ter submenu (USA only) phone book since the last reset Check engine Operate CD Select Call up range Lighting sub- oil level player number last menu dialed

Commands/submenus Digital speed- Operate Vehicle sub- ometer cassette player menu Convenience submenu

138 Controls in detail Control system i Standard display menu AUDIO menu The headings used in the menus table You can select the functions in the stan- The functions in the AUDIO menu operate are designed to facilitate navigation dard display menu with button k the audio equipment which you currently within the system and are not neces- or j. have turned on. sarily identical to those shown in the control system displays. The following functions are available: If no audio equipment is currently turned on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the The first function displayed in each Funktion Page display. menu will automatically show you Call up FSS 295 which part of the system you are in. The following functions are available: Check tire pressure* 287 Funktion Page Check engine oil level 274 Select radio station 140 Call up digital speedometer 139 Select satellite radio* station 140 (USA only) Display digital speedometer Operate CD player 141 ̈ Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the digital speedom- Operate cassette player 141 eter appear in the display. The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display.

139 Controls in detail Control system

Select radio station Select satellite radio* station i (USA only) ̈ Turn on the radio. Refer to separate Feature description is based on prelim- COMAND operating instructions. The satellite radio is treated as a radio ap- inary information available at time of plication. printing. ̈ Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the currently tuned sta- ̈ Select satellite radio with the corre- Additional optional satellite radio tion in the display. sponding key on the COMAND control equipment and a subscription to satel- panel (SAT). lite radio service provider are required for satellite radio operation. At time of ̈ Press button è or ÿ repeatedly printing, no date for the availability of until you see the currently tuned sta- optional equipment required for satel- tion in the display. lite radio operation had been set. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details and availability for 1 Waveband your vehicle. 2 Station frequency For more information, refer to separate ̈ k j Press button or repeatedly COMAND operating instructions. until the desired station is found. 1 SAT mode and preset number i 2 Channel name or number You can only store new stations using ̈ Press button k or j repeatedly the corresponding feature on the radio. until the desired channel is found. Refer to separate COMAND operating instructions. You can also operate the radio in the usual manner.

140 Controls in detail Control system

Operate the CD player ̈ Press button k or j repeatedly Operate the cassette player until the desired track is selected. ̈ Turn on the radio and select the CD ̈ Turn on COMAND and select cassette player. Refer to separate COMAND op- player. Please refer to the separate erating instructions. i operating instructions. CD changer*: To select a CD from the ̈ Press button è or ÿ repeatedly magazine, press a number on the ̈ Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently COMAND system key pad located in until you see the settings for the being played appear in the display. the center dashboard. cassette being played in the display.

1 Current CD 1 Current side (for CD changer* (୴ page 142)) ̈ Press button j to fast foward 2 Current track or k to rewind.

141 Controls in detail Control system

CD changer* operating mode Clean CDs from time to time with a com- ! mercially available cleaning cloth. No sol- Your CD drive has been designed to vents, anti-static sprays, etc. should be General notes play CDs which correspond to the IEC used for cleaning. Replace the CD in its 60908 standard. Should excessively high temperatures oc- case after use. Protect CDs from heat and cur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will direct sunlight. If you insert thicker data carriers, appear on the display and muting will take e.g. ones that have data on both sides place. The unit will then switch back to the (one side with DVD data, the other side last operating mode used until the temper- with audio data), they cannot be eject- ature has decreased to a safe operating ed and will damage the drive. level. For information on operating the CD Should excessively low temperatures oc- Only use CDs, which bear the label shown changer, refer to the separate COMAND cur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will ap- and that conform to the compact disc dig- operating instructions. pear on the display, but the CD will ital audio standard (IEC 60908). continue to play. Use of CDs which do not meet this stan- Handle CDs carefully to prevent interfer- dard may cause damage to the CD chang- ence during playback. Avoid fingerprints er. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or adapter. apply any label or other material to them. Only use original CDs. Using copied CDs may create problems during playback.

142 Controls in detail Control system

Loading/unloading the CD magazine ̈ Remove the magazine and completely Warning! G The CD changer is located behind the cov- pull out the CD tray. ̈ The CD changer is a Class 1 laser product. er on the left hand side in the trunk. Place the CD in the recess of the tray, label side up. There is a danger of invisible laser radiation ̈ Remove the CD changer cover. if the cover is opened or damaged. ̈ ̈ Slide the CD changer door to the right Push the tray into the magazine in the Do not remove the cover. The CD changer and press the eject button 3. direction shown by the arrow. does not contain any parts which can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have ̈ The magazine is ejected. i any service work which may be necessary CDs which have been inserted improp- performed only by qualified personnel. erly or are unreadable will not be played. Operational readiness of CD changer ̈ Push the magazine into the CD changer If a CD changer has been installed in the in the direction shown by the arrow and system, it can be operated from the close the CD changer door. COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard. A loaded magazine must be installed for CD playing. 1 CD 2 CD changer 3 CD tray 4 CD magazine

143 Controls in detail Control system

TEL menu* Which messages will appear in the display Never operate radio transmitters equipped field depends on whether your telephone is with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- switched on or off: out being connected to an external antenna) Warning! G from inside the vehicle while the engine is ț If the telephone is off, the message in running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- the multifunction display is: TEL OFF. A driver’s attention to the road must always tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- be his/her primary focus when driving. For ț If the telephone is on: sibly resulting in an accident and/or your safety and the safety of others, we rec- personal injury. The telephone will then search for a ommend that you pull over to a safe location network. During this time the display and stop before placing or taking a tele- reads NO SERVICE. phone call. If you choose to use the tele- You can use the functions in the TEL menu phone while driving, please use the to operate your telephone, provided it is As soon as the telephone has found a hands-free device and only use the tele- connected to a hands-free system and network, READY is indicated in the dis- phone when weather, road and traffic condi- switched on. play. tions permit. ̈ Switch on the telephone and COMAND. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from ̈ Press button ÿ or è on the using a cellular telephone while driving a ve- steering wheel repeatedly until you see hicle. the TEL menu in the display. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- The standby message indicates that your ly 14 m) every second. telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.

144 Controls in detail Control system

The following functions are available: Answering a call Ending a call Function Page When your telephone is ready to receive ̈ Press button t. calls, you can answer a call at any time. In Anwering a call 145 You have ended the call. In the display the display you will then see the message: you will again see the standby mes- Ending a call 145 sage. Dialing a number from the 145 phone book Dialing a number from the phone book Redialing 146 If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time. ̈ Press button s. ̈ Press button ÿ or è repeatedly You have answered the call. In the dis- until you see the TEL menu in the display you see the duration of the call po- play. sitioned above the number. ̈ Press button j or k. i The control system reads the phone If you do not wish to accept a call, book which is stored in the telephone. t press button . The call transmission depends on the number of entries in the phone book and can take up to 60 seconds. In the display you will see the message PLEASE WAIT!. ୴୴

145 Controls in detail Control system

୴୴ When the message PLEASE WAIT! dis- ̈ Press button s. Redialing appears, the phone book has been The system dials the selected phone The control system stores the most recent- loaded. number. ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly the need to search through your entire ț If the connection is successful, the until the desired name appears in the phone book. name of the party you called and display. the duration of the call will appear ̈ Press button ÿ or è repeatedly The stored names are displayed in as- in the display. until you see the TEL menu in the dis- cending or descending alphabetical or- play. der. ̈ Press button s. i In the display you see the first number If you press and hold j or k for in the redial memory. longer than one second, the system ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly scrolls rapidly through the list of names ț If no connection is made, the con- until the desired name appears in the until you release the button again. trol system stores the dialed num- display. Cancel the quick search mode by ber in the redial memory. pressing t. i If you do not want to use the telephone, press button t.

̈ Press button s. The control system dials the selected phone number.

146 Controls in detail Control system

NAVI menu Distronic* menu Distronic deactivated When Distronic is deactivated you will see In the NAVI menu, you will see which status Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the the standard display in the display. the navigation system has. current settings for your Distronic system. What information is shown in the display ̈ Press button è or ÿ repeatedly depends on whether the Distronic system until you see the message NAVI in the is active or inactive. display. Please refer to the “Driving systems” sec- ț If the navigation system is switched off, tion of this manual (୴ page 206) for in- the message NAVI OFF is shown in the display. structions on how to activate Distronic. 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected ̈ Press button è or ÿ repeatedly ț If the navigation system is on and no 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead until you see one of the following two destination has been entered, you will 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle pictures in the display. see the current direction in which the ahead vehicle is moving and the names of 4 Symbol for activated distance warning streets in the display. function Your vehicle Please refer to the COMAND manual for in- 5 structions on how to activate the route guidance system.

147 Controls in detail Control system

Distronic activated Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics after start When you activate Distronic, you will see ̈ Press button ÿ or è repeatedly Use the trip computer menu to call up sta- the set speed for about five seconds in the until you see the first function of the tistical data on your vehicle. The following Distronic display. The following display Trip computer menu. information is available: then appears: ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly Function Page until you see this message in the left Fuel consumption statistics after 148 display: AFTER START. start Fuel consumption statistics 149 since last reset Resetting fuel consumption sta- 149 Distronic activated 1 tistics Call up range (distance to empty) 150 1 Distance driven since start 2 Time elapsed since start 3 Average fuel consumption since start 4 Average speed since start

148 Controls in detail Control system i Fuel consumption since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics The AFTER START display will flash until ̈ Press button ÿ or è repeatedly ̈ Press button ÿ or è repeatedly a distance of approximately 1 mile until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the (1.6 km) has been covered or two min- trip computer menu. Trip computer menu. utes have elapsed since the engine was ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly restarted. During this period, you can until you see this message in the dis- until you see the reading that you want incorporate the values for the previous play: AFTER RESET. to reset in the display. journey by pressing the reset button on the instrument cluster. ̈ Press and hold the reset button on the instrument cluster (୴ page 22) until If the reset button is not pressed, the the value is reset to 0. AFTER START values are set to 0.

1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average fuel consumption since last reset 4 Average speed since last reset

149 Controls in detail Control system

Call up range (distance to empty) Malfunction memory menu ̈ Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the malfunction message ̈ Press button ÿ or è repeatedly Use the malfunction memory menu to scan memory in the display. until you see the first function of the malfunction and warning messages that Trip computer menu. may be stored in the system. What infor- No malfunction messages ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly mation is shown in the display depends on If no malfunctions have occurred, the mes- until you see this message in the dis- whether malfunctions have actually oc- sage in the display is: play: RANGE. curred. NO MALFUNCTION In the display you will see the calculat- ed range based on the current fuel tank Warning! G Malfunctions have occurred level. If malfunctions have occurred, you will see Malfunction and warning messages are only the number of malfunctions in the display: indicated for certain systems and are inten- tionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks 1 Number of malfunctions performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages (୴ page 312).

150 Controls in detail Control system

̈ Press button k or j. Settings menu Resetting all settings The stored messages will now be dis- You can reset all the functions of all sub- In the SETTINGS menu there are two func- played in the order in which the mal- menus to the factory settings. tions: functions have occurred. See the ̈ Press the reset button on the instru- “Practical hints” section for malfunc- ț The function RESET WITH R BUTTON FOR ment cluster (୴ page 22) for approxi- tion and warning messages 3 SEC. , with which you can reset all mately three seconds. (୴ page 312). settings to the original factory settings. In the display you will see the request ț A collection of submenus with which Should any malfunctions occur while driv- to press the reset button again to con- you can make individual settings for ing, the number of malfunctions will reap- firm. pear in the display when the SmartKey in your vehicle. ̈ Press the reset button again. the starter switch is turned to position 0 or ̈ Press button è or ÿ repeatedly removed from the starter switch. until the SETTINGS menu appears in the The functions of all the submenus will display. reset to factory settings. i The message memory will be cleared i when you turn the SmartKey in the The settings you have changed will not starter switch to position 1 or 2. You be reset unless you confirm the action will then only see high priority malfunc- by pressing the reset button a second tions (୴ page 312). time. Due to safety reasons, resetting all of the settings while driving will not reset all of the values in the LIGHTING or the VEHICLE menu.

151 Controls in detail Control system

Submenus in the Settings menu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Resetting the functions of a submenu ç ̈ k j Scroll down with the button, scroll up Press button or . æ For each submenu you can reset all the with the button. functions to the factory settings. In the display you see the collection of Move within the submenus with the k the submenus. ̈ Move to a function in the submenu. or j button to the individual functions. ̈ Press the reset button on the instru- The settings themselves are made with ment cluster (୴ page 22) for approxi- button æ or ç. mately three seconds. In the display you will see the request to press the reset button again to confirm. ̈ Press button çor æ. ̈ Press the reset button again. The selection marker moves to the next submenu. All functions of the submenu will reset to factory settings.

152 Controls in detail Control system

The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus. De- tailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE Select temperature display Set daytime running lamp mode Set automatic locking Set key-dependency mode (USA only) Select multifunction display Set locator lighting Limiting opening height of trunk Activate easy-entry/exit feature mode lid* Select language Exterior lamps delayed shut-off Set parking position for exterior rear view mirror Interior lighting delayed shut-off Set fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors Adjusting the drive-dynamic seat (driver’s side)

153 Controls in detail Control system

Instrument cluster submenu Selecting temperature display mode Selecting multifunction display mode Access the INST. CLUS. submenu via the ̈ Move the selection marker with ̈ Move the selection marker with SETTINGS menu. Use the INST. CLUS. sub- the æ or ç button to the INST. the æ or ç button to the INST. menu to change the instrument cluster dis- CLUS. submenu. CLUS. submenu. play settings. The following functions are ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly available: until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis- Function Page play: TEMP. INDICATOR. play: DISPLAY VALUES IN. Select temperature display 155 The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current mode setting. setting. Select multifunction display 154 mode Select language 155

̈ Press æ or ç to set the temper- ̈ Press æ or ç to set speedome- ature unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or deter unit to MILES or KM. grees Fahrenheit (°F).

154 Controls in detail Control system

Selecting language ̈ Press æ or ç to select the lan- Lighting submenu guage to be used for the multifunction ̈ Move the selection marker with Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SET- display messages. the æ or ç button to the INST. TINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu CLUS. submenu. Available languages: to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle. The following functions are ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly ț German available: until you see this message in the dis- ț English play: TEXT. Function Page ț French The selection marker is on the current Set daytime running lamp mode 156 setting. ț Italian (USA only) ț Spanish Set locator lighting 156 Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 157 Interior lighting delayed shut-off 158

155 Controls in detail Control system

Setting daytime running lamp mode With daytime running lamp mode se- Setting locator lighting lected and the exterior lamp switch at (USA only) During darkness, the following lamps will position 0, the following lamps will ̈ Move the selection marker with come on when the exterior lamp switch is come on automatically when the en- the æ or ç button to the LIGHT- in position U, the locator lighting fea- gine is turned on: ING submenu. ture is activated, and the vehicle is un- ț Parking lamps and low beam head- locked by remote control: ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly lamps until you see this message in the dis- ț Parking lamps play: LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE . ț License plate lamps (in low ambient ț Tail lamps The selection marker is on the current light conditions) ț License plate lamps setting. i ț Front fog lamps If you turn the exterior lamp switch to another position, the corresponding To activate locator lighting: lamp(s) will switch on. ̈ Make sure the function LOCATOR For safety reasons, resetting the LIGHTING is set. LIGHTING submenu to factory settings ̈ Turn the exterior lamp switch to (୴ page 152) while driving will not re- U ̈ Press æ or ç to select manual position . set the daytime running lamp mode. or daytime running lamp (constant) The locator lighting switches off when the mode. This function is not available in In the display you will then see the mes- driver’s door is opened. It switches off au- countries where daytime running sage: LIGHTING – CANNOT BE RESET tomatically after a period of approximately lamps are mandatory. COMPLETELY TO FACTORY SETTINGS 40 seconds. WHILE DRIVING.

156 Controls in detail Control system

̈ Move the selection marker with Setting night security illumination i the æ or ç button to the LIGHT- (Exterior lamps delayed switch-off) You can reactivate this function within ING submenu. ten minutes by opening a door. Use the HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly function to set whether and for how long If you do not open a door after remov- until you see this message in the dis- you would like the exterior lamps to illumi- ing the SmartKey, the lamps will auto- play: LOCATOR LIGHTING. nate during darkness after all doors are matically switch off after 60 seconds. The selection marker is on the current closed. When the delayed switch-off fea- setting. ture is activated and the exterior lamp To activate night security illumination: switch is in position U before the en- ̈ Select delayed switch-off period (see gine is turned off, the following lamps will below). remain lit after you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch: ̈ Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U before turning off the en- ț Parking lamps gine. ț Tail lamps ̈ Press æ or ç to select the de- To select delayed switch-off period: ț License plate lamps sired setting. ̈ Move the selection marker with ț The locator lighting will be switched ON Front fog lamps the æ or ç button to the LIGHT- or OFF. ING submenu. ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly until you see this message in the display: HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF. The selection marker is on the current setting. ୴୴

157 Controls in detail Control system

୴୴ ̈ Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly to position 2 and back to 0. until you see this message in the dis- The delayed switch-off feature is deac- play: INT. ILLUMINATION DELAYED SWITCH-OFF tivated. It will reactivate as soon as you . reinsert the SmartKey in the starter The selection marker is on the current switch. setting. ̈ æ ç Press or to select the de- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: sired lamp-on period. ̈ Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop You can select: button on the gear selector lever ț 0 S, the delayed switch-off feature (୴ page 33). is deactivated Interior illumination delayed switch-off ț 15 S, 30 S, 45 S, or 60 S, the de- ̈ Press æ or ç to select the delayed switch-off feature is activated Use this function to set whether and for sired lamp-on time period. You can se- how long you would like the interior light- You can temporarily deactivate the de- lect: ing to remain lit during darkness after the layed switch-off feature: ț SmartKey is removed from the starter 0 S, the delayed switch-off feature ̈ Before leaving the vehicle, turn the switch. is deactivated. SmartKey in the starter switch to ț ̈ Move the selection marker with 5 S, 10 S, 15 S, or 20 S, the delayed position 0. the æ or ç button to the LIGHT- switch-off feature is activated. ING submenu.

158 Controls in detail Control system

Vehicle submenu Setting automatic locking Limiting opening height of trunk lid* Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SET- Use this function to activate or deactivate This function is available on vehicles with INGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu to the automatic central locking. With the au- the trunk lid opening/closing system*. make general vehicle settings. The follow- tomatic central locking system activated, Use this function to activate or deactivate ing functions are available: the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle the limiting opening height of trunk lid. speeds of approximately 9 mph ̈ Move the selection marker with Function Page (15 km/h). the æ or ç button to VEHICLE Setting automatic locking 159 ̈ Press button æ or ç to move submenu. Limiting opening height of trunk 159 the selection marker to the VEHICLE ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly lid* submenu. until you see this message in the dis- ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly play: until you see this message in the dis- OPENING LIMITER play: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK. TRUNK LID The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current setting. setting.

̈ æ ç Press or to switch ̈ Press button æ or ç to switch AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF. the opening limiter for trunk lid ON or OFF. 159 Controls in detail Control system

Convenience submenu Setting key-dependency Activating easy-entry/exit feature Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the Use this function to set whether the mem- Use this function to activate and deacti- SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE sub- ory settings for the seats, the steering vate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the menu to change the settings for a number wheel, the mirrors, and the automatic cli- feature is activated, the steering wheel and of convenience features. The following mate control should be stored separately driver’s seat will move back to facilitate ex- functions are available: for each SmartKey (୴ page 121). iting when you: Function Page ̈ Move the selection marker with ț remove the SmartKey from the starter the æ or ç button to switch or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop Setting key-dependency 160 the CONVENIENCE submenu. button* Activating easy-entry/exit fea- 160 ̈ j k ț ture Press button or repeatedly open the driver’s door until you see this message in the dis- However, the engine must be turned off. Setting parking position for exte- 162 play: SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT. rior rear view mirror The selection marker is on the current Warning! G Setting fold-in function for exteri- 162 setting. or rear view mirrors You must make sure that no one can be- Adjusting the drive-dynamic seat 163 come trapped or injured by the moving (driver’s side) steering wheel and the driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is in operation and the driver’s door is being opened or the SmartKey is removed from the starter ̈ Press æ or ç to set key-depen- switch. dency to ON or OFF.

160 Controls in detail Control system

Do not leave children unattended in the ve- i hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. To cancel seat/steering wheel move- Children could open the driver’s door and ment, do one of the following: unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit ț Press seat adjustment switch feature, which could result in an accident (୴ page 35) and/or serious personal injury. ț Move the steering column stalk ̈ Press æ or ç to change the (୴ page 37) After entering the vehicle, the steering easy-entry/exit setting. wheel and seat will move into the position ț Press the memory button stored in memory when: (୴ page 121) The following settings are available for the easy-entry/exit feature: ț the driver’s door is closed ̈ Move the selection marker with ț you put the SmartKey in the starter æ ç STEER. COL. Only the steering the or button to column is moved. switch the CONVENIENCE submenu. ST. COL + SEAT Both the steering ț press and hold the appropriate stored ̈ j k Press button or repeatedly column and the position button on the memory switch until you see this message in the dis- ୴ seat are moved. ( page 121) play: EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE. OFF The easy-entry/ex- The selection marker is on the current it feature is deacti- setting. vated.

161 Controls in detail Control system

Setting parking position for exterior rear The selection marker is on the current ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly view mirror setting. until the message FOLD IN MIRRORS WHEN LOCKING? appears in the display. Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function to select whether the passen- The selection marker is on the current ger-side exterior rear view mirror should be setting. turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is engaged. For additional information, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position” ̈ Press æ or ç to switch function (୴ page 175). ON or OFF. ̈ Move the selection marker to the Setting fold-in function for exterior rear CONVENIENCE submenu using the æ ̈ Press button æ or ç to switch view mirrors or ç button. the automatic fold-in setting for the ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly Using this function, you can set the exteri- mirrors ON or OFF when the vehicle is until you see this message in the dis- or rear view mirrors to be automatically locked. play: MIRROR SETTIMG WHEN PARKING. folded in when you lock your vehicle (୴ page 176). ̈ Move the selection marker to the CONVENIENCEsubmenu with the æ or ç button.

162 Controls in detail Control system

Adjusting drive-dynamic seats The selection marker is on the current The following settings are available: setting. Use this function to adjust the settings for Setting 1 (Sporty) Strong lateral the drive-dynamic seat. support and fast air ̈ Move the selection marker with pressure build-up in the æ or ç button to the air chambers of the CONVENIENCE submenu. the backrest side bolsters ̈ To adjust the driver’s drive-dynamic j k Setting 2 (Comfort) Less lateral seat press button or re- ̈ Press button æ or ç to select support and slow air peatedly until you see this message in the desired setting. the display: DRIV. DYN. SEAT ADJ. pressure build-up in DRIVER the air chambers of the backrest side bolsters

163 Controls in detail Automatic transmission ̄ Automatic transmission For more information on driving with an au- The automatic transmission selects indi- tomatic transmission, see the “Getting vidual gears automatically, depending on: Warning! G ୴ started” section ( page 43). ț the gear selector lever position D with It is dangerous to shift the gear selector ୴ Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear gear ranges ( page 166) lever out of P or N if the engine speed is shifting process to your individual driving ț the selected shift program (C/S) higher than idle speed. If your foot is not style by continually adjusting the shift (୴ page 170) firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could points up or down. These shift point adjust- accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You or ments are performed based on current op- could lose control of the vehicle and hit erating and driving conditions. (C/S/M) (S 55 AMG only) someone or something. Only shift into gear If the operating conditions change, the au- (୴ page 171) when the engine is idling normally and when tomatic transmission reacts by adjusting ț the position of the accelerator pedal your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. its gear shift program. (୴ page 170) When the gear selector lever is in ț the vehicle speed i position D, you can influence transmission During the brief warm-up, transmission The current gear selector lever position shifting by: upshifting is delayed. This allows the and shift program (C/S) or (C/S/M) appear ț catalytic converter to heat up more in the tachometer display (୴ page 22). limiting the gear range quickly to operating temperature. ț changing gears manually

164 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

One-touch gearshifting i Canceling gear range limit To avoid overrevving the engine when ̈ Press and hold the gear selector lever Even with an automatic transmission you the gear selector lever is moved to the in the D+ direction until D reappears in can change the gears manually when the D- direction, the transmission will not the tachometer display field. gear selector lever is in position D. shift to a lower gear if the engine's The transmission will shift from the current max. speed would be exceeded. Downshifting gear range directly to gear range D. ̈ Briefly press the gear selector lever to Upshifting Shifting into optimal gear range the left in the D- direction. ̈ Briefly press the gear selector lever to ̈ Press and hold the gear selector lever The transmission will shift from the current the right in the D+ direction. in the D- direction. gear to the next lower gear. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the The transmission will shift from the current The transmission will automatically select transmission (୴ page 166). gear to the next higher gear as permitted the gear range suited for optimal accelera- by the shift program. This action simulta- tion and deceleration. This will involve neously extends the gear range of the shifting down one or more gears. Warning! G transmission.

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

165 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

Gear ranges Effect Effect With the gear selector lever in position D, ï The transmission shifts through ç The transmission shifts through you can limit the transmission’s gear range sixth gear only (applies only to second gear only. vehicles with 7-speed automatic by pressing the gear selector lever to the Allows the use of engine’s brak- transmission). left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit ing power when driving by pressing the gear selector lever to the î The transmission shifts through ț on steep downgrades right (D+). fifth gear only (applies only to ve- ț The selected gear range will appear in the hicles with 7-speed automatic in mountainous regions tachometer display. If you press on the ac- transmission). ț under extreme operating con- celerator when the engine has reached its é The transmission shifts through ditions rpm limit, the transmission will upshift be- fourth gear only. æ The transmission operates in yond any gear range limit selected. è The transmission shifts through first gear only. third gear only. For maximum use of engine’s With this selection you can use braking effect on very steep or the braking effect of the engine. lengthy downgrades.

166 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

Gear selector lever position Effect Effect The SmartKey can only be re- ë Neutral Effect moved from the starter switch No power is transmitted from the ì with the gear selector lever in Park position engine to the drive axle. When position P. With the SmartKey Gear selector lever position when the brakes are released, the vehi- removed the gear selector lever is the vehicle is parked. Place gear cle can be moved freely locked in position P. selector lever in position P only (pushed or towed). í Reverse gear when vehicle is stopped. The To avoid damage to the transmis- park position is not intended to Place gear selector lever in sion, never engage N while driv- serve as a brake when the vehicle position R only when vehicle is ing. is parked. Rather, the driver stopped. should always set the parking If the ESP is deactivated or mal- brake in addition to placing the functioning: gear selector lever in position P Move gear selector lever to N to secure the vehicle. only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ê Drive The transmission shifts automatically. All forward gears are available.

167 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

Steering wheel gearshift control ! Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- (Speedshift) S 55 AMG Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any bustible materials such as grass, hay or other reason with gear selector lever leaves can come into contact with the hot You can change the gears manually on the in N can result in transmission damage exhaust system, as these materials could be that is not covered by the steering wheel or by using the gear ignited and cause a vehicle fire. ୴ Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. selector lever ( page 165). Allow engine to warm up under low load Warning! G use. Do not place full load on the engine Warning! G until the operating temperature has been When leaving the vehicle, always remove the reached. Shift into reverse gear only when Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se- SmartKey from the starter switch, take the the vehicle is stopped. lector lever not fully engaged in position P is SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and dangerous. Also, position P alone is not in- lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- ! tended to or capable of preventing your ve- attended in the vehicle, or with access to an Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an hicle from moving, possibly hitting people or unlocked vehicle. Children could move the extended period when driving off on objects. gear selector lever from position P, which slippery road surfaces. This may cause Always set the parking brake in addition to could result in an accident and/or serious serious damage to the drivetrain which shifting to position P (୴ page 45). personal injury. is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.

168 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

The steering wheel gearshift buttons are Downshifting Upshifting located to the left and right of the steering ̈ Press button on the left side of the ̈ Press button on the right side of the wheel. 1 2 steering wheel. steering wheel. The gear range is limited when you are not The gear range is extended when you are driving in the manual program mode not driving in the manual program mode (୴ page 166). (୴ page 166). When driving in the manual program mode When driving in the manual program mode (୴ page 171), the transmission will shift (୴ page 171), the transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower from the current gear to the next higher gear (୴ page 172). gear (୴ page 172).

i Warning! G 1 Left button: downshift You cannot shift with the steering Right button: upshift wheel gearshift buttons when the gear 2 On slippery road surfaces, never downshift selector lever is in position P, N or R. in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

i You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the gear selector lever is in position P, N or R.

169 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

Program mode selector switch ̈ Press program mode selector switch Accelerator position 1 repeatedly until the letter of the de- The program mode selector switch is sired shift program appears in the ta- Your driving style influences the transmis- located on the lower part of the center chometer display (୴ page 22). sion’s shifting behavior: console. Select C for comfort driving: Less throttle Earlier upshifting ț The vehicle starts out in second More throttle Later upshifting gear (both forward and reverse) for gentler starts. This does not apply if Kickdown full throttle is applied or gear Use kickdown when you want maximum range 1 is selected. acceleration. ț Traction and driving stability are im- ̈ Press the accelerator past the point of proved on icy roads. resistance. ț Upshifts occur earlier even when The transmission shifts into a lower you give more gas. The engine then 1 Program mode selector switch gear. operates at lower rpms and the S Sport For standard driving wheels are less likely to spin. ̈ Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed. C Comfort For comfort driving ț The power transmission ratio for gear selector lever position R The transmission shifts up again. ! changes depending on the program Never change the program mode when mode selected (S or C). the gear selector lever is out of position P. This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared.

170 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

Manual shift program S 55 AMG Program mode selector switch Activating manual shift program The program mode selector switch is ̈ Press program mode selector In the manual shift program mode you can located on the lower part of the center switch repeatedly until the M for change the gears manually on the steering 1 console. manual shift program appears in the wheel (୴ page 168) or by using the gear tachometer display. selector lever (୴ page 165). The program mode switches to manual Allow engine to warm up under low load program mode M. Automatic shifting is use. Do not place full load on the engine switched off. The gear range is not until the operating temperature has been limited. reached. Shift into reverse gear only when the vehicle is stopped. You can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position D. You ! can upshift or downshift through the gears Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an in succession. extended period when driving off on 1 Program mode selector switch The current gear selector lever position slippery road surfaces. This may cause and the selected shift program (C/S/M) is serious damage to the drive train which S Sport For standard driving indicated in the tachometer display is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz C Comfort For comfort driving (୴ page 22). Limited Warranty. M Manual For manual gear shifting The selected shift program (C/S/M) is indicated in the tachometer display (୴ page 22).

171 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

Downshifting Upshifting Kickdown ̈ Briefly press the gear selector lever to ̈ Briefly press the gear selector lever to The kickdown can also be used for the left in the D- direction the right in the D+ direction maximum acceleration when driving in the (୴ page 165). (୴ page 165). manual program mode. or or ̈ Press the accelerator past the point of resistance. ̈ Press button 1 on the left side of the ̈ Press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel (୴ page 168). steering wheel (୴ page 168). The transmission shifts to a lower gear. The transmission shifts to the next The transmission shifts to the next ̈ Shift up once the desired speed has lower gear. higher gear. been reached.

i Warning! G When driving at full throttle, the transmission shifts to the next higher gear On slippery road surfaces, never downshift when maximum engine speed has been in order to obtain braking action. This could reached. result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not When you brake or stop, the transmis- prevent this type of loss of control. sion shifts down to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or take off.

172 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

Deactivating manual shift program Emergency operation (Limp home ̈ Turn off the engine. ̈ Press the program mode selector mode) ̈ Wait at least ten seconds before re- switch repeatedly until S or C for starting. If vehicle acceleration worsens or the automatic shift program appears in the transmission no longer shifts, the trans- ̈ Restart the engine. tachometer display. mission is most likely operating in limp ̈ Move gear selector lever to position D or home (emergency operation) mode. In this (for second gear) or R. ̈ Restart the engine. mode, only second gear and reverse gear can be activated. ̈ Have the transmission checked at an The transmission will go into the auto- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as ̈ matic shift program mode last selected Stop the vehicle. soon as possible. (S or C). ̈ Move gear selector lever to P. Program mode M is not stored.

i The last selected automatic program mode (S or C) is switched on when the engine is restarted in the automatic program mode.

173 Controls in detail Good visibility ̄ Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers, see “Windshield wipers” (୴ page 48) and Warning! G Warning! G for setting the exterior rear view mirrors, see “Exterior rear view mirror” The automatic antiglare function does not Exercise care when using the passen- (୴ page 38). react if incoming light is not aimed directly ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. surface is convex (outwardly curved surface Rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and the exterior for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your Automatic antiglare rear view mirror react, for example, if the rear window sun shade* is in raised position. shoulder before changing lanes. The reflection brightness of the exterior Glare can endanger you and others. rear view mirror on the driver’s side and ! the interior rear view mirror will respond Electrolyte drops coming into contact automatically to glare when Warning! G with the vehicle paint finish can be ț the ignition is switched on completely removed only while in the and In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte liquid state by applying plenty of water. may escape from the mirror housing if the ț incoming light from headlamps falls on mirror glass breaks. the sensor in the interior rear view mirror Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with The interior rear view mirror will not react if eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. ț reverse gear is engaged In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if ț the interior lighting is turned on necessary.

174 Controls in detail Good visibility

Activating exterior rear view mirror ̈ Press button 2 for the passenger-side The exterior rear view mirror returns to its parking position exterior rear view mirror. previously stored driving position: Follow these steps to activate the mirror ̈ Place the gear selector lever in reverse ț ten seconds after you put the gear se- parking position so that the passen- gear R. lector lever out of position R ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be The passenger-side exterior rear view ț immediately once your vehicle exceeds turned downward to the stored position. mirror will be turned downward to the a speed of approximately 6 mph ̈ Make sure you have stored a parking stored position. (10 km/h) position for the passenger-side exterior ț immediately when you press button rear view mirror (୴ page 122). 1 for driver’s side mirror. ̈ Make sure the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function in the CONVENIENCE submenu of the control system is switched to ON (୴ page 162). ̈ Switch on ignition (if not already on).

1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button

175 Controls in detail Good visibility

Electrically folding exterior rear view i ̈ Switch on ignition. mirrors If you are driving at more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not Folding in ! be able to fold the exterior mirrors in. ̈ Press button 2 briefly. Before driving the vehicle through an Both mirrors fold in. automatic car wash, fold the exterior Folding the exterior mirrors in and out mirrors in. Otherwise they may get manually Folding out damaged. The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if ̈ Press button 1 briefly. they are not folded out completely. Folding the exterior mirrors in and out Both mirrors fold out. automatically The buttons are located on the driver’s door. When the corresponding function in the ! control system is activated (୴ page 162): If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the ț The exterior rear view mirrors automat- rear), reposition it manually by applying ically fold in as soon as the vehicle is firm pressure until it snaps back into locked from the outside. place. ț The exterior rear view mirrors automat- If an exterior rear view mirror housing ically fold out as soon as the vehicle is is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from unlocked and the driver’s or front pas- the front), press button 2 to fold mir- senger door are subsequently opened. rors in, then press button 1 to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by Folds the exterior mirrors out 1 hand as this may damage the adjust- Folds the exterior mirrors in 2 ment mechanism.

176 Controls in detail Good visibility

Windshield wipers ! Headlamp cleaning system* Do not leave windshield wipers in inter- (Standard on S 500, S 600, S 55 AMG) For more information on the windshield mittent setting when vehicle is taken to wipers, see “Windshield wipers” an automatic car wash or during wind- The switch is located on the left side of the ୴ ( page 48). shield cleaning. Wipers will operate in dashboard. the presence of water sprayed on the i windshield, and wipers may be dam- Intermittent wiping is interrupted when aged as a result. the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened. The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe A rain sensor automatically controls the the windshield once every time the en- windshield wipers depending on how wet gine is started. Dust that accumulates the windshield is. on the windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades ̈ Switch on ignition. when wiping occurs on a dry wind- 1 Headlamp washer switch ̈ Set wiper switch to position I shield. ̈ (୴ page 48). Switch on ignition. ̈ After the initial wipe, pauses between Press switch 1. wipes are automatically controlled by the The headlamps are cleaned with a rain sensor. high-pressure water jet. For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (୴ page 281).

177 Controls in detail Good visibility

Sun visors If sunlight enters through a side window: ̈ Disengage sun visor from mounting . The sun visors protect you from sun glare 1 while driving. ̈ Pivot sun visor to the side. Adjusting the vanity mirror: G Warning! ̈ Slide mirror to the right or left.

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Images in the mirror appear in normal size or larger, depending on the posi- Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed tion of the mirror. while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare 1 Mounting can endanger you and others. 2 Mirror cover i 3 Mirror lamp If you disengage the sun visor from ̈ Swing sun visors down when you expe- 4 Document holder mounting 1, mirror lamp 3 will rience glare. switch off. ̈ To use mirror, lift up cover 2. Mirror lamp 3 comes on. Document holder You can use the plastic tab of the document holder 4 to hold admission tickets, parking passes, or similar items in place.

178 Controls in detail Good visibility

Rear window sunshade* Rear door window sunshade* Warning! G The switch is located in the center console. When operating the rear window sunshade, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the raising or lowering procedure. The raising or lowering procedure can be immediately reversed by pressing switch 1.

Warning! G ̈ To raise sunshade pull on the tab and engage in holder. 1 Rear window sunshade switch When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ̈ To lower sunshade disengage tab and ̈ Switch on ignition. SmartKey from starter switch, take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and guide retraction. ̈ Press switch 1 briefly to raise the sun- lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- shade. attended in the vehicle, or with access to an ! Always guide the sunshade. Do not let ̈ Press switch briefly to lower the unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- 1 it snap back abruptly, as the retractor sunshade. cle equipment can cause an accident could be damaged. and/or serious personal injury. Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame.

179 Controls in detail Automatic climate control ̄ Automatic climate control

180 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

Item i Warning! G For draft-free ventilation, move the slid- 1 Left center air vent, adjustable ers for the center air vents , , When operating the automatic climate con- 1 7 9 2 Left air vent, fixed to the middle position. trol, the air that enters the passenger com- Thumbwheel for air volume control 3 partment through the air vents in the for left center air vent footwell can be very hot or very cold (de- 4 Thumbwheel for air temperature pending on the set temperature). This may control for center air vents cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin 5 Thumbwheel for air volume control in the immediate area of the air vents. Al- for right center air vent ways keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell Right air vent, fixed 6 air vents. If necessary change the air flow 7 Right center air vent, adjustable using the air distribution controls to direct 8 Side defroster vent, fixed the air away from the footwell air vents (୴ page 184). 9 Side air vent, adjustable a Thumbwheel for air volume control for side air vents b Door air vent c Automatic climate control panel

181 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

Item The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can 1 Windshield defroster operate the climate control system in ei- 2 Rear window defroster ther the automatic or manual mode. The system cools or heats the interior depend- 3 Display ing on the selected interior temperature 4 Residual engine heat utilization and the current outside temperature. (REST) Automatic climate control on/off 5 Warning! G Air distribution, right Automatic climate control panel 6 When operating the automatic climate con- 7 AC cooling on/off (±) trol, the air that enters the passenger com- 8 Right side temperature control partment through the air vents in the 9 Air volume (automatic, manual) footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may a Left side temperature control cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin b Air recirculation in the immediate area of the air vents. Al- c Air distribution, left ways keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell d Activated charcoal filter air vents. If necessary change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the footwell air vents (୴ page 184).

182 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i Setting the temperature odors are filtered out before outside air en- The current climate control settings Use temperature controls and ters the passenger compartment through (ON/OFF, temperature, air volume, ac- a 8 (୴ page 182) to separately adjust the air the air distribution system. tivated charcoal filter, etc.) are stored temperature on each side of the passenger The air conditioning will not engage (no for each SmartKey before it is removed compartment. You should raise or lower cooling) if the ± mode is selected from the starter switch or when the ve- the temperature setting in small incre- (୴ page 190). hicle is locked using the SmartKey with ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). KEYLESS-GO* (୴ page 102). Warning! G If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate Increasing/decreasing the interior before driving off. ̈ Press button or repeatedly until Follow the recommended settings for heat- a 8 Keep the air intake grille in front of the the display shows the desired tempera- ing and cooling given on the following pag- windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, ture. es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, and any other debris. impairing visibility and endangering you and The automatic climate control system others. Do not obstruct air volume by placing will correspondingly adjust the interior objects on the air volume-through ex- air temperature. haust slots below the rear window.

i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.

183 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

Adjusting the temperature for center Turning on warm air Adjusting air distribution air vents ̈ Turn thumbwheel in the direction of 4 Use air distribution controls and When outside temperatures are low, you the white marking. c 6 (୴ page 182) to separately adjust the air can manually raise the air temperature for Warm air will enter from the center air distribution on each side of the passenger the center and side air vents. The vent. compartment. The following symbols are thumbwheel is located between the 4 found on the controls: center air vents (୴ page 180). Turning on cooler air Symbol Function Automatic temperature control ̈ Turn thumbwheel 4 in the direction of the blue marking. h Directs air through the cen- ̈ Turn thumbwheel 4 to A. ter air vents Cooler air will enter from the center air The indicator lamp above the thumb- vent. d Directs air to the windows wheel comes on. The temperature is » Directs air into the entire automatically adjusted to the set value. vehicle interior c Directs air to the footwells

184 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

Adjusting manually Windows fogged on the inside ̈ Adjust left and right air vents 1 and upwards (୴ ̈ Press left or right button U. ̈ Press button ± to switch on the air 6 page 180). conditioning (୴ page 182). ̈ Increase temperature setting. The button emerges and the h, », d and c symbols become The indicator lamp in the button goes ̈ Open side air vents 9 and direct them visible. out. onto the side windows (୴ page 180). ̈ Turn the marking on the regulator to ̈ Press button , to switch off the air Windshield fogged on the outside the desired symbol. recirculation (୴ page 182). ̈ The air will be directed to the vents cor- The indicator lamp on the button goes Switch the windshield wipers on ୴ responding to this symbol. out. ( page 48). ̈ Press on both U buttons until they ̈ Make sure left and right button U Adjusting automatically click in. emerges. ̈ U The h, », d and c sym- Press left or right button until it The h, », d and bols are no longer visible. clicks in. c symbols become visible. The h, », d and ̈ Press left and right d button. c symbols are no longer visible. ̈ Set blower to the maximum speed. The air distribution is adjusted automatically.

185 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

Adjusting air volume Adjusting manually Maximum cooling MAXCOOL

Use air volume control 9 (୴ page 182) for Reducing air volume If the left and right air distribution controls both automatic and manual air volume ad- as well as the air volume control are set ̈ Press switch down until the desired justment. 9 to U and there is a high need for cool- air volume is reached. ing, the display “AUTO MAXCOOL” appears. Adjusting automatically The display shows the current level. This provides the fastest possible cooling ̈ Press A on air volume switch of the vehicle interior (when windows and 9 Increasing air volume (୴ page 182). sliding/pop-up roof are closed). ̈ Press switch up until the desired air The display shows “AUTO.” The air vol- 9 volume is reached. ume is adjusted automatically. The display shows the current level.

186 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

Defrosting Air recirculation mode Warning! G Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent i unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle Never operate the side windows and the These settings should only be selected from the outside. This setting cuts off the sliding pop/pop-up roof if there is the possi- for a short time. intake of outside air and recirculates the bility of anyone being harmed by the closing air in the passenger compartment. procedure. Activating In the event that the procedure causes po- ̈ P ୴ Press button ( page 182). Warning! G tential danger, the closing of the side win- The indicator lamp on the button dows can be immediately halted by pressing comes on. When the outside temperature is below the respective window switch. The closing of 41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately ̈ Switch off air recirculation, if selected. mode for short periods to prevent window halted by moving the sliding/pop-up roof ̈ Press button , (୴ page 182). fogging. switch in the overhead control panel in any direction. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Activating The closing of the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof can be reversed by again ̈ ̈ Press button , (୴ page 182). Close center air vents. pressing and holding the , button. ̈ Adjust side air vents upwards. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. Deactivating ̈ P ୴ i Press button ( page 182). If you keep button , pressed, the The indicator lamp on the button goes side windows and the sliding/pop-up out. Defrosting is turned off. roof will close.

187 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

i i Charcoal filter The air recirculation mode is activated If you keep button , pressed, the An activated charcoal filter markedly re- automatically: side windows and the sliding/pop-up duces bad odors and removes pollutants roof will return to their previous posi- ț at high outside temperatures from air entering the passenger compart- tion. ț if the concentration of carbon mon- ment. oxide and nitrogen oxide in the out- The air recirculation mode is deactivated Activating side air increases beyond a automatically: predetermined level, for example in ̈ Press button e (୴ page 182). a tunnel. ț after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F The indicator lamp on the button Please note that the charcoal filter (5°C) comes on. must be activated (୴ page 188) for the air recirculation mode to be activated ț after five minutes if the air conditioning i automatically. is turned off If you keep button e pressed, the If you have turned off the air condition- ț after 30 minutes if the outside temper- side windows and the sliding/pop-up ing (୴ page 190) or the outside tem- ature is above approximately 41°F roof will close. perature is below 41°F (5°C), the air (5°C) recirculation mode will not switch on At outside temperatures above 79°F automatically. (26°C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity of Deactivating outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes. ̈ Press button , (୴ page 182). The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

188 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

i Rear window defroster Warning! G If you keep button e pressed, the The rear window defroster uses a large side windows and the sliding/pop-up Never operate the side windows and the amount of power. To keep battery drain to roof will return to their previous posi- sliding /pop-up roof if there is the possibility a minimum, switch off the defroster as tion. of anyone being harmed by the closing pro- soon as the rear window is clear. The de- cedure. froster is automatically deactivated after The system automatically switches to the approximately 6 to 17 minutes of opera- In the event that the procedure causes po- air recirculation mode if the carbon tential danger, the closing of the side win- tion depending on the outside tempera- monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX) ture. dows can be immediately halted by pressing concentration of the outside air increases the respective window switch. The closing of beyond a predetermined level, for example Activating the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately in a tunnel. halted by moving the sliding/pop-up roof ̈ Press button F (୴ page 182). switch in the overhead control panel in any The automatic air recirculation mode does direction. not function if ± is selected or if the The indicator lamp on the button outside temperature has fallen below comes on. The closing of the side windows and slid- 41°F (5°C). ing/pop-up roof can be reversed by again Deactivating pressing and holding the e button. The activated charcoal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the ̈ Press button F (୴ page 182) again. inside, or if the passenger compartment Deactivating The indicator lamp on the button goes needs to be quickly heated or cooled out. ̈ Press button e (୴ page 182). down. The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

189 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

Deactivating the climate control sys- Air conditioning Warning! G tem The air conditioning is operational while Any accumulation of snow and ice should be the engine is running and cools the interior Deactivating removed from the rear window before driv- air to the temperature set by the operator. ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, It is possible to completely deactivate the endangering you and others. automatic climate control system. i Condensation may drip out from under- ̈ Press button M (୴ page 182). neath the vehicle. This is normal and ! The display shows “0”. not an indication of a malfunction. If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp Reactivating starts flashing, this means that too Deactivating many electrical consumers are operat- There are several ways to reactivate the It is possible to deactivate the air condi- ing simultaneously and there is insuffi- automatic climate control system: tioning (cooling) function of the automatic cient voltage in the battery. The system ̈ Press one of the following buttons, climate control system. The air in the vehi- responds automatically by deactivating M, P, U, a temperature con- cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu- the rear window defroster. trol switch (୴ page 182) or air volume midified. As soon as the battery has sufficient switch 9 on the automatic climate ̈ Press button ± (୴ page 182). voltage, the rear window defroster au- control panel. The indicator lamp on the button ± tomatically turns itself back on. comes on.

190 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

Activating Residual heat and ventilation Deactivating Moist air can fog up the windows. You can ̈ Press button T (୴ page 182). With the engine switched off, it is possible dehumidify the air with the air condition- to continue to heat or ventilate the interior The indicator lamp on button T ing. for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes goes out. ̈ ± ୴ Press again ( page 182). use of the residual heat produced by the The residual heat is automatically turned The indicator lamp on the ± button engine. off: goes out. Activating ț when the ignition is switched on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant ̈ ț after about 30 minutes R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch which are harmful to the ozone layer. to position 1 or 0, or remove it from the ț if the battery voltage drops starter switch. ! ̈ Press button T (୴ page 182). i ± How long the system will provide heat- If the button on the automatic cli- T mate control panel starts to flash, this The indicator lamp on button ing depends on the coolant tempera- indicates that the air conditioning is comes on. ture and the temperature set by the losing refrigerant. The compressor has operator. The blower will run at speed turned itself off. The air conditioning setting 1 regardless of the air distribu- cannot be turned on again. tion control setting. Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

191 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

Ventilated storage compartment Switching ventilation on Rear passenger compartment adjust- (except S 55 AMG) ̈ Open the storage compartment in front able air vents of the armrest, see “Storage compart- The storage compartment under the front ment in front of armrest” (୴ page 232). Rear center console air vents armrest (୴ page 233) can be ventilated when the automatic air conditioning is ̈ Push upper portion of switch. switched on. The switch is located inside the storage compartment in the front. The Switching ventilation off air temperature is about the same as that ̈ Open the storage compartment in front of the center air vents. of the armrest, see “Storage compart- The air volume dependent on the setting ment in front of armrest” (୴ page 232). of: ̈ Push lower portion of switch. ț Air distribution control ! ț Air volume control Do not obstruct the air vent in the stor- 1 Left center air vent, adjustable ț Air vents in the dashboard age compartment. 2 Right center air vent, adjustable The air temperature is about the same as 3 Thumbwheel for center air vents with that of the dashboard air vents. It cannot i adjustable booster blower be regulated separately. The compartment can get very warm due to its confined space. When storing heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air vent while heating the passenger compartment.

192 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

To open center air vents and to adjust the Rear side air vents Rear passenger compartment climate booster blower: control* ̈ Turn thumbwheel . 3 The automatic climate control is operation- i al whenever the engine is running. You can operate the climate control system in ei- The booster blower allows air volume ther the automatic or manual mode. The speed to the rear passenger compart- system cools or heats the interior depend- ment to be increased at four different ing on the selected interior temperature levels. and the current outside temperature. The temperature at the air vents for The automatic climate control system is rear passenger compartment 1 4 Rear side air vent, right and left adjustable individually for the rear passen- and is the same as at the dashboard 2 5 Air volume control for rear side air vent ger compartment. center air vents. To open rear side air vents: The control panel is located in the rear center console. ̈ Turn thumbwheel 5 towards the window. Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.

193 Controls in detail Automatic climate control

i Item Warning! G When the rear seats are not occupied 1 Left center air vent, adjustable (rear seat belts unbuckled) the rear cli- Follow the recommended settings for heat- mate control system adopts the set- 2 Display ing and cooling as given in the instructions tings of the front climate control Right center air vent, adjustable 3 for the front automatic climate control system. 4 Thumbwheel for air distribution (୴ page 180). Otherwise the windows could 5 Temperature control, right fog up, impairing visibility for the driver and endangering you and others. 6 Air volume (automatic, manual) 7 Temperature control, left 8 Rear climate control system ON/OFF Residual engine heat utilization

Rear automatic climate control panel

194 Controls in detail Power windows ̄ Power windows Opening and closing the windows the automatic reversal function will not op- Warning! G erate. The side windows can be opened and closed electrically. The switches for all the When closing the windows, make sure that When leaving the vehicle, always remove the side windows are on the driver’s door. The there is no danger of anyone being harmed SmartKey from starter switch, take the switches for the respective windows are by the closing procedure. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and on the front passenger door and the rear The closing of the door windows can be im- lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- doors. mediately halted by releasing the switch or, attended in the vehicle, or with access to an if the switch was pressed past the resis- unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- tance point and released, by pressing the re- cle equipment may cause an accident spective switch. and/or serious personal injury. If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where i you pressed the switch past the resistance You can also open or close the win- point and released it to close the window, dows using the: the automatic reversal function will stop the ț SmartKey (summer opening/con- window and open it slightly. venience feature) (୴ page 197) 1 Left front window If the window encounters an obstruction ț button , in the control panel of 2 Right front window that blocks its path in a circumstance where the automatic climate control 3 Right rear window you are closing the window by pressing and (୴ page 182) 4 Left rear window holding the switch, by pressing and holding ‹ ț button e in the control panel of 5 Rear window override switch button on the SmartKey, or by press- ୴ ing and holding the lock button (vehicles the automatic climate control ( page 74) ୴ with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, ( page 182)

195 Controls in detail Power windows

̈ Switch on ignition. Closing the windows Fully closing the windows (Express-close) ̈ Press switch 1 to 4 at the i symbol j to the resistance point. ̈ Press switch to at the You can still operate the windows when 1 4 symbol j past the resistance point the SmartKey is in starter switch The corresponding window will move and release. position 0 or has been removed: upwards until you release the switch. The corresponding window closes com- ț until the driver’s or front passen- pletely. ger’s door is opened Warning G ț for no more than five minutes ! If you press and hold the switch up when If the upward movement of the window closing the window, and upward movement is blocked during the closing proce- Opening the windows of the window is blocked by some obstruc- dure, the window will stop and open ̈ tion including but not limited to arms, hands, Press switch 1 to 4 at the slightly. symbol k to the resistance point. fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate. Remove the obstruction, press the The corresponding window will move switch j again past the resistance downwards until you release the point and release. switch. Fully opening the windows (Express-open) If the window still does not close when ̈ Press switch to at the there is no obstruction, then hold the 1 4 j symbol k past the resistance point switch down. The side window and release. will then close without the obstruction sensor function. The corresponding window opens completely.

196 Controls in detail Power windows

Opening and closing the windows with Opening (Summer opening feature) Warning! G the SmartKey If the weather is warm, you can ventilate ୴ Driver's door only: The sliding/pop-up roof ( page 199) will the vehicle before driving off by simulta- If within five seconds you again press the also be opened or closed when you oper- neously: ate the power windows with the SmartKey. switch past the resistance point and re- ț opening the sliding/pop-up roof lease, the automatic reversal will not func- ț opening the side windows tion. Warning! G ț turning on the seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat Stopping windows Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility ̈ To do so, follow the instructions below: Press respective switch again. of anyone being harmed by the opening or ̈ Œ closing procedure. Press and hold button after unlocking the vehicle. In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be imme- The windows and sliding/pop-up roof diately halted by releasing the remote begin to open after approximately one control button. To reverse direction of second. movement press Œ for opening or ̈ Release the Œ button to stop proce- ‹ for closing. dure.

̈ Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door handle.

197 Controls in detail Power windows

Closing (Convenience feature) Synchronizing the power windows Warning! G ̈ Press and hold button ‹ after lock- The power window must be resynchro- ing the vehicle. When closing the windows and the slid- nized each time The windows and sliding/pop-up roof ing/pop-up roof, make sure that there is no ț after the battery has been disconnect- begin to close after approximately one danger of anyone being harmed by the closed. second. ing procedure. ț if the power windows cannot be fully ̈ Release the ‹ button to stop proce- The windows will not automatically reopen if opened (Express-open) or closed dure. blocked during convenience closing. (Express-close). Make sure all side windows and the slid- If potential danger exists, proceed as fol- ing/pop-up roof are properly closed before lows: Synchronizing leaving the vehicle. ț Release the lock button. ̈ Switch on ignition. ț Pull on the door handle and hold firmly. Closing the windows with the ̈ Press the power window switches at The side windows and the slid- j SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Conve- ing/pop-up roof will open for as long as the symbol until the side win- nience feature) the door handle is held but the door is dows are closed. The sliding/pop-up roof (୴ page 199) will not opened. Hold the switches for approximately also be closed when the power windows one second. are operated with KEYLESS-GO. The power windows are synchronized. ̈ Press and hold lock button at door (୴ page 55) until the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are closed.

198 Controls in detail Sliding/pop-up roof ̄ Sliding/pop-up roof Opening and closing the With the roof closed or tilted open, a sliding/pop-up roof screen can be slid into the roof opening to Warning! G guard against sun rays. When sliding the The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened roof open, the screen will also retract. When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make and closed electrically. The switch for the sure that there is no danger of anyone being sliding/pop-up roof is on the overhead harmed by the closing procedure. control panel. The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from starter switch, take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- Push up to raise roof at rear 1 cle equipment can cause an accident Pull down to lower roof at rear 2 and/or serious personal injury. 3 Push forward to slide roof closed 4 Push back to slide roof open

199 Controls in detail Sliding/pop-up roof

! ̈ Switch on ignition. i To avoid damaging the seals, do not Selecting a sliding/pop-up roof open- transport any objects with sharp edges Opening and closing the ing position which can stick out of the sliding/pop-up roof To select a sliding/pop-up roof opening sliding/pop-up roof. ̈ To open, close, raise or lower the slid- position, press the switch to the resis- Do not open the sliding/pop-up roof if ing/pop-up roof, move the switch to re- tance point and release it when the there is snow or ice on the roof, as this sistance point in the required sliding/pop-up roof has reached the could result in malfunctions. direction 1 to 4. desired position. The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened Release the switch when the roof has The sliding/pop-up roof now opens to or closed manually should an electrical reached the desired position. the position set when the switch is malfunction occur (୴ page 352). pressed past the resistance point in the Express-opening and Express-closing “open” direction. the sliding/pop-up roof i ̈ Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof You can also open or close the To open, close, raise or lower the sliding/pop-up roof using the: sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch ̈ Move the switch in any direction. past the resistance point in the re- ț SmartKey (summer opening/con- quired direction 1 to 4 and release. i venience future) (୴ page 201) The sliding/pop up roof opens or clos- If the movement of the ț button , in the control panel of es completely, or opens to the last set sliding/pop-up roof is blocked during the automatic climate control opening position. the closing procedure, the roof will (୴ page 182) stop and reopen slightly. ț button e in the control panel of the automatic climate control (୴ page 188)

200 Controls in detail Sliding/pop-up roof

Opening and closing the Opening (Summer opening feature) Closing (Convenience feature) sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey If the weather is warm, you can ventilate ̈ Press and hold button ‹ after lock- The power windows (୴ page 195) will also the vehicle before driving off by simulta- ing the vehicle. be opened or closed when you operate the neously: The windows and sliding/pop-up roof sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey. ț opening the sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after approximately one second. G ț opening the side windows Warning! ̈ ‹ ț turning on the seat ventilation* for the Release the button to stop procedure. Never operate the windows or driver’s seat Make sure all the side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility To do so, follow the instructions below: of anyone being harmed by the opening or sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed ̈ Œ closing procedure. Press and hold button after un- before leaving the vehicle. locking the vehicle. In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be imme- The windows and sliding/pop-up roof diately halted by releasing the remote begin to open after approximately one control button. To reverse direction of second. movement, press Œ for opening or ‹ ̈ Release the Œ button to stop proce- for closing. dure.

̈ Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door handle.

201 Controls in detail Sliding/pop-up roof

Closing the sliding/pop-up roof with Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof If potential danger exists, proceed as fol- KEYLESS-GO* (Convenience feature) lows: The power sliding/pop-up roof must be re- The power window (୴ page 195) will also ț Release the lock button. synchronized each time after: be closed when the sliding/pop-up roof is ț operated with KEYLESS-GO. Pull on the door handle and hold firmly. ț the battery has been disconnected The side windows and the ̈ Press and hold lock button at door sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long ț the sliding/pop-up roof has been (୴ page 55) until the sliding/pop-up as the door handle is held but the door closed manually is not opened. roof and the side windows are closed. ț the sliding/pop-up roof does not open smoothly G Warning! ț a malfunction

When closing the windows and the Synchronizing sliding/pop-up roof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the ̈ Switch on ignition. closing procedure. ̈ Press and hold the switch in The sliding/pop-up roof will not automati- direction 1 until the sliding/pop-up cally reopen if blocked during convenience roof is fully raised at the rear. closing. Hold the switch for approximately one second. The sliding/pop-up roof is synchronized.

202 Controls in detail Driving systems ̄ Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are de- Cruise control scribed on the following pages: Warning! G Cruise control automatically maintains the ț Cruise control and Distronic*, with speed you set for your vehicle. Cruise control is a convenience system de- which the vehicle can maintain a preset signed to assist the driver during vehicle op- Use of cruise control is recommended for speed eration. The driver is and must remain at all driving at a constant speed for extended ț AIRMATIC adjusts the vehicle suspen- times responsible for the vehicle speed and periods of time. You can set or resume sion characteristics automatically and for safe brake operation. cruise control at any speed above 20 mph controls the vehicle level. (30 km/h). Only use cruise control if the traffic, road ț ABC* with vehicle level control sys- and weather conditions make it advisable to The cruise control function is operated by tems, with which you can change vehi- travel at a steady speed. means of the cruise control lever. cle suspension characteristics ț The use of cruise control can be danger- The cruise control lever is the uppermost ț Parktronic*, which serves as a parking ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic lever found on the left-hand side of the assistant because conditions do not allow safe steering column (୴ page 20). driving at a steady speed. For information on the BAS, ABS, and ESP ț The use of cruise control can be danger- driving systems, see “Driving safety sys- ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tems” (୴ page 77). tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. ț Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog. The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.

203 Controls in detail Driving systems

Setting current speed Canceling cruise control ̈ Accelerate or decelerate to the desired There are several ways to cancel cruise speed. control: ̈ Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise ̈ Step on the brake pedal. control lever. or The current speed is set. ̈ Briefly push the cruise control lever to ̈ Remove your foot from the accelerator position 3. pedal. Cruise control will be canceled. The 1 Set current or higher speed Cruise control is activated. last speed set will be stored for later 2 Set current or lower speed use. 3 Cancel cruise control i 4 Resume at last set speed On uphill or downhill grades, cruise ! control may not be able to maintain the Moving gear selector lever to set speed. Once the grade eases, the position N while driving also cancels set speed will be resumed. cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).

i The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine.

204 Controls in detail Driving systems

Setting a higher speed i Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” ̈ Lift the cruise control lever to When you use the cruise control lever function) position 1 and hold it up until the de- to decelerate, the transmission will au- sired speed is reached. tomatically downshift if the engine’s Warning! G braking power does not slow the vehi- ̈ Release the cruise control lever. cle sufficiently. The speed stored in memory should only be The new speed is set. set again if prevailing road conditions per- Fine adjustment in 1 mph mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration i (Canada: 1 km/h) increments differences arising from returning to preset Depressing the accelerator pedal does speed could cause an accident and/or seri- not deactivate cruise control. After Faster ous injury to you and others. brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control will resume the last ̈ Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the ̈ Briefly push the cruise control lever to speed set. direction of arrow 1. position 4. Slower Setting a lower speed The cruise control will resume the last ̈ set speed. ̈ Depress the cruise control lever to Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow . ̈ Remove your foot from the accelerator position 2 and hold it down until the 2 desired speed is reached. pedal. ̈ Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is set.

205 Controls in detail Driving systems

Distronic* It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to Warning! G be attentive to traffic and road conditions When activated, the Distronic adaptive and to provide the steering, braking and oth- cruise control system increases driving Distronic requires familiarity with its opera- er driving inputs necessary to retain control convenience afforded by the cruise control tional characteristics. We strongly recom- of the vehicle. during travel on expressways and other mend that you review the following major roads. information carefully before operating the system. ț If the Distronic distance sensor detects Warning! G a slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced so Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed i that you follow that vehicle at a preset adjustment reduction capability is intended For operation in the USA only: This de- distance. to make cruise control more effective and vice complies with Part 15 of the ț If there is no vehicle directly ahead of usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the you, Distronic will function in the same is not intended to, nor does it, replace the following two conditions: need for extreme care. The responsibility for way as cruise control (୴ page 203). ț This device may not cause harmful the vehicle speed and the distance to the ve- interference, and hicle ahead, including most importantly Warning! G brake operation to assure safe stopping dis- ț this device must accept any inter- tance, always rests with the driver. ference received, including interfer- Distronic adaptive cruise control is no sub- ence that may cause undesired Distronic cannot take street and traffic con- stitute for active driving involvement. It does operation. ditions into account. not react to stationary objects, nor recog- Any unauthorized modification to this nize or predict the curvature and lane layout device could void the user’s authority or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distron- to operate the equipment. ic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the vehicle’s braking power.

206 Controls in detail Driving systems

Distronic is designed and intended only to Warning! G Warning! G maintain a set speed and keep a set dis- Distronic cannot take street and traffic con- Close attention to road and traffic condi- tance from moving objects in front of it. ditions into account. Only use Distronic if tions is imperative at all times, regardless of the weather, road, and traffic conditions whether or not Distronic is activated. Warning! G make it advisable to travel at a steady Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind- speed. ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi- The “Resume” function should only be oper- tions do not allow safe driving at a steady ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ- speed. ously set speed and wishes to resume this Warning! G Distronic will not react to stationary objects particular preset speed. in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip- traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction will also not respond to oncoming vehicles. can result in wheel spin and loss of control. Switch off Distronic: Distronic does not act upon adverse sight distance conditions. Do not use Distronic ț when changing from the left to the right during conditions of fog and heavy rain, lane if vehicles are moving more slowly snow or sleet. in the left lane ț when entering a turn lane or highway off ramp ț in complex driving situations, such as in highway construction zones In these situations, Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless deactivated.

207 Controls in detail Driving systems

Distronic displays in the speedometer ̈ Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid dial a collision. Under no circumstances should the driver await the intermittent warning sound before braking. See the following warning note. The intermittent warning sound ceases and the red Distronic warning lamp l goes out when the neces- Segments sary distance to the vehicle ahead is If Distronic detects a vehicle directly again established. Set speed ahead, the segments from the speed of the If Distronic is activated, one or two seg- vehicle ahead to the set speed come on. ments come on around the set speed. If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision (୴ page 214): i l The vehicle speed displayed on the ț The red Distronic warning lamp in speedometer can briefly vary from the the instrument cluster comes on. speed setting on the Distronic system. ț An intermittent warning sounds.

208 Controls in detail Driving systems

Distronic menu in the control system Warning! G Warning! G In the Distronic menu you see the current An intermittent warning sounds and the Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi- settings for Distronic. What appears in the Distronic warning lamp l in the instru- mum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corre- display depends on whether Distronic and ment cluster is illuminated if the Distronic sponds to about 20% of the maximum the distance warning function are turned system calculates that the distance to the deceleration ability of your vehicle. on or off. ̈ è ÿ vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to Press button or repeatedly speed indicate that Distronic will not be ca- restore the preset distance or to maintain until you see one of the following dis- pable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to the speed. The brake pedal is automatically plays. maintain the preset following distance, applied as this happens which results in the which creates a danger of a collision. brake pedal moving. Immediately brake your vehicle to increase Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in- the distance between your vehicle and the cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob- vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is jects stored in this area may impair pedal intended as a final caution that you have not movement which could interfere with the interceded with your own braking inputs to braking ability of the Distronic system. avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning sig- Do not place your foot under the brake pedal nal to intercede with your own braking, as – your foot could become caught. that will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided. Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

209 Controls in detail Driving systems

Distronic deactivated Distronic activated Cruise control lever If Distronic is deactivated, the standard When you turn Distronic on, you will see The Distronic system is operated by means display of Distronic appears in the multi- the set speed in the multifunction display of the cruise control lever. function display. for about five seconds. You then see the The cruise control lever is the uppermost following display in the multifunction dis- lever found on the left-hand side of the play. steering column.

1 Vehicle ahead, if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle 1 Distronic activated ahead 4 Symbol for activated distance warning function 5 Your vehicle 1 Set current or higher speed 2 Set current or lower speed 3 Deactivate Distronic 4 Resume at last set speed

210 Controls in detail Driving systems

Activating Distronic Setting the current speed Setting a higher speed You can activate Distronic if: ̈ Accelerate or decelerate to the desired ̈ Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the speed. direction of arrow (୴ page 210) to ț you are driving between 25 mph 1 increase vehicle speed in increments (40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h) ̈ Briefly lift or depress the cruise control of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) lever. ț the ESP is activated (୴ page 79) The new speed is set. Distronic is activated and the current If Distronic has not been activated after speed is set. The stored speed is displayed in the multi- pressing the cruise control lever you will function display for approximately five sec- see the message --- in the multifunction ̈ Remove your foot from the accelerator onds (୴ display. pedal. page 210), and one or two segments around the stored speed come In the following cases you cannot activate on on the speedometer (୴ page 208). Distronic: i If you do not take your foot off of the ț up to two minutes after starting the en- accelerator completely, the following i Depressing the accelerator pedal does gine message will appear in the multifunc- not deactivate Distronic. After brief action display: ț when you brake celeration (e.g. for passing), the cruise DISTRONIC OVERRIDE. ț control will resume the last speed set. if you have set the parking brake Distronic will not work to maintain the ț if the gear selector lever is in distance to a slower moving vehicles in position P, R, or N front of you. Your vehicle speed will then be determined only by the accel- ț if the ESP is switched off erator pedal position.

211 Controls in detail Driving systems

Setting a lower speed Fine adjustment in 1 mph Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” (Canada: 1 km/h) increments function) ̈ Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow (୴ page 210) to 2 Faster decrease vehicle speed in increments Warning! G of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) ̈ Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow (୴ page 210). The speed stored in memory should only be The new speed is set. 4 set again if prevailing road conditions per- The stored speed is displayed in the multi- mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration function display for approximately five sec- differences arising from returning to preset onds (୴ page 210), and one or two speed could cause an accident and/or seri- segments around the stored speed come ous injury you and others. on on the speedometer (୴ page 208). ̈ Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the i direction of arrow (୴ page 210). When you use the cruise control lever 4 to decelerate, the transmission will au- Distronic is set to the last stored tomatically downshift if the rate of de- speed. celeration is too low. ̈ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

212 Controls in detail Driving systems

Deactivating Distronic Distronic deactivates automatically when: Setting the following distance in Distronic There are several ways to deactivate the ț you set the parking brake Distronic system: You can set the specified following dis- ț you drive slower than tance for Distronic by varying the time set- ̈ Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the 25 mph (40 km/h) ting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using direction of arrow (୴ page 210). 3 ț the ESP is active (୴ page 79) or you de- this time setting and the current speed of or activate the ESP your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets ̈ Step on the brake pedal. ț you move the gear selector lever into the required following distance to the vehi- position N cle ahead. The set distance will be shown Distronic will be deactivated. The last in the multifunction display field. speed set will be stored into memory. A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC OFF message appears in the multifunction The thumbwheel for making the time set- i display for approximately five seconds. ting is located on the lower section of the The following message will appear in center console. the multifunction display for approxi- Warning! G mately five seconds: DISTRONIC OFF. Warning! G The last stored speed is deleted when Distronic switches off and releases the you turn off the engine. brakes when the vehicle decelerates below It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to the minimum speed of approximately select the appropriate setting given road 25 mph (40 km/h) by operation of the sys- conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving tem. At that time the driver must apply the style and applicable laws and driving recom- brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed fur- mendations for safe following distance. ther or bring it to a stop.

213 Controls in detail Driving systems

Increasing distance Distance warning function Increasing the distance setting causes Dis- When Distronic is deactivated, this func- tronic to maintain a greater following dis- tion will continue to warn you when recog- tance to the vehicle ahead. nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and ̈ Turn thumbwheel towards ¯. 2 the danger of a collision exists: Decreasing distance ț The distance warning lamp l in the Decreasing the distance setting causes instrument cluster comes on. Distronic to maintain a shorter following ț An intermittent warning sounds. 1 Distance warning function on/off distance to the vehicle ahead. switch If these warnings are issued, you must ̈ Turn thumbwheel towards ®. brake manually to maintain a safe distance 2 Thumbwheel for setting distance 2 and avoid a collision with the vehicle ahead. When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also stops when the distance to the vehicle ahead is sufficient again without applying the brake pedal. In this case the distance warning lamp l also extinguishes.

214 Controls in detail Driving systems

Activating Driving with Distronic Warning! G ̈ Press switch 1. This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is re- If the Distronic warning lamp l in the in- The indicator lamp on the switch quired on the part of the driver. Be pre- strument cluster comes on while driving comes on. A loudspeaker symbol ap- pared to brake in such situations which will and/or an intermittent warning sounds, im- pears in the multifunction display deactivate the Distronic system. mediate attention on the part of the driver is (୴ page 210). required. G As required by the traffic situation, apply the Deactivating Warning! brakes and navigate around a possible ob- ̈ Press switch 1. stacle. However, do not drive by relying on Distronic works to maintain the speed se- The indicator lamp on the switch goes the distance warning function, as this will re- lected by the driver unless a moving obsta- out. sult in an emergency braking application. cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the Especially depending on road surface condi- same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol- tions and driver reaction, this will not always lowing another vehicle ahead of you at a dis- enable you to avoid a collision. tance set by Distronic). This means that: ț Your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you change lanes. i ț While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in Complex driving situations are not al- front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could ways fully recognized by Distronic. This lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front could result in wrong or missing dis- of it, then your vehicle could accelerate tance warnings. to the previously selected speed. ୴୴

215 Controls in detail Driving systems

୴୴ The most likely cause for a malfunctioning Turns and bends Distronic regulates only the distance be- system is a dirty sensor (located behind tween your vehicle and those directly ahead the hood grille), especially at times of snow of it, but does not register stationary objects and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Dis- in the road, e.g.: tronic will switch off, and the message ț a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPER. ț a disabled vehicle MANUAL appears in the multifunction dis- ț an oncoming vehicle play. The driver must always be on the alert, ob- For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen- serve all traffic and intercede as required by sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system steering or braking the vehicle. sensor cover” (୴ page 299). In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect i a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect one too soon. This may cause your vehicle Warning! G If the message CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPER. MANUAL disappears during to brake late or unexpectedly. Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy driving and the last speed stored flash- road conditions. es for approximately five seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic is again operational.

216 Controls in detail Driving systems

Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles

A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle Because of their narrow profile, the vehi- from your direct line of travel may not be changing lanes. There will be insufficient cles traveling near the outer edge of the detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi- distance to the lane-changing vehicle. lane have not yet been detected by Dis- cient distance to the vehicle ahead. tronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicles ahead.

217 Controls in detail Driving systems

AIRMATIC Suspension tuning The suspension tuning is set according to: AIRMATIC automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for ț Your driving style your vehicle. AIRMATIC consists of two ț Road surface conditions components: ț Your choice of suspension style, ț Adaptive Damping System (ADS) “sport” or “convenience”, which you ț Level control system select using the damping switch. The ADS automatically selects the opti- The following suspension styles are avail- mum damping for the respective driving able: 1 Indicator lamps conditions. At the same time the suspen- ț Convenience 2 Damping switch sion is set to either sporty or regular. ̈ Start the engine. Both indicator lamps 1 are off. ̈ ț Sports 1 Press the damping switch 2 until the desired suspension style is set. One indicator lamp 1 is on. ț Sports 2 i The selected suspension style is stored Both indicator lamps 1 are on. in memory, even after the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch.

218 Controls in detail Driving systems

Vehicle level control with AIRMATIC The following vehicle level settings can be The switch with the indicator lamps is lo- selected when the vehicle is stationary: cated in the upper part of the center con- Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride sole. height to: Level ț reduce fuel consumption Normal For driving on normal roads. ț increase vehicle safety The indicator lamp is off. The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or Raised For driving on rough roads or lowered according to the selected level with snow chains.The indica- setting and to the vehicle speed: tor lamp is on. ț With increasing speed, ride height is re- 3 Select the "Raised" level setting only when duced by up to approximately /4 in (20 mm). required by current driving conditions. Otherwise: ț With decreasing speed, the ride height 1 Indicator lamp ț is again raised to the selected vehicle Fuel consumption may increase 2 Vehicle level control switch level. ț Handling may be impaired ̈ Briefly press switch 2 to change from one level setting to the other. i G The message: These height adjustments are so small Warning! that you may not notice any change. AIRMATIC To help avoid personal injury, keep hands VEHICLE RISING and feet away from wheel housing area, and stay away from under the vehicle when low- appears in the multifunction display ering the vehicle chassis. when changing from normal level to raised level. ୴୴

219 Controls in detail Driving systems

୴୴ The indicator lamp is then lit. The dis- Active Body Control (ABC)* The ABC switch with the indicator lamps is play switches off when the vehicle is located in the upper part of the center con- raised. The ABC system automatically selects the sole. optimum suspension tuning and ride ̈ Press switch again to lower the ve- 2 height for your vehicle. hicle. The indicator lamp is off. The selected vehicle level setting remains Suspension tuning stored in memory even if the engine is The suspension tuning is set according to: turned off and restarted except when you ț Your driving style ț exceed a speed of 75 mph (120 km/h) ț Road surface conditions or ț The vehicle loading ț maintain a speed of between 50 mph ț (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for Your choice of suspension style, 1 Indicator lamp more than 5 minutes “sporty” or “regular”, which you select 2 ABC switch using the ABC button The vehicle then lowers to regular level. ̈ Start the engine. The selected suspension style is stored The message: in memory, even after the SmartKey is AIRMATIC removed from the starter switch. LEV. SELECT. CANCELED! appears in the multifunction display and the indicator lamp is off. The display switches off when the vehicle is raised.

220 Controls in detail Driving systems

Suspension for sporty driving style Vehicle level control with ABC* i The setting for sporty driving is selected Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride These height adjustments are so small when indicator lamp 1 is illuminated. height to: that you may not notice any change. ̈ Press switch 2. ț reduce fuel consumption Select the level 1 and 2 settings only when Indicator lamp 1 comes on. ț increase vehicle safety required by current driving conditions. The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or Otherwise: Suspension for regular driving style lowered according to the selected level ț Fuel consumption may increase The setting for regular driving is selected setting and to the vehicle speed: ț when indicator lamp is off. Handling may be impaired 1 ț With increasing speed, ride height is re- ̈ Press switch 2. duced by up to approximately 1.4 in G (35 mm). Warning! Indicator lamp 1 goes out. ț With decreasing speed, the ride height To help avoid personal injury, keep hands is again raised to the selected vehicle and feet away from wheel housing area, and level. stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.

221 Controls in detail Driving systems

The following vehicle level settings can be selected when the vehicle is stationary:

Vehicle level when Use for Ride height increase Automatic lowering Indicator lamps stationary over normal Normal Normal operation None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) Both lamps off Raised level1 Driving with snow chains Max. 0.4 in (10 mm)1 Max. approx. 1.0 in (25 mm) One lamp lit (୴ page 293) Raised level 2 Very rough road surface Max. 0.8 in (20 mm)1 Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm) Both lamps lit conditions 1 Dependent on load

The switch with the indicator lamps is lo- ̈ Briefly press switch 2 to change from cated in the upper part of the center con- one level setting to the next. When ve- sole. hicle is at level 2, pressing the switch will return the vehicle to normal level. The message:

ACTIVE BODY CONTROL VEHICLE RISING! appears in the multifunction display. The display switches off when the vehi- 1 Indicator lamps cle is raised. 2 Vehicle level control switch

222 Controls in detail Driving systems

i Raised level 1 (see table) Raised level 2 (see table) Pressing the switch twice in quick suc- Speed-dependent lowering of vehicle Speed-dependent lowering of vehicle cession will cause the vehicle to imme- chassis (approximate values): chassis (approximate values): diately raise or lower according to the ț Between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 38 mph ț Between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 18 mph starting level. (60 km/h) - raised by approximately (30 km/h) - raised by approximately The selected vehicle level setting re- 0.4 in (10 mm) 0.8 in (20 mm) mains stored in memory even if the en- ț Between 38 mph (60 km/h) and ț Between 18 mph (30 km/h) and gine is turned off and restarted. 118 mph (190 km/h) - lowered 38 mph (60 km/h) – lowered progres- progressively by approximately 1.0 in sively by approximately 0.4 in (10 mm) Normal level (see table) (25 mm) ț Between 38 mph (60 km/h) and Speed-dependent lowering of vehicle 118 mph (190 km/h) – lowered pro- chassis (approximate values): gressively by additional approximately ț Between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 40 mph 1.0 in (25 mm) (65 km/h) – none ț Between 40 mph (65 km/h) and 87 mph (140 km/h) – lowered progressively by approximately 0.6 in (15 mm).

223 Controls in detail Driving systems

Parktronic* (Parking assist) The Parktronic system monitors the sur- Warning! G roundings of your vehicle with six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the Warning! G Make sure that no persons or animals are in rear bumper. the area in which you are maneuvering. You The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It could otherwise injure them. is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility The Parktronic system is an electronic aid during parking and other critical maneuvers designed to assist the driver during park- always rests with the driver. ing maneuvers. It visually and audibly indi- Special attention must be paid to objects cates the relative distance between the with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes vehicle and an obstacle. (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road The Parktronic system is automatically ac- curbs). Such objects may not be detected by tivated when you switch on the ignition the system and can damage the vehicle. and release the parking brake. The Park- 1 Sensors in the front bumper The operational function of the Parktronic tronic system deactivates at speeds over system can be affected by dirty sensors, es- 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the pecially at times of snow and ice, see Parktronic system turns on again. “Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors” (୴ page 299). Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration.

224 Controls in detail Driving systems

Range of the sensors Front sensors Minimum distance To function properly, the sensors must be Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensors regularly, being careful not to Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) scratch or damage the sensors. Rear sensors If the system detects an obstacle in this range, all the warning lamps come on and Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance might no longer be indicated by the system. ! During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer hitches). The Park- tronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result. Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc- es (e.g. truck air brakes or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the Parktronic system.

225 Controls in detail Driving systems

Warning indicators The position of the gear selector lever de- termines which warning indicators will be Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel- activated. ative distance between the sensors and an obstacle. The warning indicators for the Selector lever po- Warning indicator front area are located above the left air sition vents and center air vents in the dash- D Front area activated board (୴ page 21). The warning indicator for the rear area is integrated in the rear R or N Front and rear area trim. activated P Neither activated 1 Right front area warning indicator Each warning indicator is divided into six yellow and two red segments for either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system is ready when the border around the indicator is illuminated.

1 Left front area warning indicator

226 Controls in detail Driving systems

As your vehicle approaches an object, one Switching the Parktronic system Switching off the Parktronic system or more segments will come on, depending on/off ̈ Press switch 2. on the distance between your vehicle and You can switch off the Parktronic system Indicator lamp comes on. the object. When the eighth segment manually. 1 comes on, you have reached the minimum distance. The Parktronic switch is located in the up- Switching on the Parktronic system per section of the center console. ț Front area: An intermittent acoustic ̈ Press switch 2 again. warning will sound as the first red seg- Indicator lamp 1 goes out. ment comes on and a constant acoustic warning, both lasting a maximum of three seconds, will sound for the eighth segment, i.e. the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position P. ț Rear area: An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acous- 1 Indicator lamp tic warning, both lasting a maximum of 2 Parktronic on/off three seconds, will sound for the eighth segment, i.e. the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position D or P.

227 Controls in detail Driving systems

Parktronic malfunction If only the red segments of the Parktronic warning indicator come on and no warning There is a malfunction in the Parktronic sounds, then the sensors of the Parktronic system if the red segments of the Park- system are dirty or malfunctioning. Mal- tronic warning indicator come on and a function may also be caused by interfer- warning sounds. The Parktronic system ence from other radio or ultrasonic signals. will switch itself off after 30 seconds and The Parktronic system will switch itself off the indicator lamp on the Parktronic switch after 20 seconds. comes on. ̈ Clean Parktronic system sensors ̈ Have the Parktronic system checked (୴ page 299). by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter as soon as possible. ̈ Switch on ignition. or ̈ Check Parktronic operation at another location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.

228 Controls in detail Loading ̄ Loading Roof rack* Preparing roof rack installation Loading instructions ̈ Open trim at the trim strips in the roof. The total load weight including vehicle oc- Warning! G ̈ Secure the roof rack according to man- cupants and luggage/cargo should not ex- ufacturer’s instructions for installation. ceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated Use only roof racks approved by Mer- on the corresponding label located on the cedes-Benz for your vehicle model to avoid ! driver’s door pillar. damage to the vehicle. Follow manufactur- Load the roof rack in such a way that er’s installation instructions. the vehicle cannot be damaged while driving. Make sure ț you can fully raise the sliding/pop-up roof ț you can fully open the trunk

229 Controls in detail Loading

Cargo tie-down hooks Warning! G

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care Six hooks are located in the trunk. when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car- ̈ Carefully secure cargo by applying go in the trunk if possible. Do not pile lug- even load on all hooks with rope of suf- gage or cargo higher than the seat backs. ficient strength to hold down the cargo. Do not place anything on the rear-window shelf. Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

230 Controls in detail Useful features ̄ Useful features Storage compartments Glove box Unlocking the glove box ̈ Insert mechanical key (୴ page 348) into the glove box lock. Warning! G ̈ Turn the mechanical key to To help avoid personal injury during a colli- position 1. sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug- Opening the glove box gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not ̈ Press glove box lid release . pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat 3 backs. The glove box lid opens downward. Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy Unlocked 1 Closing the glove box objects. 2 Locked ̈ Push lid up to close. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help 3 Glove box lid release to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during Locking the glove box an accident. ̈ Insert mechanical key (୴ page 348) into the glove box lock. ̈ Turn the mechanical key to position 2.

231 Controls in detail Useful features

Storage compartment in the glove box Storage compartment in the center Storage compartment in front of arm- console rest A storage compartment is located in the cover of the glove box. It can be used to The storage compartment is located in the store check cards, pens, a flashlight, etc. lower portion of the center console.

1 Storage compartment

Opening 1 Storage compartment in glove box 1 Storage compartment The compartment contains a cup holder ̈ Lightly press the marking on the lid of Opening (୴ page 236). storage compartment 1. ̈ ̈ The lid opens upward. Slide the mark on the compartment Lightly touch cover plate 1. cover forward. The cover opens automatically.

Closing Closing ̈ Lightly press the mark on the compart- ̈ Lightly push cover plate 1 up until it ment cover forward. The cover closes engages. automatically.

232 Controls in detail Useful features

Storage compartment below the front Opening storage compartment Opening storage tray armrest (except S 55 AMG) The tray contains a coin holder. The buttons are located under the cushion ̈ Press button and lift the armrest lid. 1 ̈ Press button and lift the armrest. of the armrest. 2 i ! The storage compartment can be heat- Do not store any objects under the ed or cooled. storage tray. The compartment can get very warm Do not let bank cards, credit cards, or due to its confined space. When storing other cards with a magnetic strip come heat-sensitive objects in the compart- near the storage tray, as a magnet built ୴ ment, close the air vent ( page 192) into the tray could erase or change the while heating the passenger compart- information on the card. ment.

1 Button to open storage compartment (except S 55 AMG) ! Do not obstruct the air vent in the stor- 2 Button to open storage tray age compartment.

233 Controls in detail Useful features

Compartment for glasses Telephone holder* Storage compartments in the rear passenger compartment The compartment for glasses is located un- The telephone holder is located under the der the armrest in the center console. armrest in the center console. Armrest with integrated storage compartment

1 Compartment for glasses 1 Telephone holder Rear armrest Opening compartment for glasses Opening telephone holder 1 2 Lid handle ̈ Fold the right side of the armrest up- ̈ Fold the right side of the armrest up- Opening the storage compartment: wards. wards. ̈ Pull down the armrest by its strap. ̈ Press handle 2 and lift lid. ! Before storing the armrest in the backrest, close the storage compartment lid.

234 Controls in detail Useful features

Storage compartment between rear Storage compartment in rear shelf* Storage compartments under the front seats* seats

1 Rear shelf compartment 1 Cover 1 Lid Opening 2 Buttons Opening ̈ Lift the lid using the handle in the front. Opening ̈ Slide cover 1 rearward. ̈ Press buttons 2 together and fold Closing lid 1 down. ̈ Slide cover forward. 1 Closing ̈ Close lid 1 until both buttons 2 of lock engage.

235 Controls in detail Useful features

Cup holder in front of seat armrest Folding out cup holder Folding in cup holder The cup holder is located in the storage Warning! G compartment in front of the armrest.

When not in use, keep the cup holder closed while traveling. Place only containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers. 1 Cup holder ̈ ! Swing cup holder 1 back and press it Button for folding out the cup holder into the storage compartment until it Only place containers with a maximum 1 engages. diameter of 2 ¾ in (72 mm) in the cup ̈ Open the storage compartment in front holder. Larger containers could dam- of armrest (୴ page 232). age the holder arm. ̈ Push button 1. The cup holder opens automatically.

236 Controls in detail Useful features

Cup holder in rear seat armrest Parcel net in front passenger footwell A small convenience parcel net is located Warning! G in the front passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such as road maps, When not in use, keep the cup holder mail, etc. closed. Place only containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on Warning! G open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob- liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu- Compartment for cup holder jects having sharp edges, in the parcel net. vers. 1 In an accident, during hard braking, or sud- Opening cup holder den maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to ̈ Push front of sliding compartment 1. vehicle occupants. The cup holder slides out.

Closing cup holder ̈ Push sliding compartment 1 back until it engages.

237 Controls in detail Useful features

Parcel net in trunk Ashtrays Removing ashtray insert You can hang a parcel net in the trunk. The hooks and the parcel net in the trunk can Center console ashtray Warning! G hold a load of up to 29.8 lbs (13.5 kg). Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position N. With gear selector lever in position N turn off the engine.

̈ Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. Move the gear selector lever to position N. Cover plate 1 Now you have more room to take out Hook Button for disengaging ashtray 1 2 the insert. ̈ Hang the parcel net on hooks on the 1 ̈ Push sliding button to the right. left and right sides of the trunk. Opening ashtray 2 ̈ Briefly touch cover plate 1. The ashtray is disengaged and slides ! out a short way. The parcel net cannot protect or suffi- The ashtray opens automatically. ̈ Remove insert from ashtray frame. ciently secure goods in the event of an accident. Reinstalling the ashtray insert ̈ Install insert by pushing it back into the frame until it engages.

238 Controls in detail Useful features

Rear door ashtray Cigarette lighters Warning! G

Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- Opening ashtray Center console cigarette lighter 1 cle equipment may cause an accident ̈ Lightly touch the back of the ashtray. ̈ Make sure the ignition is switched on. and/or serious personal injury. All the lamps in the instrument cluster Removing ashtray insert should come on. i ̈ Pull the ashtray back slightly and re- ̈ Push in cigarette lighter 1. The lighter socket can be used to ac- move the insert (see arrows). commodate electrical accessories up The lighter will pop out automatically to a maximum 85 W. Reinstalling the ashtray insert when hot. ̈ Position the insert and press down while sliding forward.

239 Controls in detail Useful features

Heated steering wheel* Warning! G The steering wheel heating warms up the Never touch the heating element or sides of leather area of the steering wheel. the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the The stalk with the heated steering wheel knob only. swith is on the lower left-hand side of the To avoid possible injury to children sitting in steering wheel. the rear seat, deactivate the operation of the rear door windows, see (୴ page 74). De- activation of the rear windows also deacti- 1 Rear door lighters vates the lighters. ̈ Make sure the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take the All the lamps in the instrument cluster SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and should come on. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- ̈ Lightly touch the back of the ashtray to attended in the vehicle, or with access to an open it (୴ page 239). unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident Switching on ̈ Push in cigarette lighter 1. 1 and/or serious personal injury. 2 Indicator lamp The lighter will pop out automatically 3 Switching off when hot.

i Operation of the rear door lighters is only possible, if the override switch (୴ page 74) is deactivated.

240 Controls in detail Useful features

Switching on Telephone* Warning! G ̈ Switch on ignition. All the lamps in the instrument cluster Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary re- should come on. sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be ̈ Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the di- Never operate radio transmitters equipped his/her primary focus when driving. For rection of arrow . with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- 1 out being connected to an external antenna) your safety and the safety of others, we rec- The steering wheel is heated. Indicator from inside the vehicle while the engine is ommend that you pull over to a safe location lamp 2 comes on. running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- and stop before placing or taking a tele- tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- phone call. Switching off sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious If you choose to use the telephone1 while ̈ Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc- personal injury. driving, please use the hands-free device tion of arrow 3. and only use the telephone when road, The steering wheel heating is turned Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- weather and traffic conditions permit. Some phone or a citizens band unit, should only jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. be used inside the vehicle if they are con- cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. i nected to an antenna that is installed on Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man- The steering wheel heating does not the outside of the vehicle. agement and Data System)1 if road, weather turn off automatically. The external antenna must be approved by and traffic conditions permit. ୴୴ Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho- 1 Observe all legal requirements. rized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.

241 Controls in detail Useful features

୴୴ Tele Aid The Tele Aid system Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is (Telematic Alarm Identification on De- covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- ! mand) The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys- ly 14 m) every second. The Tele Aid system consists of three tem may only be performed by com- types of response: You can take and place telephone calls us- pleting the subscriber agreement and ț ing the s and t buttons on the placing an acquaintance call using the automatic and manual emergency steering wheel. To carry out other tele- SOS button. Failure to complete either ț roadside assistance, and phone functions, use the control system of these steps will result in a system ț information (୴ page 134). that is not activated. If the system is not activated, the indicator lamp in the The Tele Aid system is operational provid- See separate operating manual for instruc- SOS button stays on after turning the ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, tions on how to use the telephone. SmartKey in starter switch to properly connected, not damaged and cel- position 2, or pressing the lular and GPS coverage is available. KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can to position 2 . The message TELE AID – be adjusted when using the volume control NOT ACTIVATED will be shown in the on the multifunction steering wheel. To multifunction display for approximately raise, press button æ and to lower, ten seconds. press button ç. If you have any questions regarding ac- ̈ To activate, press the SOS button, the tivation, please call the Response Cen- Roadside Assistance button • or ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or the Information button ¡, depend- 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). ing on the type of response required.

242 Controls in detail Useful features

i System self-check Warning! G The SOS button is located above the in- Initially, after turning the ignition on, mal- terior rear view mirror. functions are detected and indicated (the If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in The Roadside Assistance button • indicator lamps in the SOS button, the the Roadside Assistance button and/or in • and the Information button ¡ are Roadside Assistance button and the the Information button do not come on dur- ¡ located below the center armrest cov- Information button stay on longer ing the system self-check, or if any of these er. than ten seconds or do not come on). The indicators remain illuminated continuously TELE AID – DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! message in red and/or the message TELE AID – appears for approximately ten seconds in Shortly after the completion of your Tele DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! is displayed in the the multifunction display. Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has user ID and password via first call mail. By i visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting been detected. The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular “Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access network for communication and the If a malfunction is indicated as outlined to account information, remote door un- GPS (Global Positioning System) satel- above, the system may not operate as ex- lock, and more. lites for vehicle location. If either of pected. Have the system checked at the these signals are unavailable, the Tele nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as i Aid system may not function and if this possible. The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular occurs, assistance must be summoned network for communication and the by other means. GPS (Global Positioning System) satel- lites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.

243 Controls in detail Useful features

Emergency calls Once the emergency call is in progress, the The Tele Aid system is available if indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin An emergency call is initiated automatical- ț it has been activated and is operation- to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL – ly: al. Activation requires a subscription CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunc- for monitoring services, connection, ț following an accident in which the tion display. When the connection is estab- and cellular air time emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) lished, the message EMERGENCY CALL – or airbags deploy CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc- ț the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass ț if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away tion display. All information relevant to the the information on to the Response alarm stays on for more than emergency, such as the location of the ve- Center 20 seconds, see “Anti-theft alarm sys- hicle (determined by the GPS satellite loca- tem” (୴ page 83) and tow-away alarm tion system), vehicle model, identification (୴ page 85) number and color are generated. i Location of the vehicle on a map is only An emergency call can also be initiated A voice connection between the Response possible if the vehicle is able to receive manually by opening the cover next to the Center and the occupants of the vehicle signals from the GPS satellite network interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then will be established automatically soon af- and pass the information on to the Re- briefly pressing the button located under ter the emergency call has been initiated. sponse Center. the cover. When a voice connection is established, the audio system mutes and the message For more information, see “Initiating an TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE ap- ୴ emergency call manually” ( page 245). pears in the multifunction display. The Re- sponse Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.

244 Controls in detail Useful features

Initiating an emergency call manually ̈ Wait for a voice connection to the Warning! G Response Center. ̈ If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il- Close cover 2 after the emergency luminated continuously and there was no call is concluded. voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could Warning! G not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the The message EMERGENCY CALL – vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve- CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction hicle in a dangerous road location), please display for approximately ten seconds. do not wait for voice contact after you have 1 SOS button pressed the emergency button. Carefully Should this occur, assistance must be sum- 2 Cover moned by other means. leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca- ̈ Briefly press on the cover 2. tion. The Response Center will automatically The cover will open. contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they re- ̈ Press SOS button briefly. 1 ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot The indicator lamp in SOS button 1 make voice contact with the vehicle occu- will flash until the emergency call is pants. concluded.

245 Controls in detail Useful features

Roadside Assistance button • A voice connection between the Roadside These programs are only available in the Assistance dispatcher and the occupants USA: The Roadside Assistance button • is of the vehicle will be established. When a located below the center armrest cover. ț Sign and Drive services: Services such voice connection is established, the audio as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or ̈ Press and hold the button • (for system mutes and the message TELE AID the replacement of a flat tire with the longer than two seconds). – ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE ap- vehicle spare tire are obtainable. A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As- pears in the multifunction display. ț Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This func- sistance dispatcher will be initiated. ̈ Describe the nature of the need for as- tion permits the Mercedes-Benz Road- The button will flash while the call is in sistance. side Assistance dispatcher to progress. The message ROADSIDE AS- The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance download malfunction codes and actu- SISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL will ap- dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified al vehicle data. pear in the multifunction display. Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to When the connection is established, the tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized i message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such The indicator lamp in the Roadside As- CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc- as labor and/or towing, charges may ap- sistance button • remains illumi- tion display. The Tele Aid system will trans- ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Man- nated in red for approximately mit data generating the vehicle ual for more information. ten seconds during the system identification number, model, color and lo- self-check after turning the ignition on cation (subject to availability of cellular (together with the SOS button and the and GPS signals). Information button ¡).

246 Controls in detail Useful features

See system self-check (୴ page 243) Information button ¡ A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the when the indicator lamp does not come The Information button ¡ is located be- occupants of the vehicle will be estab- on in red or stays on longer than ap- low the center armrest cover. proximately ten seconds. lished. When a voice connection is estab- ̈ Press and hold the button ¡ (for lished, the audio system mutes and the If the indicator lamp in the Roadside longer than two seconds). message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE Assistance button • is continuous- appears in the multifunction display. ly illuminated and no voice connection A call to the Customer Assistance Cen- to the Response Center was estab- ter will be initiated. The button will Information regarding the operation of lished, the Tele Aid system could not flash while the call is in progress. The your vehicle, the nearest authorized initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz the relevant cellular phone network is appear in the multifunction display. USA products and services is available to not available). The message ROADSIDE When the connection is established, the you. ASSISTANCE – CALL FAILED appears in message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears For more details concerning the Tele Aid the multifunction display. in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system, please visit www.mbusa.com and Roadside Assistance calls can be ter- system will transmit data generating the use your ID and password (sent to you sep- minated using the tbutton on the vehicle identification number, model, color arately) to learn more (USA only). multifunction steering wheel. and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

247 Controls in detail Useful features

i Information calls can be terminated us- Upgrade Signals t The indicator lamp on the Information ing the button on the multifunc- The Tele Aid system processes calls using button ¡ remains illuminated in red tion steering wheel. the following priority: for approximately ten seconds during ț Automatic emergency – First priority the system self-check after turning the ! ignition on (together with the SOS but- If the indicator lamps do not start flash- ț Manual emergency – Second priority ton and the Roadside Assistance ing after pressing one of the buttons or ț Roadside Assistance – Third priority button •). remain illuminated (in red) at any time, ț Information – Fourth priority See System self-check (୴ page 243) the Tele Aid system has detected a when the indicator lamp does not come fault or the service is not currently ac- Should a higher priority call be initiated on in red or stays on longer than ap- tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit an while you are connected, an upgrade (al- proximately ten seconds. Mercedes-Benz Center and have the ternating) tone will be heard, and the ap- system checked or contact the Re- propriate indicator lamp will flash. If If the indicator lamp in the Information sponse Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in certain information such as vehicle identi- ¡ button is illuminated continuous- the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Cana- fication number or customer information is ly and no voice connection to the Re- da) as soon as possible. not available, the operator may need to response Center was established, then transmit. the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant During this time you will hear a beep and cellular phone network is not avail- voice contact will be interrupted. Voice able). The message INFO – contact will resume once the retransmis- CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc- sion is completed. Once a call is conclud- tion display. ed, a beep will be heard and the respective indicator lamp will stop flashing. The COMAND system operation will resume.

248 Controls in detail Useful features

! i Remote door unlock If the indicator lamp continues to flash When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, In case you have locked your vehicle unin- or the system does not reset, contact the COMAND system audio is muted tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), the Response Center at and the selected mode (radio, tape or and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or CD) pauses. The optional cellular ̈ Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or phone (if installed) switches off. If you Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance must use this phone, the vehicle must or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus- and place the call. The COMAND navi- You will be asked to provide your pass- tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in gation system (if engaged) will contin- word which you provided when you Canada. ue to run. The display in the instrument completed the subscriber agreement. cluster is available for use, and spoken ̈ Then return to your vehicle and press i commands are only available by press- the trunk lid button for a minimum of ing the RPT button on the COMAND The indicator lamp in the respective 20 seconds until the SOS button is unit. A pop-up window will appear in button flashes until the call is conclud- flashing. the COMAND display to indicate that a ed. Calls can only be terminated by a Tele Aid call is in progress. The message EMERGENCY CALL – Response Center or Customer Assis- CALL CONNECTED appears in the multi- tance Center representative except function display. Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi- pressing button ton the multifunc- cle via Internet using the ID and password tion steering wheel. sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call.

249 Controls in detail Useful features

The Response Center will then unlock your Stolen vehicle tracking services Garage door opener vehicle with the remote door unlocking In the event your vehicle was stolen: feature. The built-in remote control is capable of ̈ Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled i The police will issue a numbered inci- devices, for example garage door openers, The remote door unlock feature is avail- dent report. gate openers, or other devices compatible able if the relevant cellular phone net- with HomeLink® or some other systems. work is available. ̈ Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response Center along You can program the signal transmitter The SOS button will flash and the mes- with your password issued to you when buttons. sage EMERGENCY CALL – you subscribed to the service. CALL CONNECTED will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of The Response Center will then attempt the door unlock command. to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is lo- Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Re- cated, the Response Center will con- sponse Center specialist will attempt tact the local law enforcement and you. to establish voice contact with the ve- The vehicle’s location will only be pro- hicle occupants. vided to law enforcement. If the trunk lid button was pressed for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pressing the trunk lid button again.

250 Controls in detail Useful features

i Warning! G Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated Before programming the integrated remote opener. If you should experience diffi- control to a garage door opener or gate op- culties with programming the transmit- erator, make sure that people and objects ter, contact an authorized are out of the way of the device to prevent Mercedes-Benz Center, or call potential harm or damage. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance When programming a garage door opener, Center (in the USA only) at the door moves up or down. When program- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Remote control integrated into the interior ming a gate operator, the gate opens or rear view mirror Service (in Canada) at closes. 1-800-387-0100. Indicator lamp 1 Do not use the integrated remote control 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by 5 Hand-held transmitter button U.S. federal safety standards (this includes 6 Hand-held remote control trans- any garage door opener model manufac- mitter (not part of the vehicle tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door equipment) that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.

251 Controls in detail Useful features

i Programming or reprogramming the in- Step 3: tegrated remote control For operation in the USA only: ̈ Hold the end of the hand-held remote This device complies with Part 15 of Step 1: control transmitter 6 of the device the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to you wish to train approximately 2 to ̈ Switch on ignition. the following two conditions: 5 in (5 cm to 12 cm) away from the sur- Step 2: ț This device may not cause harmful face of the integrated remote control interference, and ̈ If you have previously programmed an located on the interior rear view mirror, integrated signal transmitter button keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view. ț this device must accept any inter- and wish to retain its programming, ference received, including interfer- Step 4: proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press ence that may cause undesired ̈ and hold the two outer signal transmit- Using both hands, simultaneously operation. press the hand-held transmitter ter buttons 2 and 4 and release Any unauthorized modification to this them only when the indicator lamp be- button 5 and the desired integrated device could void the user’s authority gins to flash after approximately signal transmitter button (2, 3 to operate the equipment. 20 seconds (do not hold the button for or 4). Do not release the buttons until longer than 30 seconds). This proce- completing step 5. dure erases any previous settings for The indicator lamp 1 on the integrat- all three channels and initializes the ed remote control will flash, first slowly memory. If you later wish to program a and then rapidly. second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3.

252 Controls in detail Useful features

i i Step 8: The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly ̈ Locate “training” button on the garage time the signal transmitter button is for about two seconds and then turns door opener motor head unit. programmed. If this button has already to a constant light, continue with pro- Exact location and color of the button been programmed, the indicator lamp gramming steps 8 through 12 as your may vary by garage door opener brand. will only start flashing after 20 sec- garage door opener may be equipped Depending on manufacturer, the “train- onds. with the “rolling code feature”. ing” button may also be referred to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there is dif- Step 5: Step 7: ficulty locating the transmitting button, ̈ When the indicator lamp 1 flashes ̈ To program the remaining two buttons, refer to the garage door opener opera- rapidly, release both buttons. repeat the steps above starting with tor’s manual. step 3. Step 6: Step 9: ̈ Press and hold the just-trained inte- Rolling code programming ̈ Press “training” button on the garage grated signal transmitter button and door opener motor head unit. To train a garage door opener (or other roll- observe the indicator lamp . 1 ing code devices) with the rolling code fea- The “training light” is activated. If the indicator lamp 1 stays on con- ture, follow these instructions after You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow- stantly, programming is complete and completing the “Programming” portion ing step. your device should activate when the (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second Step 10: integrated signal transmitter button is person may make the following training pressed and released. procedures quicker and easier.) ̈ Firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed integrated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). ୴୴

253 Controls in detail Useful features

୴୴Step 11: Gate operator/Canadian programming Step 4: ̈ Press, hold for two seconds and re- Canadian radio-frequency laws require ̈ Continue to press and hold the inte- lease same button a second time to transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) grated signal transmitter button (2, complete the training process. after several seconds of transmission 3 or 4) while you press and re-press which may not be long enough for the inte- (“cycle”) your hand-held remote con- Some garage door openers (or other rolling grated signal transmitter to pick up the sig- trol transmitter every two seconds code equipped devices) may require you to 6 nal during programming. Similar to this until the frequency signal has been perform this procedure a third time to Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators learned. Upon successful training, the complete the training. are designed to “time-out” in the same indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and Step 12: manner. then rapidly after several seconds. ̈ Confirm the garage door operation by If you live in Canada or if you are having dif- ̈ Proceed with programming step 5 and pressing the programmed integrated ficulties programming a gate operator (re- step 6 to complete. signal transmitter button (2, 3 gardless of where you live) by using the or 4). programming procedures, replace step 4 Step 13: with the following: ̈ To program the remaining two buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

254 Controls in detail Useful features

Operation of integrated remote control Erasing the integrated remote control Reprogramming a single integrated sig- memory nal transmitter button ̈ Switch on ignition. ̈ Switch on ignition. To program a device using a signal trans- ̈ Select and press the appropriate inte- mitter button previously trained, follow grated signal transmitter button ( , ̈ Simultaneously hold down the signal 2 these steps: 3 or 4) to activate the remote con- transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for ap- trolled device. proximately 20 seconds, until the indi- ̈ Press and hold the desired signal trans- The integrated remote control trans- cator lamp flashes rapidly 1. Do not mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not re- mitter continues to send the signal as hold for longer than 30 seconds. lease the button. long as the button is pressed – up to The codes of all three channels are ̈ The indicator lamp will begin to flash af- 20 seconds. erased. ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the integrated signal transmitter button, i proceed with programming starting If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes with step 3. of all three channels.

255 Controls in detail Useful features

Infrared reflecting windshield Your vehicle is equipped with infrared reflecting glass which reduces the amount of radiated heat entering the interior through the windows. The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the transmission of signals through the glass by in-vehicle electronic devices (e.g. electronic toll collection devices). To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle, two infrared transparent areas (1 and 2) are placed in the windshield. 1 Mounting location for electronic toll collection devices (infrared transparent) 2 Infrared transparent area (pass-through for electronic signals) 3 31.5 in (80 cm) 4 19.0 in (48 cm) 5 1.75 in (4.5 cm)

256 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care

257 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ̄ The first 1000 miles (1500 km) In the “Operation” section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle ! tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis- Additional instructions for AMG vehi- ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later cles: on. ț During the first 1000 miles ț Drive your vehicle during the first (1500 km), do not exceed a speed 1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but of 85 mph (140 km/h). moderate vehicle and engine speeds. ț During this period, avoid engine ț During this period, avoid heavy loads speeds above 4500 rpm in each (full throttle driving) and excessive en- gear. 2⁄ gine speeds (no more than 3 of maximum rpm in each gear). All of the above instructions, as may apply ț Avoid accelerating by kick-down. to your vehicle type, also apply when driv- ț Do not attempt to slow the vehicle ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after down by shifting to a lower gear using the engine or the rear differential has been the gear selector lever. replaced. ț Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when i driving at moderate speeds (for hill Always obey applicable speed limits. driving). After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum.

258 Operation Driving instructions ̄ Driving instructions Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating con- Warning! G Warning! G ditions. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob- To save fuel you should: and driving are very dangerous combina- jects stored in this area may impair pedal ț Keep tires at the recommended infla- tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or movement. tion pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions ț Remove unnecessary loads. and judgement. Power assistance ț Remove roof rack when not in use. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink ț Allow engine to warm up under low or take drugs and drive. Warning! G load use. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow With the engine not running, there is no ț Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- anyone to drive who has been drinking or power assistance for the brake and steering eration. taking drugs. systems. In this case, it is important to keep ț Have all maintenance work performed in mind that a considerably higher degree of at the intervals specified in the Service effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- Booklet and as required by the FSS. hicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips, and in hilly country.

259 Operation Driving instructions

Brakes To help prevent brake disk corrosion after If the parking brake is released and the driving on wet road surfaces (particularly brake warning lamp in the instrument clus- salted roads), it is advisable to brake the ter stays on, the brake fluid level in the res- Warning! G vehicle with considerable force prior to ervoir is too low. parking. The heat generated serves to dry Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may After driving in heavy rain for some time the brakes. be the reason for low brake fluid in the res- without applying the brakes or through wa- If your brake system is normally only sub- ervoir. ter deep enough to wet brake components, jected to moderate loads, you should occa- the first braking action may be somewhat Have the brake system inspected immedi- sionally test the effectiveness of the reduced and increased pedal pressure may ately. Contact an authorized brakes by applying above-normal braking be necessary to obtain expected braking ef- Mercedes-Benz Center. pressure at higher speeds. This will also fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles enhance the grip of the brake pads. All checks and service work on the brake in front. system should be carried out by qualified Resting your foot on the brake pedal will ! technicians only. Contact an authorized cause excessive and premature wear of the Be very careful not to endanger other Mercedes-Benz Center. brake pads. road users when you apply the brakes. Only install brake pads and brake fluid It can also result in the brakes overheating, Refer to the description of the Brake recommended by Mercedes-Benz. thereby significantly reducing their effec- Assist System (BAS) (୴ page 78). tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.

260 Operation Driving instructions

Driving off Parking Warning! G Apply the brakes to test them briefly after If other than recommended brake pads are driving off. Perform this procedure only Warning! G installed, or other than recommended brake when the road is clear of other traffic. fluid is used, the braking properties of the Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not vehicle can be degraded to an extent that bustible materials such as grass, hay or place full load on the engine until the oper- safe braking is substantially impaired. This leaves can come into contact with the hot ating temperature has been reached. could result in an accident. exhaust system, as these materials could be When starting off on a slippery surface, do ignited and cause a vehicle fire. not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex- To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re- ! tended period with the ESP switched off. sult of inadvertent vehicle movement, be- When driving down long and steep Doing so may cause serious damage to the fore turning off the engine and leaving the grades, relieve the load on the brakes drive train which is not covered by the vehicle always: by shifting into a lower gear to use the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. engine’s braking power. This helps pre- ț Keep right foot on brake pedal. vent overheating of the brakes and re- ! ț Firmly depress parking brake pedal. duces brake pad wear. Simultaneously depressing the acceler- ț Move the gear selector lever to ator pedal and applying the brake reposition P. After hard braking, it is advisable to drive duces engine performance and causes ț on for some time, rather than immediately premature brake and drivetrain wear. Slowly release brake pedal. parking, so that the air stream can cool ț When parked on an incline, turn front down the brakes faster. wheel towards the road curb. ୴୴

261 Operation Driving instructions

୴୴ Tires The tread wear indicator appears as a solid ț Turn the SmartKey to starter switch position 0 and remove, or press band across the tread. KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button. Warning! G ț Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with Warning! G KEYLESS-GO with you and lock vehicle * If you feel a sudden significant vibration or when leaving. Although the applicable federal motor vehi- ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi- cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, when the tread wear indicators (TWI) be- ! you should turn on the hazard warning flash- come visible at approximately 1⁄ in Set the parking brake whenever park- ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau- 16 (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al- ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition, tion to an area which is a safe distance from low your tires to wear down to that level. As move gear selector lever to position P. the road. 1⁄ tread depth approaches 8 in (3 mm), the When parking on hills, always turn front Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody wheels towards the road curb. adhesion properties on a wet road are for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires sharply reduced. appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Depending upon the weather and/or road Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for re- surface (conditions), the tire traction varies pairs. widely.

Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by Specified tire pressures must be main- law. These indicators are located in six tained. This applies particularly if the tires places on the tread circumference and be- are subject to extreme operating condi- come visible at a tread depth of approxi- tions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high mately 1⁄ in (1.6 mm), at which point the 16 ambient temperatures). tire is considered worn and should be replaced.

262 Operation Driving instructions

Tire traction considerably greater than when the road is Warning! G not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap- The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or propriate caution. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects icy road is always lower than on a dry road. the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You You should pay particular attention to the Tire speed rating may lose control of the vehicle. Continued condition of the road whenever the outside driving with a flat tire or driving at high temperatures are close to the freezing Regardless of the tire rating, local speed speed with a flat tire will cause excessive point. limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driv- heat build-up and possibly a fire. ing speeds appropriate to prevailing condi- G tions. Hydroplaning Warning! Warning! G Depending on the depth of the water layer If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even Even when permitted by law, never operate weather conditions, drive, steer and brake at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi- with extreme caution. vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the mum speed rating of the tires. road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated Exceeding the maximum speed for which radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail- 1⁄ ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos- of approximately 6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious normal balanced handling characteristics. personal injury and possible death, for you On packed snow, they can reduce your and for others. stopping distance in compared to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still

263 Operation Driving instructions

S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500, and S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500, Winter driving instructions S 500 4MATIC S 500 4MATIC, and S 600 with Sport Package* or Appearance The most important rule for slippery or icy Your vehicle is factory equipped with Package* roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid “H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating abrupt acceleration, braking and steering of 130 mph (210 km/h). Your vehicle is factory equipped with maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating An electronic speed limiter prevents your system under such conditions. of 186 mph (300 km/h). vehicle from exceeding a speed of When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, 130 mph (210 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your move gear selector lever to position N. Try vehicle from exceeding a speed of to keep the vehicle under control by cor- S 600 130 mph (210 km/h). rective steering action. Your vehicle is factory equipped with S55AMG “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating i of 186 mph (300 km/h). Your vehicle is factory equipped with For information on driving with snow “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating chains, see “Snow chains” An electronic speed limiter prevents your of 186 mph (300 km/h). (୴ page 293). vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of G 155 mph (250 km/h). Warning!

i On slippery road surfaces, never downshift For information on speed rating for win- in order to obtain braking action. This could ter tires, see “Winter tires” result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- (୴ page 292). cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.

264 Operation Driving instructions

Road salts and chemicals can adversely af- Standing water fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal Warning! G force may become necessary to produce If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make ! the normal braking effect. Do not drive through flooded areas or sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust water of unknown depth. Before driving Depressing the brake pedal periodically pipe and from around the vehicle with the through water, determine its depth. when traveling at length on salt-strewn engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon Never accelerate before driving into roads can bring road-salt impaired braking monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in- water. The bow wave could force water efficiency back to normal. terior resulting in unconsciousness and into the engine and auxiliary equip- If the vehicle is parked after being driven death. ment, thus damaging them. on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien- To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, cy should be tested as soon as possible af- open a window slightly on the side of the ve- If you must drive through standing water driving is resumed. hicle not facing the wind. ter, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in Warning! G these areas could cause damage to Warning! G electrical components or wiring of the Make sure not to endager any other road us- engine or transmission, or could result ers when carrying out these braking maneu- The outside temperature indicator is not de- in water being ingested by the engine vers. signed to serve as an ice-warning device and through the air intake causing severe is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In- internal engine damage. Any such dam- dicated temperatures just above the freez- age is not covered by the ing point do not guarantee that the road Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. surface is free of ice.

For more information on winter driving, see “Winter driving” (୴ page 292).

265 Operation Driving instructions

Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio trans- Telephones and two-way radios mitters Warning! G Warning! G COMAND*, radio, and telephone* Never operate radio transmitters equipped Always fasten items being carried as secure- with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- ly as possible. Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna) In an accident, during hard braking or sud- from inside the vehicle while the engine is Please do not forget that your primary re- den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. around inside the vehicle, and cause injury tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man- to vehicle occupants unless the items are sibly resulting in an accident and/or agement and Data System), radio, or tele- securely fastened in the vehicle. personal injury. phone1 if road, weather and traffic The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob- conditions permit. jects. Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph phone or a citizens band unit should only (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is be used inside the vehicle if they are con- Driving abroad covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- nected to an antenna that is installed on ly 14 m) every second. Abroad, there is an extensive the outside of the vehicle. 1 Mercedes-Benz service network at your Observe all legal requirements. Refer to the radio transmitter operation in- disposal. If you plan to drive into areas structions regarding use of an external an- which are not listed in the index of your tenna. Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

266 Operation Driving instructions

Catalytic converter Emission control Warning! G Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with Certain systems of the engine serve to monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- keep the toxic components of the exhaust important element in conjunction with the erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- gases within permissible limits required by oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con- ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves law. can come into contact with the hot exhaust trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis- These systems, of course, will function system, as these materials could be ignited sions. Keep your vehicle in proper properly only when maintained strictly ac- and cause a vehicle fire. operating condition by following our rec- cording to factory specifications. Any ad- ommended maintenance instructions as justments on the engine should, therefore, outlined in your Service Booklet. be carried out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni- ! cians. To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, only use premium unleaded Engine adjustments should not be altered gasoline in this vehicle. in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly accord- Any noticeable irregularities in engine ing to Mercedes-Benz servicing require- operation should be repaired promptly. ments. For details refer to the Service Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel Booklet. may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and start a fire.

267 Operation Driving instructions

Coolant temperature Warning! G Warning! G During severe operating conditions, Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem- ț Driving when your engine is badly over- your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon perature may rise close to approximately heated can cause some fluids, which monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon- 248°F (120°C). may have leaked into the engine com- sciousness and lead to death. partment, to catch fire. You could be se- The engine should not be operated with riously burned. Do not run the engine in confined areas the coolant temperature over 248°F ț Steam from an overheated engine can (such as a garage) which are not properly (120°C). Doing so may cause serious en- cause serious burns and can occur just ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas gine damage which is not covered by the by opening the hood. Stay away from fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the engine if you see or hear steam com- have the cause determined and corrected ing from it. immediately. If you must drive under these Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle conditions, drive only with at least one win- and do not stand near the vehicle until the dow fully open at all times. engine has cooled down.

268 Operation At the gas station ̄ At the gas station Refueling The fuel filler flap is located on the open, starter switch is now in right-hand side of the vehicle towards the position 0, same as SmartKey re- rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with moved from starter switch). Warning! G the SmartKey or the SmartKey with ̈ Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/un- the point indicated by the arrow. Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. locks the fuel filler flap. It burns violently and can cause serious The fuel filler flap springs open. injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, ̈ Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extin- to it until possible pressure is released. guish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near ̈ Take off the cap and set it in the recess gasoline! on the fuel filler flap. To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit. ̈ Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle ̈ Turn the engine off unit cuts out – do not top up or over- ț by turning the SmartKey to fill. ୴୴ position 0. Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. ț by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button. Open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door

269 Operation At the gas station

୴୴ i Check regularly and before a long trip Warning! G Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres- of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). sure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray Information on gasoline quality can back out when removing the fuel pump noz- normally be found on the fuel pump. zle, which could cause personal injury. More information on gasoline can be found in the Factory Approved Service ̈ Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the Products pamphlet. right.

You will hear when the fuel cap is tight- i 1 Windshield washer and headlamp ened. Leaving the engine running and the fuel cleaning system* ? ̈ Close the fuel filler flap. cap open can cause the malfunc- 2 Coolant level tion indicator lamp to illuminate. 3 Brake fluid For more information, see the “Practi- i cal hints” section (୴ page 306). Opening the hood, see (୴ page 272).

270 Operation At the gas station

Windshield washer system and head- Brake fluid Engine oil level lamp cleaning system* For more information on engine oil, see ! For more information on refilling the wash- “Engine oil” (୴ page 273). If you find that the brake fluid in the er reservoir, see “Windshield washer sys- brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the tem and headlamp cleaning system*” Vehicle lighting minimum mark or below, have the (୴ page 281). brake system checked for brake pad Check function and cleanliness. For more thickness and leaks immediately. information on replacing light bulbs, see Coolant Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz “Replacing bulbs” (୴ page 353). For more information on coolant, see Center immediately. Do not add brake For more information, see “Switching on “Coolant” (୴ page 278) and see “Fuels, fluid as this will not solve the problem. headlamps” (୴ page 47). coolants, lubricants, etc.” (୴ page 391). For more information, see “Practical ୴ hints” ( page 305). Tire inflation pressure

For information on brake fluid, see “Brake For information on tire inflation pressure, fluid” (୴ page 394) see “Checking tire inflation pressure” (୴ page 283).

271 Operation Engine compartment ̄ Engine compartment Hood ̈ Pull release lever 1 in direction of ar- ̈ Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator row. grille. The hood is unlocked and handle ̈ Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on Warning! G 2 will extend out of the radiator grille. the handle) and then release it. Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- The hood will be automatically held ! cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could open at shoulder height by gas-filled To avoid damage to the windshield wip- be forced open by passing air flow. struts. ers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away Opening from the windshield. Warning! G The hood lock release lever is located in the driver’s footwell to the left of the park- To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of ing brake pedal. moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades. 2 Handle for opening the hood

1 Release lever

272 Operation Engine compartment

Closing Engine oil Warning! G The amount of oil your engine needs will Warning! G If you see flames or smoke coming from the depend on a number of factors, including engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- driving style. Higher oil consumption can Be careful that you do not close the hood on perature gauge indicates that the engine is occur when anyone. overheated, do not open the hood. Move ț the vehicle is new away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down. If neces- ̈ Let the hood drop from a height of ap- ț the vehicle is driven frequently at sary, call the fire department. proximately 1 ft. (30 cm). higher engine speeds The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only ̈ Check to make sure the hood is fully be made after the vehicle break-in period. Warning! G closed. i The engine is equipped with a transistorized If you can raise the hood at a point Do not use any special lubricant addi- ignition system. Because of the high voltage above the headlamps, then it is not tives, as these may damage the drive it is dangerous to touch any components (ig- properly closed. Open it again and let it assemblies. Using special additives not nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic drop with somewhat greater force. approved by Mercedes-Benz will re- socket) of the ignition system strict your warranty entitlement. ț with the engine running More information on this subject is ț while starting the engine available at any Mercedes-Benz ț if ignition is “on” and the engine is Center. cranked manually

273 Operation Engine compartment

Checking the engine oil level with the ț ADD 1.5 QTS. TO control system REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL! When checking the oil level the vehicle (Canada: 1.5 LITERS) must ț ADD 2.0 QTS. ț be parked on level ground TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL! ț be at normal operating temperature After about three seconds this mes- (Canada: 2.0 LITERS) ț have been stationary for at least five sage is displayed: minutes with the engine turned off i ENGINE OIL LEVEL If you want to interrupt the checking To check the engine oil level via the multi- MEASURING NOW! procedure, press the k or j function display, do the following: One of the following messages will sub- button on the multifunction steering ̈ Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch sequently appear in the indicator: wheel. to position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO ț ENGINE OIL LEVEL ̈ start/stop button* twice. OK If necessary, add engine oil. ୴ For adding engine oil see (୴ page 277). The standard display ( page 139) should ț ADD 1.0 QT. TO appear in the multifunction display. REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL! For more information on engine oil, see ̈ k j the “Technical data” section (୴ page 391) Press button or on the (Canada: 1.0 LITER) steering wheel until the following mes- and (୴ page 393). sage is seen in the multifunction display:

CORRECT MEASUREMENT ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL

274 Operation Engine compartment

Other display messages If you see the message: ! If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO start/stop ENGINE OIL LEVEL Excess oil must be siphoned or drained button* is not in position 2, the following NOT WHEN ENGINE ON! off. It could cause damage to the en- message will appear: gine and catalytic converter not cov- ̈ Turn off the engine. ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL ̈ If the engine is at normal operating Warranty. IGNITION ON! temperature, wait five minutes before ̈ Switch on ignition. checking oil. i If you see the message: ̈ If the engine is not yet at normal oper- Perform the engine oil level check with ating temperature, you must wait PERF. SERV. ON TIME the dipstick (S 430, S 500, and 30 minutes before checking oil. S 55 AMG only) if it cannot be complet- ̈ If engine is at normal operating If there is excess engine oil with the engine ed with the control system . temperature, wait five minutes before at normal operating temperature, the fol- repeating check procedure. In this case we recommend that you lowing message will appear: have the system checked at a ̈ If engine is not yet at normal operating Mercedes-Benz Center. temperature, wait 30 minutes before ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL repeating check procedure. For more information on messages in the ̈ Have excess oil siphoned or drained display concerning engine oil , see the off. Contact an authorized “Practical hints” section (୴ page 326). Mercedes-Benz Center.

275 Operation Engine compartment

Checking the engine oil level with the ̈ Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dip- i oil dipstick (S 430, S 500, and stick guide tube. The filling quantity between the upper S55AMG only) ̈ Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after ap- and lower marks on the oil dipstick is When checking the oil level the vehicle proximately three seconds to obtain approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). must accurate reading. ̈ ț be parked on level ground If necessary, add engine oil. ୴ ț be at normal operating temperature For adding engine oil see ( page 277). ț have been stationary for at least five For more information on engine, see the ୴ minutes with the engine turned off “Technical data” section ( page 391) and (୴ page 393). i For more information on messages in the The engine oil level can be checked by display concerning engine oil, see the either the oil dipstick or via the multi- “Practical hints” section (୴ page 326). function display in the instrument cluster (୴ page 274). The amount of engine Oil dipstick oil needed is shown more precisely in The oil level is correct when it is between the multifunction display. the lower (min) and upper (max) mark of the oil dipstick. To check the engine oil level with the oil dipstick, do the following: ̈ Open the hood (୴ page 272). ̈ Pull out oil dipstick 1 (୴ page 277). ̈ Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.

276 Operation Engine compartment

Adding engine oil ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained ! off. It could cause damage to the en- Only use approved engine oils. For a gine and catalytic converter not cov- listing of approved engine oils, refer to ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited the Factory Approved Service Products Warranty. pamphlet in your vehicle literature port- folio. ̈ Screw filler cap 2 back on filler neck. In addition, check the oil filler cap for important information pertaining to the engine oil needing to meet a specific S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500, S 500 4MATIC, and S 55 AMG Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is 1 Oil dipstick (S 430, S 500, and printed on the oil filler cap, only use an S 55 AMG only) engine oil from the list of approved en- 2 Filler cap gine oils in the Factory Approved Ser- ̈ Unscrew filler cap 2 from filler neck. vice Products pamphlet that meets the ̈ specification indicated on the oil filler Add engine oil as required. Be careful not to overfill with oil. cap. S 600 Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Using engine oils of other specification 1 Filler cap may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter- Avoid environmental damage caused by oil ̈ Unscrew filler cap from filler neck. mine the next service interval and will entering the ground or water. 1 result in engine damage not covered by ̈ Add engine oil as required. Be careful the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. not to overfill with oil. ୴୴

277 Operation Engine compartment

୴୴Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Transmission fluid level Coolant Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water. The transmission fluid level does not need The engine coolant is a mixture of water to be checked. If you notice transmission and anticorrosion/antifreeze. ! fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, When checking the coolant level, Excess oil must be siphoned or drained have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center off. It could cause damage to the en- check the automatic transmission. ț the vehicle must be parked on level gine and catalytic converter not cov- ground, and ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Active Body Control* (ABC*) fluid level ț the engine must be cool. Warranty. Regular fluid level check is not required. If you notice fluid leaks or malfunction mes- ̈ Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck. sages in the multifunction display, have an For more information on engine, see the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check ୴ “Technical data” section ( page 391) and the ABC-system. (୴ page 393).

278 Operation Engine compartment

G The coolant expansion tank is located on ! Warning! the passenger side of the engine compart- S 600: ment. Only open the cap on coolant expan- In order to avoid any possibly serious burns: sion tank 1. Never open the cap be- ț Use extreme caution when opening the tween the charge-air coolers. hood if there are any signs of steam or Otherwise, the engine could be dam- coolant leaking from the cooling system, aged. or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated. The coolant level is correct if the level ț Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if engine temperature is above ț for cold coolant: reaches the black top 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to cool part of the reservoir down before removing cap. The coolant ț for warm coolant: is approximately reservoir contains hot fluid and is under Coolant expansion tank pressure. 1 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher ̈ ț Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx- Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx- ̈ Add coolant as required. 1 imately one half turn to the left to re- imately /2 turn to relieve excess pres- ̈ Replace and tighten cap. sure. If opened immediately, scalding lease any excess pressure. hot fluid and steam will be blown out un- ̈ Continue turning the cap to the left and For more information on coolant, see ୴ der pressure. remove it. “Coolants” ( page 395). ț Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.

279 Operation Engine compartment

Battery Observe all safety instructions Batteries contain materials that can harm G and precautions when handling the environment if disposed of improperly. Your vehicle’s battery is located on the automotive batteries. Recycling of batteries is the preferred right side of the trunk floor (୴ page 366). method of disposal. Many states require Risk of explosion The battery should always be sufficiently A sellers of batteries to accept old batteries charged in order to achieve its rated ser- for recycling. vice life. Refer to Service Booklet for bat- D Keep flames or sparks away tery maintenance intervals. from battery. Do not smoke. If you use your vehicle mostly for short-dis- B Battery acid is caustic. Do not tance trips, you will need to have the bat- allow it to come into contact tery charge checked more frequently. with skin, eyes or clothing. When replacing the battery, always use In case it does, immediately batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. flush affected area with clear water and seek medical help if If you do not intend to operate your vehicle necessary. for an extended period of time, consult an Wear eye protection. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about E steps you need to observe. C Keep children away. Follow the instructions in this F Operator's Manual.

280 Operation Engine compartment

Windshield washer system and During all seasons, add MB Windshield ! headlamp cleaning system* Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix Only use washer fluid which is suitable the windshield washer fluid in a suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer The windshield washer reservoir is located container. fluid can damage the plastic lenses of in the engine compartment. ̈ Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield the headlamps. Washer Concentrate and water (or commercially available premixed wind- i shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de- If the windshield washer system on pending on ambient temperatures). your vehicle is heated*, a fluid mixture Always use washer solvent/antifreeze produced to resist freezing at tempera- where temperatures may fall below tures of approximately 14°F (–10°C) freezing point. Failure to do so could re- should be sufficient. sult in damage to the washer system/reservoir. For more information, see “Windshield and 1 Washer fluid reservoir headlamp washer system” (୴ page 398). Fluid for the windshield washer system and Warning! G the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- has a capacity of approximately: ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite ț 3.2 US qt. (3.0 l) in vehicles without and burn. You could be seriously burned. headlamp cleaning system ț 7.1 US qt. (6.7 l) in vehicles with headlamp cleaning system or heated reservoir

281 Operation Tires and wheels ̄ Tires and wheels See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Important guidelines for information on tested and recommend- Warning! G ed rims and tires for summer and winter ț Only use sets of tires and rims of the operation. They can also offer advice con- Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make. tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have cerning tire service and purchase. ț Tires must be of the correct size for the sustained damage, replace them. rim. When replacing rims, use only genuine Warning! G ț Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the Break in new tires for approximately particular rim type. Failure to do so can re- 60 miles (100 km) at moderate Replace rims or tires with the same designa- speeds. tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an original part. See an authorized accident. ț Regularly check the tires and rims for Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- damage. Dented or bent rims can tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- cause tire pressure loss and damage to mounted: mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous the tire beads. ț The wheel brakes or suspension compo- damage cannot always be recognized on ț If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire nents can be damaged. retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore pressure and correct as required. not assure the operating safety of the vehi- ț The correct operating clearance of the ț Do not allow your tires to wear down cle when such tires are used. wheels and the tires are no longer guar- too far. Adhesion properties on wet anteed. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center roads are sharply reduced at tread 1 for information on tested and recommend- depths under /8 in (3 mm). ed rims and tires for summer and winter ț When replacing individual tires, you operation. should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all around).

282 Operation Tires and wheels

Life of tires Direction of rotation Checking tire inflation pressure

The service life of a tire is dependent upon Unidirectional tires offer added advantag- varying factors including but not limited to: es, such as better hydroplaning perfor- Warning! G mance. To benefit, however, you must ț Driving style make sure the tires rotate in the direction If the tire pressure drops repeatedly: ț Tire pressure specified. ț Check the tires for punctures from ț Distance driven An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in- foreign objects. tended direction of tire rotation. ț Check to see whether air is leaking from Warning! G the valves or from around the rim.

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after Regularly check your tire pressure at inter- six years, regardless of the remaining tread. vals of no more than 14 days. Correct the tire pressure only when tires ! are cold. Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry If the tires are warm, you should only cor- place with as little exposure to light as rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur- possible. Protect tires from contact rent operating conditions. with oil, grease and gasoline. A table on the fuel filler flap lists the specified tire inflation pressures for warm and cold tires as well as for various operating conditions.

283 Operation Tires and wheels

i Check the spare tire periodically for condi- Warning! G The pressures listed for light loads are tion and inflation pressure. Spare tires will minimum values offering high driving age and become worn over time even if Follow recommended tire inflation pres- comfort. never used, and thus should be inspected sures. and replaced when necessary or after a Increased inflation pressures listed for Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires maximum of six years. heavier loads may also be used for light can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- loads. These higher pressures produce cause they are more likely to become punc- favorable handling characteristics. The tured or damaged by road debris, potholes, ride of the vehicle, however, will be etc. somewhat harder. Never exceed the max. values or inflate tires below the Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires min. values listed on the fuel filler flap. wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Tire pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air Do not overload the tires by exceeding the temperature change. Keep this in mind specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat- when checking tire pressure where the ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s temperature is different from the outside door opening). Overloading the tires can temperature. overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Tire temperature and tire pressure also increase while driving, depending on the driving speed and the tire load.

284 Operation Tires and wheels

Checking tire pressure electronically* i Warning! G (vehicles produced up to approximate- Possible differences between the read- ly October 2003) ings of a tire pressure gauge of an air The tire inflation pressure monitor does not hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and indicate a warning for wrongly selected in- i the vehicle’s control system can occur. Check with an authorized flation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation The readings issued by the control sys- Mercedes-Benz Center to determine pressure according to the label on the fuel tem are more precise. the equipment installed in your vehicle. filler flap. ̈ Switch on ignition. The tire inflation pressure monitor is not The tire inflation pressure monitor only able to issue a warning due to a sudden dra- functions on wheels that are equipped with ̈ Press button è or ÿ on the mul- matic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout the proper electronic sensors. It monitors tifunction steering wheel repeatedly caused by a foreign object). In this case the tire inflation pressure, as selected by until the standard display menu ap- bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply- the driver, in all four tires. A warning is is- pears in the multifunction display ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering sued to alert you to a decrease in pressure (୴ page 134). maneuvers. in one or more of the tires. ̈ Press button k or j repeatedly Tire pressure inquiries are made using the until you see the current inflation pres- i ୴ sures for each tire appear in the dis- multifunction display ( page 134). The in- Operating radio transmission equip- play. flation pressures are displayed only after a ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way few minutes travel time. radios) in or near the vehicle could You can select the unit of measure used for cause the tire inflation pressure moni- the tire inflation pressure by changing the tor to malfunction. setting in the control system (୴ page 134).

285 Operation Tires and wheels

Activating the tire inflation pressure ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly Warning! G monitor until you see the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the display Follow recommended tire inflation pres- You must activate the tire inflation pressure monitor in the following cases: or the following message appears in sures. the display ț Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires If you have changed the tire pressure TIRE PRES. can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- ț If you have replaced the wheels or tires DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING cause they are more likely to become punc- A FEW MINS. ț If you have installed new wheels or REACTIVATE USING tured or damaged by road debris, potholes, tires R-BUTTON etc. ̈ Make sure the tire pressure is correctly Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires i wear unevenly, adversely affect handling set. If transporting a deflated road wheel or and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail ̈ è ÿ Press button or on the mul- additional wheel sensors in the vehicle, from being overheated. tifunction steering wheel repeatedly the tire inflation pressure monitor Do not overload the tires by exceeding the until the standard display menu ap- should not be reactivated until the de- specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat- pears in the multifunction display flated wheel or additional wheel sen- ୴ ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s ( page 134). sors have been removed from the door opening). Overloading the tires can vehicle. Otherwise, the deflated wheel overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. or additional sensors could cause the tire inflation pressure monitor system to malfunction.

286 Operation Tires and wheels

̈ Press the reset button on the instru- If you wish to cancel activation: Checking tire pressure electronically* ment cluster (୴ (vehicles produced as of approximately page 22). ̈ Press ç button. October 2003) The following message will appear in If the following message appears in the the multifunction display: multifunction display: i MONITOR CURRENT TIRE PRESSURE REACTIVATE TIRE Check with an authorized ̈ Press æ button. PRES. MONITOR Mercedes-Benz Center to determine The following message will appear in or the equipment installed in your vehicle. the multifunction display: TIRE PRES. CHECK TIRES! TIRE PRESS. CONTROL ACTIVATED! The tire inflation pressure monitor only ̈ functions on wheels that are equipped with The tire inflation pressure monitor will Check the tire inflation pressures and the proper electronic sensors. It monitors now monitor the tire inflation pressure correct them if necessary. the tire inflation pressure, as selected by values of all four tires. ̈ Reactivate the tire inflation pressure the driver, in all four tires. A warning is is- monitor. The following message will appear in sued to alert you to a decrease in pressure the multifunction display: in one or more of the tires. TIRE PRES. You can call up the tire pressure using the DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING control system (୴ page 134). A FEW MINS. REACTIVATE USING R-BUTTON

This display appears until the individual inflation pressure values are matched with the tires. The individual values are then displayed (୴ page 285).

287 Operation Tires and wheels

i ̈ Switch on ignition. Warning! G After you have reactivated the tire ̈ Press button è or ÿ on the mul- pressure monitor, the current tire pres- tifunction steering wheel repeatedly When the tire pressure monitoring system sures will only be shown after a few until the standard display menu ap- warning lamp is lit, one or more of your tires minutes’ driving time. pears in the multifunction display is significantly under-inflated. You should During this time, you will see the follow- ୴ ( page 134). stop and check your tires as soon as possi- ing message in the display: ̈ Press button k or j repeatedly ble, and inflate them to the proper pressure TIRE PRES. DISPLAY until you see the current inflation pres- as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES sures for each tire appear in the dis- placard. Driving on a significantly under-in- play. flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also i reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, Possible differences between the read- and may affect the vehicle’s handling and ings of a tire pressure gauge of an air stopping ability. Each tire, including the hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and spare, should be checked monthly when the vehicle’s control system can occur. cold and set to the recommended inflation The readings issued by the control sys- pressure as specified in the vehicle placard tem are more precise. and owner’s manual.

i The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in the owner’s manual.

288 Operation Tires and wheels

Reactivating the tire pressure monitor Warning! G Warning! G The tire pressure monitor must be reacti- The tire inflation pressure monitor does not Follow recommended tire inflation pres- vated in the following situations: indicate a warning for wrongly selected in- sures. ț If you have changed the tire pressure flation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires ț If you have replaced the wheels or tires pressure according to the label on the fuel can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- ț If you have installed new wheels or filler flap. cause they are more likely to become punc- tires The tire inflation pressure monitor is not tured or damaged by road debris, potholes, able to issue a warning due to a sudden dra- etc. ̈ Using the table on the fuel filler flap, matic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires make sure the tire inflation pressure of caused by a foreign object). In this case wear unevenly, adversely affect handling all four tires is correct. bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply- and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail ̈ Press button j or k repeatedly ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering from being overheated. until you see the current inflation pres- maneuvers. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the sures for each tire appear in the display specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat- or the following message appears in i ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s the display Operating radio transmission equip- door opening). Overloading the tires can TIRE PRES. DISPLAY ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES radios) in or near the vehicle could cause the tire inflation pressure monitor to malfunction.

289 Operation Tires and wheels

æ i ̈ Press button. If you wish to cancel activation: If you are transporting a deflated tire in The following message will appear in ̈ Press ç button. the vehicle, do not activate the tire the multifunction display: If one of the following messages appears in inflation pressure monitor until TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATED the multifunction display: ț the deflated tire is no longer in the The tire inflation pressure monitor will ț TIRE PRES. MONITOR vehicle now monitor the tire inflation pressure REACTIVATE AFTER ț you have inflated the tire to the cor- values of all four tires. CORRECTING PRESSURE! rect pressure Afterward, the following message will ț TIRE PRES. appear in the display: PLEASE CORRECT! ̈ Press the reset button on the instru- TIRE PRES. DISPLAY ment cluster (୴ page 22). APPEARS AFTER ̈ Check the tire inflation pressures and DRIVING A FEW MINUTES correct them if necessary. The following message will appear in the multifunction display: This display appears until the individual ̈ Reactivate the tire inflation pressure CHECK CURRENT TIRE PRES.? inflation pressure values are matched monitor. with the tires. The individual values are then displayed (୴ page 287).

290 Operation Tires and wheels

Rotating wheels ! G Your vehicle is equipped with a tire in- Warning! flation pressure monitor, there are G Have the tightening torque checked after Warning! electronic components built into the changing a wheel. Wheels could become wheel. Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are loose if not tightened with a torque of Do not use mounting tools in the area of the same size. 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). of the valve as they could damage the electronic components. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel On vehicles with the same wheel size all To prevent damage or incorrect instal- bolts specified for your vehicle's rims. around, wheels can be rotated every 3000 lation, have the tires changed at an au- to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For information on wheel change, see the sooner if necessary, according to the de- “Practical hints” section (୴ page 344) and gree of tire wear. The same direction of tire (୴ page 361). rotation must be retained. Rotate the wheels before the characteris- tic tire wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear on front wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels). Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels after each rotation. Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure. If necessary, activate the tire inflation pressure monitor.

291 Operation Winter driving ̄ Winter driving Before the onset of winter, have your vehi- Winter tires Always observe the speed rating of the cle winterized at an authorized winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the Mercedes-Benz Center. This service in- Always use winter tires at temperatures maximum speed for which your tires are cludes: below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry rated is below the speed rating of your ve- road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires hicle, you must place a notice to this effect ț Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze is the only way to achieve the maximum ef- where it will be seen by the driver. Such no- concentration. fectiveness of the ABS, ESP, and 4MATIC tices are available at your tire dealer or any ț Addition of cleaning concentrate to the in winter operation. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. water of the windshield and headlamp For safe handling, make sure that all cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate mounted winter tires are of the same make G “S” to a premixed windshield washer Warning! and have the same tread design. solvent/antifreeze which is formulated If you use your spare tire when winter tires for temperatures below freezing point are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that (୴ page 396). Warning! G the difference in tire characteristics may ț Battery test. Battery capacity drops Winter tires with a tread depth of less than very well impair turning stability and that with decreasing ambient temperature. 1⁄ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no overall driving stability may be reduced. A well charged battery helps to ensure 6 longer suitable for winter operation. Adapt your driving style accordingly. that the engine can be started even at Have the spare tire replaced with a winter low ambient temperatures. tire at the nearest authorized ț Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom- Mercedes-Benz Center. mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1⁄ 6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season.

292 Operation Winter driving

Block heater (Canada only) i ! When driving with snow chains, you Even on vehicles with all-wheel drive, The engine is equipped with a block heat- may wish to deactivate the use snow chains on rear tires only. er. ୴ ESP ( page 80) before setting the ve- Do not use snow chains with tire sizes The electrical cable may be installed at an hicle in motion. This will improve the 1 245/45 R 18 on 8 /2 x 18 rims and authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. vehicle‘s traction. 265/40 R 18 in general (୴ page 384).

Snow chains Please observe the following guidelines Do not use snow chains on tires mount- when using snow chains: ed on AMG rims. i ț Use of snow chains is not permissible When using snow chains, vehicles with with all wheel/tire combinations. AIRMATIC should only be driven at ț raised vehicle level (୴ page 219). Vehi- Snow chains should only be used on cles with ABC* should only be driven at the rear wheels. Follow the manufac- vehicle height 1 (୴ page 221). turer's mounting instructions. ț Only use snow chains that are ap- Snow chains should only be driven on proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho- snow-covered roads at speeds not to rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains glad to advise you on this subject. as soon as possible when driving on roads ț Use of snow chains may be prohibited without snow. depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains.

293 Operation Maintenance ̄ Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have Clearing the service indicator your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with The service indicator is automatically the Service Booklet at the times called for cleared after 30 seconds. You can also by the FSS (Flexible Service System). clear it yourself. Failure to have the vehicle maintained in ̈ Press the reset button on the instru- accordance with the Service Booklet at the The type of service due is indicated in the ment cluster (୴ page 22). designated times/mileage called for by multifunction display: the FSS may result in vehicle damage not Service term exceeded 9 Minor service (A) covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ´ Major service (B) If you have exceeded the suggested service term, you will see the following mes- FSS will notify you when your next service i sage in the multifunction display: is due. The interval between services depends SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XXXX MILES (KM) Approximately one month before your next on your driving habits. A gentle driving SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XXX DAYS service is due, one of the following mes- style, moderate engine speeds and the SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY X DAY sages will appear in the multifunction dis- avoidance of short-distance trips will play while you are driving or when you lengthen the interval between services. An acoustic signal will also sound. switch on the ignition (example service A): The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the SERVICE A IN XXXXX MILES (KM) service indicator following a completed SERVICE A IN XXX DAYS service. SERVICE A IN X DAY SERVICE A DUE NOW!

294 Operation Maintenance

Calling up the service indicator Resetting the service indicator ̈ To confirm, press reset button until you hear a signal. ̈ Switch on ignition. In the event that the service on your vehi- The service indicator now displays the cle is not carried out by an authorized The standard display of the control sys- reset interval. Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the tem appears (୴ page 139). service indicator yourself. ̈ Press button k or j on the mul- i ̈ tifunction steering wheel until FSS indi- Switch on ignition. If the service indicator was inadvertent- cator with the service symbol 9 or The standard display of the control sys- ly reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center ´ and the service deadline appears tem appears (୴ page 139). correct it. in the multifunction display. ̈ Press button k or j on the mul- Only reset if the proper service has tifunction steering wheel until the FSS been performed. Resetting the system i indicator with the service symbol 9 without performing proper service as If the battery is disconnected, the days or ´ and the service deadline ap- called for by the FSS will cause the FSS of disconnection will not be included in pears in the multifunction display. to incorrectly determine the next ser- the count shown by the service indica- vice interval which will result in engine tor. To arrive at the true service dead- ̈ Press reset button on the instrument damage not covered by the line, you will need to subtract these cluster for about three seconds. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. days from the days shown in the ser- This message appears in the multifunc- vice indicator. tion display:

Do not confuse the service indicator SERVICE INTERVAL... : with the engine oil level indicator . RESET WITH R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC.

295 Operation Vehicle care ̄ Vehicle care Cleaning and care of vehicle Such damage is caused not only by ex- More frequent washings are necessary to treme and varying climatic conditions, but deal with unfavorable conditions: also by: ț near the ocean Warning! G ț Air pollution ț in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust Many cleaning products can be hazardous. ț Road salt emissions) Some are poisonous, others are flammable. ț Tar ț during winter operation Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s ț Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. doors or windows when cleaning the inside. To avoid paint damage, you should imme- Any damage should be repaired as soon as Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- diately remove: possible to prevent corrosion. signed for cleaning your vehicle. ț Grease and oil In doing so, do not neglect the underbody ț Fuel In operation, even while parked, your vehi- of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor- cle is subjected to varying external influ- ț Coolant ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Dam- ences which, if gone unchecked, can ț Brake fluid attack the paintwork as well as the under- aged areas need to be re-undercoated. ț body and cause lasting damage. Bird droppings Your vehicle has been treated at the facto- ț Insects ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of ț Tree resins, etc. the vehicle. Post-production treatment is Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- neither necessary nor recommended by nates the aggressiveness and potency of Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility the above adverse influences. of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later.

296 Operation Vehicle care

We have selected car-care products and Power washer Tar stains compiled recommendations which are When using a power washer for cleaning Quickly remove tar stains before they dry specially matched to our vehicles and the vehicle, always observe the manufac- and become more difficult to remove. A tar which always reflect the latest technology. turer’s operating instructions. remover is recommended. You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products at an authorized i Paintwork, painted body components Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of should be applied when water drops on the damage due to negligent or incorrect care water, and a SmartKey with paint surface do not “bead up”, normally cannot always be removed or repaired with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e. every three to five months, depending on the car-care products recommended here. within approx. 3 ft. (approx. 1 m), the climate and washing detergent used. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an au- vehicle could be inadvertently locked thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. or unlocked. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface The following topics deal with the cleaning shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of and care of your vehicle and give important ! gloss). “how-to” information as well as references Never use a round nozzle to to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod- power-wash tires. The intense jet of Do not apply any of these products or wax ucts. water can result in damage to the tire. if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot. Additional information can be found in the Always replace a damaged tire. Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick booklet “Vehicle Care Guide“. Always keep the jet of water moving for quick and provisional repairs of minor across the surface. Do not aim directly paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi- at electrical parts, electrical connec- cle doors, etc.). tors, seals, or other rubber parts.

297 Operation Vehicle care

Engine cleaning Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry Ornamental moldings with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment For regular cleaning and care of very dirty agents to dry on the finish. make sure to protect electrical compo- chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean- nents and connectors from the intrusion of Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in ex- er. water and cleaning agents. terior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers, Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor- prevent damage to the mirrors. turn signal lenses rosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces ̈ Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Before applying, all control linkage bush- of road salt as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham- ings and joints should be lubricated. The When washing the underbody, do not for- poo, with plenty of water. poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be pro- get to clean the inner sides of the wheels. To prevent scratches, never apply strong tected from any wax. force and use only a soft, non-scratchy i cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at- Vehicle washing Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of or sponge. in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash water, and a SmartKey with detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap- KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e. proved Car Shampoo. within approx. 3 ft. (approx. 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif- or unlocked. fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently.

298 Operation Vehicle care

Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor Cleaning the Parktronic* system To prevent scratches, never apply strong cover sensors force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.

Wiper blades

! Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield to a vertical position only. They could otherwise damage the hood. 1 Distronic* system sensor cover 1 Parktronic* sensors ̈ Use a mild car wash detergent, such as ̈ Use a mild car wash detergent, such as ̈ Turn on the wipers and place it in a ver- Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham- Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham- tical position. poo, with plenty of water to clean sen- poo, with plenty of water to clean sor cover 1. sensors 1. For information on placing the wipers to a vertical position, see “Replacing wiper To prevent scratches, never apply strong When using a steam cleaner or power blades” (୴ page 359). force and use only a soft, non-scratchy washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a min- cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do imum distance of 4 in (10 cm) at not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a sensors 1. dry cloth or sponge.

299 Operation Vehicle care

Window cleaning ̈ Use a window cleaning solution on all Warning! G glass surfaces. ! An automotive glass cleaner is recom- For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re- Fold the windshield wiper arms away mended. move SmartKey from starter switch before from the windshield in a vertical posi- cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the tion only. They could otherwise dam- ! wiper motor might suddenly turn on and age the hood. Fold the windshield wiper arms back cause injury. onto the windshield before turning the ̈ Turn on the wipers and place it in a ver- SmartKey in the starter switch. ̈ Clean the wiper blade inserts with a tical position. clean cloth and detergent solution. Hold on to the wiper when folding the For information how to place the wipers in wiper arm back. If released, the force a vertical position, see “Replacing wiper ! of the impact from the tensioning blades” (୴ page 359). Fold the windshield wiper arms back spring could crack the windshield. onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch. Warning! G Hold on to the wiper when folding the For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re- wiper arm back. If released, the force move SmartKey from starter switch before of the impact from the tensioning cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper spring could crack the windshield. motor might suddenly turn on and cause injury.

300 Operation Vehicle care

Light alloy wheels Steering wheel and gear selector lever Seat belts Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly The webbing must not be treated with should be used for regular cleaning of the or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved chemical cleaning agents. Only use clear, light alloy wheels. Leather Care. lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F If possible, clean wheels once a week with Cup holder (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or of water. mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Warning! G washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- Follow the instructions on container. ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may i scouring agents. severely weaken them. In a crash they may Only use acid-free cleaning materials. not be able to provide adequate protection. Acid may cause corrosion or damage Hard plastic trim items the clear coat. Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply Instrument cluster with light pressure. Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or Headliner and shelf below rear window mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive scouring agents. dirt.

301 Operation Vehicle care

Upholstery Nubuck leather upholstery (S 55 AMG) Plastic and rubber parts Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing The nubuck leather upholstery is treated Do not use oil or wax on these parts. clothing that have the tendency to give off with a protective coating. Wipe nubuck coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause leather upholstery with damp microfiber Wood trims the upholstery to become permanently dis- cloth to remove dust and other light stains. Dampen cloth using water and use damp colored. By lining the seats with a proper Carefully dab nubuck leather upholstery cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle. intermediate cover, contact-discoloration with a microfiber cloth to remove oil stains. Do not use solvents like tar remover or will be prevented. wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as ! these may be abrasive. Leather upholstery Do not use Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care or any solvents to clean Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth nubuck leather upholstery. and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leath- Exercise particular care when cleaning per- er upholstery. forated leather as its underside should not become wet.

302 Practical hints What to do if …? Where will I find ...? Unlocking/locking in an emergency Opening/closing in an emergency Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Battery Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses

303 Practical hints What to do if …? ̄ What to do if …? Lamps in instrument cluster General information: the ignition is turned on, have it checked If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to and replaced if necessary. come on during the bulb self-check when

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution - The yellow ABS malfunction in- The ABS has detected a malfunction and ̈ Continue driving with added caution. dicator lamp comes on while has switched off. The BAS and the ESP are Wheels may lock during hard braking, driving. also switched off (see messages in display). reducing steering capability. The brake system is still functioning nor- ̈ Have the system checked at an autho- mally but without the ABS available. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as Parktronic*, Distron- Failure to follow these instructions increas- ic*, and the automatic transmission may es the risk of an accident. also be malfunctioning. The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value again, 10 volts and the ABS has switched off. the ABS is operational again. ̈ If necessary, have the generator and battery checked.

304 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution ; The red brake warning You are driving with the parking brake set. ̈ Release the parking brake (୴ page 45). (USA only) lamp comes on while 3 driving and you hear a warning sound. (Canada only) The red brake warning There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- ̈ Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehi- lamp comes on while voir. cle and notify an authorized driving. Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

G ! Warning! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi- minimum mark or below, have the nated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked for brake pad brake system checked immediately if the thickness and leaks. brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

305 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution ? The yellow malfunction There is a malfunction in: ̈ Have the vehicle checked as soon as (USA only) indicator lamp comes on possible by an authorized ț The fuel management system ± while driving. Mercedes-Benz Center. ț The ignition system An on-board diagnostic connector is (Canada only) ț The emission control system used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. ț Systems which affect emissions It allows the accurate identification of Such malfunctions may result in excessive system malfunctions through the read- emissions values and may switch the en- out of diagnostic trouble codes. It is lo- gine to its limp-home (emergency opera- cated in the front left area of the tion) mode. footwell next to the parking brake pedal. The fuel cap is not closed tightly. ̈ Close the fuel cap. Your gas tank is empty. ̈ After refuelling, start the engine three or four times in succession. The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked.

306 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution l The red Distronic warning lamp You are too close to the vehicle in front of ̈ Apply the brakes immediately to in- comes on while driving. you to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance. l The red Distronic warning lamp ț You are gaining too rapidly on the vehi- ̈ Apply the brakes immediately. comes on while driving and you cle ahead of you. ̈ Carefully observe the traffic situation. hear a warning sound. ț The distance warning system has recog- You may need to brake or maneuver to nized a stationary obstacle on your avoid hitting an obstacle. probable line of travel. v The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP or traction control has come into ̈ When driving off, apply as little throttle flashes while driving. operation because of detected traction loss as possible. in at least one tire. ̈ While driving, ease up on the accelera- Distronic* is deactivated. tor. ̈ Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions. ̈ Do not deactivate the ESP. Exceptions: (୴ page 80). Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

307 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution v The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP is deactivated. ̈ Switch the ESP back on (୴ page 81). comes on while driving. Risk of accident! If the ESP cannot be switched back on, have Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- the system checked at an authorized ing road, weather, and traffic conditions. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve ̈ Refuel at the next gas station warning lamp comes on while mark. (୴ page 269). driving. < The red seat belt telltale illumi- The warning lamp reminds you to fasten ̈ Fasten your seat belt. nates for a brief period after seat belts. The warning lamp goes out. starting the engine.

308 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution H The yellow warning lamp for the The tire pressure monitor detects a loss of ̈ Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding tire pressure monitor comes on. pressure in at least one tire. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. ̈ Take note of the messages in the multifunction display.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency i Warning! G and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on When the tire pressure monitoring system cle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in warning lamp is lit, one or more of your tires including the spare, should be checked the owner’s manual. is significantly under-inflated. You should monthly when cold and set to the recom- stop and check your tires as soon as possi- mended inflation pressure as specified in ble, and inflate them to the proper pressure the vehicle placard and owner’s manual. as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

309 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution 1 The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- ̈ Drive with added caution to the nearest comes on while driving. tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.

Warning! G

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others.

310 Practical hints What to do if …?

Lamp in center console

Problem Possible cause Suggested solution The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the lamp comes on. front passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front airbag is switched off. The system is malfunctioning when there is ̈ Have the system checked as soon as no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the possible by an authorized front passenger seat. Mercedes-Benz Center. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator The system is malfunctioning. ̈ Make sure that there is nothing between lamp does not come on with a seat cushion and child seat and check BabySmartTM1 child seat properly installed installation of the child seat. on the front passenger seat. ̈ If the light remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens AutomotiveCorp.

311 Practical hints What to do if …?

Messages in the display i Warning! G Turning the SmartKey in the starter The control system shows warning and switch to position 2, or pressing the malfunction messages in the multifunction All categories of messages contain impor- KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice display. tant information which should be taken note causes all lamps as well as the multi- of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad- Certain warning and malfunction messag- function display to come on. Make sure dressed as soon as possible at an autho- es are accompanied by an audible signal. that they are all in working order before rized Mercedes-Benz Center. starting your journey. Address these messages accordingly and Failure to repair condition noted may cause follow the additional instructions given in damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz this Operator’s Manual. On the pages that follow, you will find a Limited Warranty, or result in property dam- compilation of the most important warning Selecting the malfunction memory menu in age or personal injury. and malfunction messages that may ap- ୴ the control system ( page 134) displays pear in the display. High priority messages both cleared and uncleared messages. G appear on a red background. High-priority messages appear in the mul- Warning! tifunction display in red color. No messages will be displayed if either the Certain messages of high priority cannot instrument cluster or the multifunction dis- be cleared from the multifunction display play is inoperative. using the reset button (୴ page 22). Contact your nearest authorized Other messages of high priority and mes- Mercedes-Benz Center. sages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (୴ page 22). These are then stored in the malfunction message memory (୴ page 150).

312 Practical hints What to do if …?

Text messages

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution ABC ACTIVE BODY CONTROLThe capability of the ABC system is restrict- ̈ Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). DRIVE CAREFULLY! ed. This can impair the handling. ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center as soon as possible. The vehicle is losing oil. ̈ Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. ACTIVE BODY CONTROLThe vehicle is parked on an extremely ̈ Press the vehicle level control button to se- STOP, CAR TOO LOW!uneven surface. lect level 2 (୴ page 221). ABC is malfunctioning. ̈ Stop and press the vehicle level control button to select a higher vehicle level (୴ page 221). ̈ Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid damaging the front fenders. ̈ Listen for scraping noises. ̈ Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center as soon as possible. DISPLAY MALFUNCTIONThe display for ABC or the ABC system itself ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as VISIT WORKSHOP! is malfunctioning. soon as possible.

313 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution ABC ACTIVE BODY CONTROLThe capability of the ABC system is restrict- ̈ Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). VISIT WORKSHOP! ed. ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center as soon as possible. ABS MALFUNCTION! The ABS has detected a malfunction and ̈ Continue driving with added caution. Wheels VISIT WORKSHOP! has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are may lock during hard braking, reducing steer- also deactivated. ing capability. The brake system is still functioning nor- ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized mally but without the ABS available. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. DISPLAY MALFUNCTIONThe ABS or the ABS display is malfunction- ̈ Continue driving with added caution. Wheels VISIT WORKSHOP! ing. may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability. ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. AIR FILTER CHANGE CARTRIDGE The air filter is clogged. ̈ Have the air filter checked by an authorized VISIT WORKSHOP! Mercedes-Benz Center.

314 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution CRUISE CON- CRUISE CONTROL Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunction- ̈ Have cruise control or Distronic* checked by TROL VISIT WORKSHOP! ing. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DISTRONIC EXTERNAL INTERFER-Distronic* is switched off and is temporarily ̈ Try activating Distronic* again later. ENCE unavailable. REACTIVATE!

CURRENTLY UNAVAIL-Distronic* is switched off because the Dis- ̈ Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator ABLE tronic* cover in the radiator grille is dirty. grille (୴ page 299). SEE OPER. MANUAL ̈ Restart the vehicle. DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!Distronic* is malfunctioning or the display ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as is malfunctioning. soon as possible. ESP MALFUNCTION! The ESP has detected a malfunction and ̈ Continue driving with added caution. VISIT WORKSHOP! switched off. ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized The ABS may still be operational. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. DISPLAY MALFUNCTIONThe ESP or the ESP display is malfunction- ̈ Continue driving with added caution. VISIT WORKSHOP! ing. ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

315 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution ESP NOT AVAILABLE! The ESP was deactivated the power supply ̈ Synchronize the ESP. With the vehicle sta- SEE OPER. MANUAL has been interrupted. tionary and the engine running, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and The ABS is still operational. then to the right to synchronize the ESP. If the ESP message does not go out: ̈ Continue driving with added caution. ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

! When synchronizing the ESP, make sure you can turn the steering wheel in both directions as far as it will go without the wheel hitting any objects, e.g. aroad curb.

316 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution P SHIFT You have tried to turn off the engine with ̈ Place the gear selector lever in position P. TO P the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button with the gear selector lever not in P. PRE-SAFE INACTIVE If BAS or ESP malfunction messages are ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as SEE OPER. MANUAL! displayed simultaneously, PRE-SAFE has soon as possible. been deactivated as a result of these malfunctions. All other occupant safety systems, such as the airbags, are still available. PRE-SAFE itself has failed. All other occu- ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as pant safety systems, such as the airbags, soon as possible. are still available.

317 Practical hints What to do if …?

Symbol messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution @ AIRMATIC The vehicle is parked on an extremely ̈ Press the vehicle level control button to STOP, CAR TOO LOW! uneven surface. select the raised vehicle level (୴ page 219). The vehicle level control is malfunction- ̈ Stop and press the vehicle level control ing. button to select a higher vehicle level (୴ page 219). ̈ Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid damaging the front fenders. ̈ Listen for scraping noises. ̈ Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center as soon as possible. AIRMATIC The capability of the AIRMATIC system is ̈ Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph DRIVE CAREFULLY! restricted. (80 km/h). ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center as soon as possible.

318 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution @ DISPLAY MALFUNCTION The display for AIRMATIC or the AIRMAT- ̈ Visit an authorized VISIT WORKSHOP! IC system itself is malfunctioning. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. AIRMATIC ț You have exceeded a speed of ̈ Press the vehicle level control button to LEV. SEL. CANCELED! 75 mph (120 km/h). adjust the vehicle level (୴ page 219). or ț You have maintained a speed of between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for more than 5 minutes.

319 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution # BATTERY/ALTERNATOR The battery was charged with a battery ̈ Have the battery checked at a service VISIT WORKSHOP! charger or jump started. station. The battery is no longer charging. ̈ Stop immediately and check the Possible causes: poly-V-belt. ț alternator malfunctioning If it is broken: ț broken poly-V-belt ̈ Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If it is intact: ̈ Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.

320 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution 2 BRAKE PAD WEAR The brake pads have reached their wear ̈ Have the brake pads replaced as soon as VISIT WORKSHOP! limit. possible. ; BRAKE FLUID There is insufficient brake fluid in the res- ̈ Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and no- (USA only) VISIT WORKSHOP! ervoir. tify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 3 Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve (Canada only) the problem. ; PARK. BRAKE You are driving with the parking brake en- ̈ Release the parking brake (୴ page 45). (USA only) RELEASE BRAKE! gaged. ! (Canada only)

G ! ! Warning! If you find that the brake fluid in the Brake pad thickness must be visually brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the checked by a qualified technician at the Driving with this message displayed can re- minimum mark or below, have the intervals specified in the Service Book- sult in an accident. Have your brake system brake system checked for brake pad let. checked immediately. Don’t add brake fluid thickness and leaks. before checking the brake system. Overfill- ing the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

321 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution ? VISIT WORKSHOP! There may be a malfunction in the: ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. ț Fuel injection system ț Ignition system ț Exhaust system ț Fuel system B COOLANT The coolant level is too low. ̈ Add coolant (୴ page 278). CHECK LEVEL! ̈ If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G ! Warning! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. the message and symbol displayed Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may cause serious engine damage not may burn if it comes into contact with hot covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited engine parts. You can be seriously burned. Warranty. Do not drive without a sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing major engine damage.

322 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution Ï COOLANT The coolant is too hot. ̈ Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine. STOP, ENGINE OFF! ̈ Only start the engine again after the message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.

During severe operating conditions, Warning! G e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C). Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have ! leaked into the engine compartment to The engine should not be operated with catch fire. You could be seriously burned. the coolant temperature above 248°F Steam from an overheated engine can cause (120°C). Doing so may cause serious serious burns and can occur just by opening engine damage which is not covered by the engine hood. Stay away from the engine the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

323 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution Ï COOLANT The poly-V-belt could be broken. ̈ Stop immediately and check the STOP, ENGINE OFF! poly-V-belt. If it is broken: ̈ Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If it is intact: ̈ Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limit- ed Warranty. Ï COOLANT The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc- ̈ Observe the coolant temperature display. VISIT WORKSHOP! tioning. ̈ Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.

324 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution G DISPLAY MALFUNCTION The instrument cluster display is malfunc- ̈ Continue driving with added caution. VISIT WORKSHOP! tioning. ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter as soon as possible. ± DISPLAY MALFUNCTION Certain electronic systems are unable to ̈ Have the electronic systems checked by VISIT WORKSHOP! relay information to the control system. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The following systems may have failed: ț Coolant temperature display ț Tachometer ț Cruise control display J DOOR OPEN! You are attempting to drive with one or ̈ Close the doors. more doors open.

325 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution : USA only: The engine oil level is too low. ̈ Add engine oil (୴ page 277) and check ADD 1.0 QT. ENGINE the engine oil level (୴ page 274). OIL AT NEXT REFUELING!

Canada only: ADD 1.0 LITER ENGINE OIL AT NEXT REFUELING!

ENGINE OIL LEVEL There is no oil in the engine. There is a ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as STOP, ENGINE OFF! danger of engine damage. soon as possible. ̈ Turn off the engine. ̈ Add engine oil (୴ page 277) and check the engine oil level (୴ page 274). ENGINE OIL LEVEL You have added too much engine oil. ̈ Have excess oil siphoned or drained off. REDUCE OIL LEVEL There is a risk of damaging the engine or Observe all legal requirements with re- the catalytic converter. spect to its disposal.

326 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution : ENGINE OIL It may be that there is water in the engine ̈ Have the engine oil level checked VISIT WORKSHOP! oil. (୴ page 274). ENGINE OIL LEVEL The engine oil has dropped to a critical ̈ Check the engine oil level (୴ page 274) VISIT WORKSHOP! level. and add engine oil as required (୴ page 277). ̈ If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for possible leaks. ENGINE OIL SENSOR The measuring system is malfunctioning. ̈ Have the measuring system checked by VISIT WORKSHOP! an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

When the message ADD 1.0 QT. ENGINE When this occurs, the warning will first ! OIL AT NEXT REFUELING! (Canada: come on intermittently and then stay on if The engine oil level warnings should 1 Liter) appears while the engine is run- the oil level drops further. not be ignored. Extended driving with ning and at operating temperature, the en- Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil the symbol displayed could result in gine oil level has dropped to approximately leaks are noted, drive to the nearest ser- serious engine damage that is not the minimum level. vice station where the engine oil should be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited topped to the required level with an ap- Warranty. proved oil.

327 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution _ ENTRY POSITION Seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel ̈ Wait until the seat, exterior mirrors and DO NOT DRIVE! have not yet moved to their preset driving steering wheel have moved to their driv- positions. ing positions. The message will disappear. Y HOOD OPEN! You are driving with the hood open. ̈ Close the hood (୴ page 273). I REMOVE KEY! You have forgotten to remove the ̈ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition. SmartKey. REPLACE KEY! The batteries in the SmartKey are dead. ̈ Change the batteries (୴ page 349). DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!

AUTOM. LIGHT ON ̈ Remove the SmartKey from the starter REMOVE KEY! switch. F KEY The battery in the KEYLESS-GO* key is ̈ Change the battery (୴ page 349). CHECK BATTERY! discharged. KEY SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not rec- ̈ Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do NOT RECOGNIZED! ognized while the engine is running be- so. cause ̈ Search for the SmartKey. ț the SmartKey is not in the vehicle Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally ț there is strong radio-frequency inter- locked nor can the engine be started again ference after it has been stopped.

328 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution F KEY The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo- ̈ Change the position of the SmartKey with NOT RECOGNIZED! mentarily not recognized. KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle. ̈ Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch if necessary. KEY DETECTED A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the ̈ Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* IN VEHICLE vehicle was recognized while locking the out of the vehicle. vehicle from the outside. KEY The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunction- ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! ing. ter as soon as possible. . 3RD BRAKE LIGHT The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc- ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- CHECK LAMP! tioning. ter as soon as possible. BRAKE LIGHT Brake lamp illumination is delayed or ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- VISIT WORKSHOP! lamp is permanently on. ter as soon as possible. BRAKE LIGHT, L The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- CHECK LAMP! back-up bulb is being used. ter as soon as possible. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! BRAKE LIGHT, R The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- CHECK LAMP! back-up bulb is being used. ter as soon as possible. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! DISPLAY MALFUNCTION The display for the lamps or the system is ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- VISIT WORKSHOP! malfunctioning. ter as soon as possible.

329 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution . FRONT FOGLAMP, L The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- CHECK LAMP! ter as soon as possible. FRONT FOGLAMP, R The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- CHECK LAMP! ter as soon as possible. FR. L. PARK. LAMP The left parking lamps are malfunction- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! ing. A back-up bulb is being used. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! FR. R. PARK. LAMP The right parking lamps are malfunction- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! ing. A back-up bulb is being used. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! HIGH BEAM, L The left high beam lamp is malfunction- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! ing. HIGH BEAM, R The right high beam lamp is malfunction- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! ing. LICENSE PLATE LAMP, TheL left license plate lamp is malfunction- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! ing. LICENSE PLATE LAMP, TheR right license plate lamp is malfunc- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! tioning.

330 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution . LIGHT SENSOR The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The ̈ In the control system, set lamp operation DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! headlamps switch on automatically. to manual (୴ page 154). ̈ Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch. ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter as soon as possible. LOW BEAM, L The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- CHECK LAMP! ter as soon as possible. LOW BEAM, R The right low beam lamp is malfunction- ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- CHECK LAMP! ing. ter as soon as possible. MARKER LIGHT, FL The front left side marker lamp is mal- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! functioning. MARKER LIGHT, FR The front right side marker lamp is mal- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! functioning. REAR FOGLAMP The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! REVERSE LIGHT, L The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP!

REVERSE LIGHT, R The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP!

331 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution . STANDING LIGHT, L The left standing lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! A back-up bulb is being used. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! STANDING LIGHT, R The right standing signal lamp is malfunc- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! tioning. A back-up bulb is being used. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! TAIL LIGHT, L The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! back-up bulb is being used. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! TAIL LIGHT, R The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! back-up bulb is being used. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! SWITCH OFF LIGHTS! Lamps have been turned on although the ̈ Turn off the headlamps. SmartKey in the ignition is in position 0. TURN SIGNAL F, L The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! tioning. A back-up bulb is being used. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! TURN SIGNAL F, R The right front turn signal lamp is mal- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! functioning. A back-up bulb is being used. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!

332 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution . TURN SIGNAL, L The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! tioning. A back-up bulb is being used. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! TURN SIGNAL, R The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! tioning. A back-up bulb is being used. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! TURN SIG. MIRROR, L The left turn signal in the side mirror is ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- CHECK LAMP! malfunctioning. This message will only ap- ter as soon as possible. pear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. TURN SIG. MIRROR, R The right turn signal in the side mirror is ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- CHECK LAMP! malfunctioning. This message will only ap- ter as soon as possible. pear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. < SEAT BELT SYSTEM The seat belt system is malfunctioning. ̈ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz VISIT WORKSHOP! Center as soon as possible. K CLOSE You have opened the driver’s door with ̈ Close the sliding/pop-up roof SUNROOF! the SmartKey removed from the starter (୴ page 199). switch and the sliding/pop up roof open. J CLOSE You have opened the driver’s door with ̈ Close the sliding/pop-up roof SUNROOF! the SmartKey removed from the starter (୴ page 199). switch and the sliding/pop up roof open.

333 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution L TELE AID One or more main functions of the Tele ̈ Have the Tele Aid system checked by an DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Aid system are malfunctioning. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

TELE AID BATTERY The emergency power battery for the Tele ̈ Have the Tele Aid system checked by an DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Aid system is malfunctioning. If the vehi- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. cle battery is also discharged, Tele Aid will not be operational. t FUNCTION This display appears if button t or NOT AVAILABLE! s on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone. Ê TRUNK OPEN! This message will appear whenever the ̈ Close the trunk lid. trunk lid is open. W 1 ̈ ୴ WASHER FLUID The fluid level has dropped to about /3 Add washer fluid ( page 281). CHECK LEVEL! of total reservoir capacity.

Warning! G

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.

334 Practical hints What to do if …?

Tire pressure monitor messages (vehicles produced up to approximately October 2003)

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution H TIRE PRES. The tire pressure is being checked. DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINS. REACTIVATE USING R-BUTTON

TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire inflation pressure monitor* is un- ̈ Check the tire pressure at the next ser- NOT ACTIVE able to monitor the tire pressure due to vice station. ț the presence of several wheel sensors in the vehicle. ț excessive wheel sensor temperatures. ț a nearby radio interference source. ț unrecognized wheel sensors mounted.

You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin- Warning! G ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces- Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects sive heat build-up and possibly a fire. the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

335 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution H TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire inflation pressure monitor* is de- ̈ Activate the tire inflation pressure mon- REACTIVATE! activated. itor* (୴ page 286). TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire inflation pressure monitor* is ̈ Have the tire inflation pressure moni- VISIT WORKSHOP! malfunctioning. tor* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361). A wheel without proper sensor was in- ̈ Check and correct tire pressure as re- stalled. quired (୴ page 283). TIRE PRES. One or more tires are deflating. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT! avoiding abrubt steering and braking maneuvers. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES. The tire pressure in one or more tires is ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, CHECK TIRES! already below the minimum value. avoiding abrubt steering and braking maneuvers. The tire pressure in one or more tires is low. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361).

336 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution H TIRE PRES., RF The right front tire is deflating. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT! avoiding abrubt steering and braking maneuvers. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES., RF The right front tire pressure is low. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. CHECK TIRES! ̈ Check the tire pressure. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES., LF The left front tire is deflating. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT! avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES., LF The left front tire pressure is low. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. CHECK TIRES! ̈ Check the tire pressure. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361).

337 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution H TIRE PRES., RR The right rear tire is deflating. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT! avoiding abrubt steering and braking maneuvers. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES., RR The right rear tire pressure is low. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. CHECK TIRES! ̈ Check the tire pressure. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES., LR The left rear tire is deflating. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT! avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES., LR The left rear tire pressure is low. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt. CHECK TIRES! ̈ Check the tire pressure. ̈ Change the wheel (୴ page 361).

338 Practical hints What to do if …?

Tire pressure monitor messages (vehicles produced as of approximately October 2003)

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution H TIRE PRES. One or more tires are deflating. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoid- CAUTION, TIRE ing abrubt steering and braking maneu- DEFECT! vers. Observe the traffic situation around you ̈ Repair or change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES. The pressure has fallen significantly in ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoid- CHECK TIRES! one or more tires. ing abrubt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you. ̈ Repair or change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES. The pressure is too low in one or more ̈ Check and correct tire pressure as re- PLEASE CORRECT! tires. quired (୴ page 283).

339 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution H TIRE PRES., LF The left front tire is deflating. ̈ Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding CAUTION, TIRE abrubt braking maneuvers. Observe the DEFECT! traffic situation around you. ̈ Repair or change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES., LF The left front tire pressure is low. ̈ Bring the vehicle to a halt. Observe the CHECK TIRES! traffic situation around you. ̈ Check the tire. ̈ Check and correct tire pressure as required. TIRE PRES., RF The right front tire is deflating. ̈ Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding CAUTION, TIRE abrubt braking maneuvers. Observe the DEFECT! traffic situation around you. ̈ Repair or change the wheel (୴ page 361).

340 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution H TIRE PRES., RF The right front tire pressure is low. ̈ Bring the vehicle to a halt. Observe the CHECK TIRES! traffic situation around you. ̈ Check the tire. ̈ Check and correct tire pressure as required. TIRE PRES., LR The left rear tire is deflating. ̈ Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding CAUTION, TIRE abrubt braking maneuvers. Observe the DEFECT! traffic situation around you. ̈ Repair or change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES., LR The left rear tire pressure is low. ̈ Bring the vehicle to a halt. Observe the CHECK TIRES! traffic situation around you. ̈ Check the tire. ̈ Check and correct tire pressure as required.

341 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution H TIRE PRES., RR The right rear tire is deflating. ̈ Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding CAUTION, TIRE abrubt braking maneuvers. Observe the DEFECT! traffic situation around you. ̈ Repair or change the wheel (୴ page 361). TIRE PRES., RR The right rear tire pressure is low. ̈ Bring the vehicle to a halt. Observe the CHECK TIRES! traffic situation around you. ̈ Check the tire. ̈ Check and correct tire pressure as required. TIRE PRES. MONITOR There was a tire pressure warning mes- ̈ Activate the tire pressure monitor after REACTIVE AFTER sage. correcting the tire pressure values CORRECTING PRESSURE! (୴ The yellow warning lamp for the tire pres- page 283). sure monitor comes on and you have not reactivated the system since the last tire pressure check.

342 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution H TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire pressure monitor is using the cur- REACTIVATED rent pressure values as the basis for monitoring. TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire inflation pressure monitor* is un- ̈ Remove any extra wheel sensors from the CURRENTLY able to monitor the tire pressure due to: vehicle UNAVAILABLE ț the presence of several wheen sen- As soon as the causes of the malfunction sors in the vehicle have been removed, the tire pressure monitor automatically becomes active again. ț excessive wheel sensor temperatures ț a nearby radio interference source ț unrecognized wheel sensors installed TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire pressure monitor or a wheel sen- ̈ Have the tire inflation pressure monitor NOT OPERATIONAL sor is malfunctioning. checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz DRIVE TO WORKSHOP Center. A wheel without proper sensor was in- ̈ Have the wheels checked. stalled.

343 Practical hints Where will I find ...? ̄ Where will I find ...? First aid kit Removing the first aid kit Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage ̈ Press buttons together and fold bowl, spare wheel The first aid kit is located in the storage 2 lid down. compartments under the front passenger 1 The spare wheel, the vehicle tools, and the seat. Remove first aid kit. luggage bowl are stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor. Storing the first aid kit ̈ Place first aid kit in the storage compartments. ̈ Close lid 1 until both buttons 2 of lock engage.

i Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year Lid 1 and replace missing/expired items. 2 Buttons 1 Jack 2 Storage tray with vehicle tool kit 3 Luggage bowl 4 Spare wheel ̈ Lift up trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk. You can now remove the tools and accessories.

344 Practical hints Where will I find ...?

! Vehicle jack Storing the vehicle jack in the trunk To prevent damage, always disengage ̈ Retract the vehicle jack arm to the To prepare the vehicle jack for use trunk floor handle from trunk lid and base of the vehicle jack. lower trunk floor before closing the ̈ Remove the vehicle jack from the spare ̈ Push the crank handle up. trunk lid. wheel well under the trunk floor. ̈ Turn the crank handle counterclock- ̈ Push the crank handle up. The vehicle tool kit includes: wise to the end of the stop (storage po- ̈ Turn the crank handle clockwise until it sition). ୴୴ ț One interchangeable slot/Phillips engages (operational position). screwdriver ț One towing eye bolt ț One wheel bolt wrench with socket wrench ț One alignment bolt ț One pair of gloves ț One fuse extractor ț One fuse chart for the main fuse box ț Spare fuses

345 Practical hints Where will I find ...?

୴୴ Spare wheel Spare wheel S 430, S 500 and S 600 Warning! G (except Sport Package*) Removing the spare wheel The jack is designed exclusively for jacking The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full ̈ up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets Take out the vehicle tool kit tray 2. sized tire of the same type as on the vehicle, and it is fully functional. built into both sides of the vehicle. To help ̈ Loosen the luggage bowl 3. To do so, avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift turn the luggage bowl counterclock- However, that spare wheel rim is weight the vehicle during a wheel change. Never wise optimized and has a limited service life of get beneath the vehicle while it is supported 12000 miles (20000 km) use before a ̈ Remove the spare wheel . by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from 4 standard wheel rim must replace it. the area under the lifted vehicle. Always Storing the spare wheel In case of flat tire, you may temporarily use firmly set parking brake and block wheels the spare wheel. before raising vehicle with jack. ̈ Place spare wheel 4in wheel well. Do not operate vehicle with more than one Do not disengage parking brake while the ̈ Secure the spare wheel. To do so, turn spare wheel mounted. vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is the luggage bowl 3 clockwise to its always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es- stop. pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack ̈ Place vehicle tool kit tray 2 in luggage on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is bowl. fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al- ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.

346 Practical hints Where will I find ...?

Spare wheel S 55 AMG and Sport Warning! G Package* Warning! G

Never operate the vehicle with more than In case of a flat tire, you may temporarily The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif- one spare wheel mounted. use the spare wheel when observing the ferent from those of the road wheels. As a following restrictions: The spare wheel rim is for temporary use result, the vehicle handling characteristics ț only. Use for over a total of 12000 miles Do not exceed a vehicle speed of change when driving with a mounted spare (20000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may 50 mph (80 km/h). wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly. cause wheel rim failure leading to an acci- ț Drive to the nearest tire repair facility Never operate the vehicle with more than dent and possible injuries. to have the flat tire repaired or re- one spare wheel mounted. The spare wheel should only be used tempo- placed as appropriate. The spare wheel is for temporary use only. rarily and replaced with a regular road wheel ț Do not operate vehicle with more than When driving with spare wheel mounted, en- as quickly as possible. one spare wheel mounted. sure proper tire pressure and do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km). For more information, see “Rims and tires” The spare wheel rim is for temporary use (୴ page 384). only. Use for over a total of 12000 miles (20000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and possible injuries. The spare wheel should only be used temporarily and replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly as possible.

For more information, see “Rims and tires” (୴ page 384).

347 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency ̄ Unlocking/locking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle Unlocking the driver’s door

If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, open the driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key.

i Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the fol- 1 Mechanical key locking tab lowing: 2 Mechanical key 1 Unlocking 2 Locking With SmartKey ̈ Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow and slide the mechanical key ̈ Unlock the door with the mechanical ț Press button Œ or ‹ on the 2 out of the housing. key. To do so, push the mechanical key SmartKey. into the lock until it stops and turn it to ț Insert the SmartKey in the starter the left. switch. With KEYLESS-GO* ț Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (୴ page 33). ț Grasp the outside door handle (୴ page 55).

348 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Unlocking the trunk ̈ Turn the mechanical key counterclock- ̈ Slide mechanical key 2 out of the ୴ A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. wise to position 1. SmartKey ( page 348). (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The trunk unlocks and opens. ̈ Lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key (୴ page 348). If you are unable to unlock the trunk with ! the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the ̈ Lock the trunk lid if necessary with the The trunk lid swings open upwards au- trunk with the mechanical key. mechanical key (if applicable) tomatically. Always make sure that (୴ page 105). The trunk lid lock is located above the rear there is sufficient overhead clearance. license plate recess. Replacing batteries in the SmartKey/ Locking the vehicle SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

If you are unable to lock the vehicle with If the batteries in the SmartKey or the the SmartKey or the SmartKey with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are dis- KEYLESS-GO*, lock it with the mechanical charged, the vehicle can no longer be key as follows: locked or unlocked. It is recommended to ̈ Close the passenger doors and the have the batteries replaced at an autho- trunk lid. rized Mercedes-Benz Center. ̈ Press the central locking switch in the ୴ G 1 Unlocking and opening center console ( page 107). Warning! ̈ ̈ Check to see whether the locking knob Insert the mechanical key into the Keep the batteries out of reach of children. trunk lid lock. on the passenger door is still visible. If necessary push it down manually. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help immediately.

349 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Batteries contain materials that can harm i the environment if disposed of improperly. When changing batteries, always re- Recycling of batteries is the preferred place both batteries. method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries The required replacement batteries are for recycling. available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. SmartKey ̈ Remove mechanical key 1 (୴ page 348). Battery ̈ Insert the mechanical key 1 in side 3 opening and push gray slide. 4 Contact spring ̈ The battery compartment is unlatched. Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries 3 under the contact ̈ Pull the battery compartment 2 out of spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing the SmartKey housing in direction of up. arrow. ̈ Return battery compartment into hous- ̈ Remove the batteries. ing until it locks into place. 1 Mechanical key 2 Battery compartment Replacement batteries: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.

350 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Replacement battery: Lithium, type Fuel filler flap CR 2025 or equivalent. In case the central locking system does ̈ Remove mechanical key (୴ page 348). not release the fuel filler flap, you can it ̈ Insert the mechanical key in side open- manually. ing and push gray slide. The battery compartment is unlatched. ̈ Pull the battery compartment out of the SmartKey housing. ̈ Using mechanical key 3, apply pres- 1 Battery sure to position 2. Tilt battery up 2 Battery 1 tilts up slightly. 3 Mechanical key ̈ Pull out battery 1 in direction of ar- i row. 1 Release knob The required replacement battery is ̈ Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat- ̈ Open the trunk. available at any authorized tery with the plus (+) side facing up. Mercedes-Benz Center. ̈ Remove the trim inside the trunk on the ̈ Return battery compartment into hous- right-hand side. ing until it locks into place. ̈ Pull release knob 1 in the direction of arrow. The fuel filler flap can be opened.

351 Practical hints Opening/closing in an emergency ̄ Opening/closing in an emergency Sliding/pop-up roof ̈ Pry off lens 1 using a flat blade srew- ̈ Insert crank 2 through hole. driver (୴ page 344). ̈ Turn crank clockwise to: You can open or close the sliding/pop-up 2 ̈ Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch roof manually should an electrical malfunc- ț close slide roof to position 1 or 2. tion occur. ț raise roof at the rear ̈ Remove the crank from the operator’s The driving mechanism for the slid- manual pouch. ̈ Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to: ing/pop-up roof is located behind the lens of the interior overhead light. ț open slide roof ț lower roof at the rear The sliding/pop-up roof must be resyn- chronized after being operated manually (୴ page 202).

2 Crank 1 Lens

352 Practical hints Replacing bulbs ̄ Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper Bulbs Front lamps exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp as- Lamp Type semblies are in good working order at all 1 Additional turn sig- LED times. nal lamps 1 Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely 2 Low beam H7-55 W important. Have headlamps checked and Bi -Xenon* readjusted at regular intervals and when a D2S-35 W bulb has been replaced. See an authorized Turn signal lamp 2357 A Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp ad- 3 justment. 4 Fog lamp H7-55 W 5 Parking and stand- W5W i ing lamp Backup bulbs will be brought into use Side marker lamp W5W when the following lamps malfunction: 6 High beam H7-55 W ț Turn signal lamps 7 1 Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps*: Low beam ț Brake lamps and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do ț Parking lamps not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ț Tail lamps

353 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement ț Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating. Lamp Type Warning! G ț Switch lights off before changing a bulb 8 Brake lamp LED to prevent short circuits. Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 9 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W ț Always use a clean lint-free cloth when a Tail and standing P 21/4 W Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al- handling bulbs. low the lamp to cool down before changing lamp, side marker ț Your hands should be dry and free of oil a bulb. b Backup lamp P21W and grease. Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A License plate lamps C5W ț c bulb can explode if you: If the newly installed bulb does not Tail lamp, Rear fog P 21/4 W come on, visit an authorized d ț touch or move it when hot lamp Mercedes-Benz Center. ț drop the bulb High mounted brake LED ț Have the LEDs and bulbs for the follow- e ț lamp scratch the bulb ing lamps replaced by an authorized Wear eye and hand protection. Mercedes-Benz Center. Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon lamps, ț Additional turn signal lamps in the it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair exterior rear view mirrors the lamp and its components. We recom- ț High mounted brake lamp mend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. ț Bi-Xenon lamps* ț Front fog lamps

354 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

Replacing bulbs for front lamps Replacing low beam bulbs

Bi-Xenon* headlamp

Warning! G

Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We rec- Bulb socket for fog lamp 4 ommend that you have such work done by a Bulb socket for parking and standing 5 qualified technician. 1 Headlamp cover for fog lamp lamp Headlamp cover for high beam halogen 2 6 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb, parking and standing halogen headlamp bulb Halogen headlamp lamp 7 Electrical connector for low beam ̈ Switch off the lights. 3 Headlamp cover for Bi-Xenon* (low and headlamp bulb high beam) or halogen (low beam) ̈ Open the hood (୴ page 272). 8 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp headlamp bulb ̈ Press the tab on cover 3 and remove cover. ̈ Pull connector 7 off of the lamp. ̈ Release the retaining springs and take out the bulb. ୴୴

355 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

୴୴̈ Insert the new bulb in the socket so Replacing halogen high beam bulbs Front turn signal lamp bulb that the base is in the recess on the ̈ Switch off the lights. ̈ Switch off the lights. lower left. ̈ Open the hood (୴ page 272). ̈ Open the hood (୴ page 272). ̈ Attach the retaining springs. ̈ Press the tab on cover and remove ̈ Twist bulb socket counterclockwise ̈ 2 8 Insert connector 7 into the bulb. cover. and pull out. ̈ Press cover onto the housing until 3 ̈ Pull connector 6 off of the bulb. ̈ Gently push bulb into socket, turn the tab engages. counterclockwise and remove. ̈ Apply pressure on the bulb contacts from above until the bulb releases from ̈ Insert new bulb in socket, push in and the retaining springs. twist clockwise. ̈ Remove bulb. ̈ Reinstall bulb socket in lamp and twist clockwise until it engages. ̈ Insert the new bulb in the socket with the marking facing upward. ̈ Press the bulb upward on the contacts until it engages in the retaining springs. ̈ Insert connector 6 onto the bulb. ̈ Press cover 2 onto the housing until the tab engages.

356 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

Parking and standing lamp bulb Side marker lamp bulb ̈ Pull bulb out of the bulb socket. ̈ Switch off the lights. ̈ Insert new bulb in socket. ̈ Open the hood (୴ page 272). ̈ Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist clockwise. ̈ Press the tab on cover 2 and remove cover. ̈ To reinstall lamp, set rear end in bumper and let front end snap into ̈ Pull out the bulb socket with the 5 place. bulb. ̈ Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket. ̈ Insert a new bulb in the socket. ̈ Switch off the lights. ̈ Reinstall the bulb socket. ̈ Carefully slide lamp towards rear. ̈ Press cover onto the housing until 2 ̈ Remove front end first. the tab engages. ̈ Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out.

357 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ̈ Switch off the lights. License plate lamp ̈ Open trunk. Tail lamp assemblies ̈ Turn the catch, and move the trim to the side. ̈ Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out. ̈ Gently twist bulb counterclockwise and pull out of bulb holder. ̈ Insert new bulb into the holder and turn it clockwise. 1 Screws ̈ Reinstall bulb socket. ̈ Switch off the lights. Turn signal lamp (white socket) 1 The bulb socket should audibly click. ̈ Loosen both screws 1 and remove 2 Tail, parking, standing, and side marker lamp. lamp (red socket) ̈ Replace trim and secure with lock. ̈ Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall 3 Tail lamp, rear fog lamp (red socket) it. 4 Backup lamp (black socket) ̈ Retighten the screws.

358 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades ̄ Replacing wiper blades ! Removing wiper blades ̈ Fold the wiper arm forward until it To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper snaps into place. ̈ arms should only be folded forward Turn SmartKey in starter switch when in the vertical position. position 1. ̈ Turn combination switch to wiper setting II (୴ page 48). ̈ With wiper arm in vertical position, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0.

Warning! G ̈ Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from wiper arm (arrow 1). starter switch before replacing a wiper ̈ Slide the wiper blade sideways out of blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly Wiper blades in vertcal position the retainer in the direction of turn on and cause injury. arrow 2.

359 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades

Installing wiper blades ! Never open the hood when the wiper ̈ Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm arm is folded forward. until it locks in place Hold on to the wiper when folding the ̈ Rotate the wiper blade into position wiper arm back. If released, the force parallel to wiper arm. of the impact from the tensioning ̈ Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on spring could crack the windshield. the windshield. Make sure you hold Do not allow the wiper arms to contact onto the wiper when folding the wiper the windshield glass without a wiper arm back. blade inserted. Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage. For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

360 Practical hints Flat tire ̄ Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Vehicles with SmartKey with Mounting the spare wheel KEYLESS-GO*: ̈ Park the vehicle as far as possible from ̈ Turn off the engine by pressing the moving traffic on a hard surface. Warning! G KEYLESS-GO* button on the gear se- ̈ Turn on the hazard warning flashers. lector lever once (୴ page 54). Never operate the vehicle with more than ̈ Turn the steering wheel so that the ̈ Open the driver’s door (this puts the one spare wheel mounted. front wheels are in a straight ahead starter switch in position 0, same as The spare wheel rim is for temporary use position. with the SmartKey removed from the only. Use for over a total of 12 000 miles ̈ Set the parking brake. starter switch). The driver’s door then (20 000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may can be closed again. ̈ Move the gear selector lever to P. cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and possible injuries. Vehicles with SmartKey: i Open door only when conditions are The spare wheel should only be used tempo- ̈ ୴ Turn off the engine ( page 53). safe to do so. rarily and replaced with a regular road wheel ̈ Remove the SmartKey from the starter as quickly as possible. switch. ̈ Have any passenger exit the vehicle at S 55 AMG and Sport Package* only: a safe distance from the roadway. The spare wheel is for temporary use only. When driving with spare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a mounted spare wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.

361 Practical hints Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle Warning! G ̈ Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle jack out of trunk . The jack is designed exclusively for jacking ̈ Take the spare wheel out of wheel well up the vehicle at the jack tubes built both (୴ page 344). sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle Lifting the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. ̈ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away Keep hands and feet away from the area un- by blocking wheels with wheel chocks der the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set park- (not included) or other sizable objects. ̈ Take the two-piece wheel wrench out ing brake and block wheels before raising of the vehicle tool kit tray. Assemble When changing wheel on a level surface: vehicle with jack. wheel wrench. ̈ Place one chock in front of and one be- Do not disengage parking brake while the ̈ On wheel to be changed, loosen but do hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo- vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap- site to the wheel being changed. always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es- proximately one full turn with wrench). When changing wheel on a hill: pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is The tube openings are located directly be- ̈ Place chocks behind the downhill sides fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower hind the front wheel housings and in front of both wheels of the axle not being the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jack- of the rear wheel housings. worked on. stands before working under the vehicle.

362 Practical hints Flat tire

̈ Keeping jack in this position, turn crank 3 clockwise until the jack base meets the ground. Make sure the jack is vertical (plumb line). ̈ Continue to turn the crank until the tire is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Warning! G 1 Jack support tube cover 1 Jack support tube hole Jack arm The jack is intended only for lifting the vehi- ̈ Move cover toward rear by pressing 2 1 Crank cle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited at point indicated by arrow. 3 for performing maintenance work under the ̈ Insert jack arm fully into tube ̈ Remove cover 1 carefully to avoid 2 vehicle. hole 1 up to the stop. damage to the locking tabs. ț Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Warning! G ț Never lie down under the raised vehicle. Insert the jack arm fully into the jack support tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the vehicle may fall from the jack and cause personal injury or damage to the vehicle.

363 Practical hints Flat tire

Removing the wheel Mounting the new wheel ̈ Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on. ̈ Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub. ̈ Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly. ! ̈ Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat wheel bolt and tighten slightly. against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt. Warning! G

Warning! G Use only genuine equipment 1 Alignment bolt Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel ̈ Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and re- Always replace wheel bolts that are dam- bolts may come loose. move. aged or rusted. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve- ̈ Replace this wheel bolt with alignment Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could tip over. bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive ̈ Remove the remaining bolts. under these circumstances! Contact an au- ! thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. Roadside Assistance. This could result in damage to the bolt Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight- and wheel hub threads. ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. ̈ Remove the wheel. Make sure you are using the correct wheel bolts.

364 Practical hints Flat tire

Lowering the vehicle Replacing jack support tube cover Warning! G ̈ Lower vehicle by turning crank coun- ̈ Slide tongue of cover under the upper terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful- Have the tightening torque checked after edge of the tube opening. ly on its own weight. changing a wheel. The wheels could come ̈ Applying even pressure, press cover ̈ Remove the jack. loose if they are not tightened to a torque of until it snaps into place. Be careful not 110 lb-ft. (150 Nm). to damage the locking tabs or clamp the plastic retaining strap. ̈ Before storing the jack in the trunk, it should be fully collapsed, with handle ! folded in. You can also screw the faulty wheel down into the spare wheel well in the ̈ Place the wheel bolt wrench, alignment trunk. bolt and jack back in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk and close the covering lid. Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor* until the depressurized tire is no longer in the vehicle. 1 - 5 Wheel bolts ̈ Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

365 Practical hints Battery ̄ Battery G ! The battery is located on the right side of Warning! Never loosen or detach battery termi- the trunk under the battery cover. nal clamps while the engine is running Failure to follow these instructions can re- or the SmartKey is in the starter switch. sult in severe injury or death. Otherwise the alternator and other Never lean over batteries while connecting, electronic components could be se- you might get injured. verely damaged. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not Have the battery checked regularly by allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately Refer to Service Booklet for mainte- flush affected area with water and seek nance intervals or contact an autho- medical help if necessary. rized Mercedes-Benz Center for further 1 Battery cover A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, information. which is flammable and explosive. Keep ̈ Pull on the outer, right-hand side of flames or sparks away from battery, avoid cover 1 and remove it in the direction improper connection of jumper cables, Warning! G of the arrow. smoking, etc. With a disconnected battery ț you will no longer be able to turn the Warning! G SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop Do not place metal objects on the battery as button on the gear selector lever will this could result in a short circuit. have no effect ț Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk the gear selector lever will remain of acid burns in the event of an accident. locked in position P

366 Practical hints Battery

Disconnecting the battery Charging and reinstalling battery

̈ Turn off all electrical consumers. ̈ Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger ̈ Open the trunk lid (୴ page 97). manufacturer. ̈ Remove the battery cover . 1 ̈ Reinstall the charged battery. Follow ̈ Use a 10 mm open-end wrench to dis- the previously described steps in reconnect the battery negative lead 3. verse order. ̈ Remove cover from the positive terminal . G 2 Positive terminal 2 Warning! 3 Negative terminal ̈ Disconnect the battery positive Never charge a battery while still installed in lead 2. the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg- Removing the battery ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury. ̈ Remove the screw securing the battery. ̈ Remove the battery support and bracket. ̈ Take out the battery.

367 Practical hints Battery

Reconnecting the battery i Batteries contain materials that can harm The following procedures must be car- the environment if disposed of improperly. ̈ Turn off all electrical consumers. ried out following any interruption of Large 12-volt storage batteries contain ̈ Connect the positive lead and fasten its battery power (e.g. due to reconnect- lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require cover 2. ing): sellers of batteries to accept old batteries ̈ Connect negative lead 3. ț Set the clock (see COMAND opera- for recycling. tor’s manual). ! ț Resynchronize the ESP Never invert the terminal connections. (୴ page 316). ț Resynchronize side windows ! (୴ page 198). The battery, its filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed ț Resynchronize sliding/pop-up roof when the vehicle is in operation. (୴ page 202). ț Resynchronize rear seats if they were adjusted five seconds or less before the battery was disconnected .

368 Practical hints Jump starting ̄ Jump starting G If the battery is discharged, the engine can ! Warning! be started with jumper cables and the bat- Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at- tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow- tempts. Failure to follow these directions will cause ing: damage to the electronic components, and Do not attempt to start the engine us- ț can lead to a battery explosion and severe Jump starting should only be performed ing a battery quick charge unit. injury or death. when the engine and catalytic converter are cold. If engine does not run after several un- Never lean over batteries while connecting successful starting attempts, have it ț or jump starting, you might get injured. Do not start the engine if the battery is checked at the nearest authorized frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not Mercedes-Benz Center. allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, ț Only use 12 volt battery to jump start Excessive unburned fuel generated by skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately your vehicle. Jump starting with a more repeated failed starting attempts may flush affected area with water, and seek powerful battery could damage the ve- damage the catalytic converter and medical help if necessary. hicle’s electrical system, which will not may present a fire risk. be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, ited Warranty. Make sure the jumper cables do not which is flammable and very explosive. Keep have loose or missing insulation. flames or sparks away from battery, avoid ț Only use jumper cables with sufficient Make sure the cable clamps do not improper connection of jumper cables, cross-section and insulated terminal touch any other metal part while the smoking, etc. clamps. other end is still attached to a battery. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery ț Always make sure that the jumper ca- can result in it exploding, causing personal bles are not on or near pulleys, fans or injury. other parts that move when an engine ! Do not tow-start the vehicle. Read all instructions before proceeding. is started or running.

369 Practical hints Jump starting

G ! Warning! Never invert the terminal connections. Keep flames or sparks away from battery. ̈ Do not smoke. Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries ̈ Connect negative terminals 2 and 4 (୴ page 366). of the batteries with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery 4 first. The battery is located on the right side of the trunk under the battery cover ̈ Start the engine of the disabled vehi- (୴ page 366). cle. ̈ Make sure the two vehicles do not Now you can again turn on the electrical touch. consumers. Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances. ̈ Turn off all electrical consumers. 1 Positive terminal of discharged battery 2 Negative terminal of discharged ̈ Remove the jumper cables first from ̈ Apply parking brake. battery negative terminals 2 and 4 and then Positive terminal of charged battery ̈ Shift gear selector lever to position P. 3 from positive terminals 1 and 3. 4 Negative terminal of charged battery ̈ Open the trunk lid. You can now turn on the lights. ̈ Connect positive terminals and ̈ ୴ 1 3 Remove battery cover ( page 366). of the batteries with the jumper cable. ̈ Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ̈ Remove red cover from positive Clamp cable to charged battery 3 terminal 1. first.

370 Practical hints Towing the vehicle ̄ Towing the vehicle Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi- When circumstances do not permit the ! cle be transported with all wheels off the recommended towing methods, the vehi- If the vehicle is towed with the front ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel cle may be towed with all wheels on the axle raised (not permissible for vehicles lift/dolly equipment. This method is pref- ground or front wheels raised (except vehi- with 4MATIC), the engine must be shut erable to other types of towing. cles with 4MATIC) only so far as necessary off (SmartKey in starter switch to have the vehicle moved to a safe loca- position 0 or 1). Otherwise the ESP will ! tion where the recommended towing immediately be engaged and will apply Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip- methods can be employed. the rear wheel brakes. ment with SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0. ! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the selector lever must Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Vehicles with 4MATIC: be in position N and the SmartKey Towing with sling-type equipment over Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing must be in starter switch position 2. bumpy roads will damage radiator and so could damage the transfer case, supports. which is not covered by the Mer- When towing the vehicle with all wheels cedes-Benz Limited Warranty. on the ground or the front axle raised, To prevent damage during transport, All wheels must be on or off the ground. the vehicle may be towed only for dis- do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or Observe instructions for towing the ve- tances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a suspension parts. hicle with all wheels on the ground. speed not to exceed 30 mph Switch off the tow-away alarm (50 km/h). (୴ page 85) and the automatic central locking (୴ page 106). Do not tow-start the vehicle.

371 Practical hints Towing the vehicle

! If the SmartKey is left in starter switch i To be certain to avoid a possibility of position 0 for an extended period of time, it To signal turns while being towed with damage to the drive train, however, we can no longer be turned in the switch. In this the hazard warning flasher in use, turn recommend the drive shaft be discon- case, the steering is locked. To unlock, re- SmartKey in starter switch to nected at the rear axle drive flange (ve- move SmartKey from starter switch and reposition 2 and activate the combina- hicles with 4MATIC: disconnected at insert. tion switch for the left or right turn sig- the front and rear axle drive flanges) for nal in the usual manner – only the any towing beyond a short tow to a selected turn signal will operate. nearby garage. G Warning! Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again. With the engine not running, there is no Warning! G power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep If circumstances require towing the vehicle in mind that a considerably higher degree of with all wheels on the ground, always tow effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- with a tow bar if: hicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. ț the engine will not run ț there is a malfunction in the power sup- i ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system The gear selector lever will remain as that will be necessary to adequately con- locked in position P and the SmartKey trol the towed vehicle. will not turn in the starter switch if the Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on battery is disconnected or discharged. ୴ the ground, make certain that the SmartKey See notes on the battery ( page 366) ୴ is in starter switch position 2. or on jump starting ( page 369).

372 Practical hints Towing the vehicle

! Installing towing eye bolt Removing cover When towing the vehicle with all wheels ̈ Press mark on cover in direction of ar- on the ground, please note the follow- row. ing: ̈ Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for With the automatic central locking acti- towing eye bolt. vated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO* Installing towing eye bolt start/stop button in position 2, the ve- ̈ Take towing eye bolt and wheel wrench hicle doors lock if the left front wheel out of trunk (୴ page 344). as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately ̈ Screw towing eye bolt clockwise into 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. 1 Cover on right side of front bumper its stop and tighten with wheel wrench. Switch off the tow-away alarm Removing towing eye bolt (୴ page 85). ̈ Loosen towing eye bolt counterclock- To prevent the vehicle doors from lock- wise with wheel wrench. ing, deactivate the automatic central locking (୴ page 106). ̈ Unscrew towing eye bolt. Towing of the vehicle should only be ̈ Store towing eye bolt and wheel done using the properly installed tow- wrench in trunk. ing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, Installing cover 2 Cover on right side of rear bumper frame or suspension parts. ̈ Fit cover and snap into place.

373 Practical hints Fuses ̄ Fuses Your vehicle’s electrical fuses are located i Fuse boxes in passenger compartment in various fuse boxes: Only install fuses that have been tested There are two fuse boxes. One fuse box is ț In the dashboard on the passenger side and approved by Mercedes-Benz and located in the dashboard on the front pas- that have the specified amperage rat- ț In the rear passenger compartment un- senger side. An additional fuse box is lo- ing. der the right rear seat cated under the right rear seat. Never attempt to repair or bridge a ț In the engine compartment on the driv- blown fuse. Have the cause determined er’s side Fuse box in dashboard and remedied by an authorized ț In the engine compartment on the pas- Mercedes-Benz Center. senger side The following implements are located in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk (୴ page 344): ț The fuse chart. The amperages of the fuses are also given there. ț Spare fuses ț Special fuse extractor 1 Recess in the cover 2 Cover

374 Practical hints Fuses

! Fuse box in the rear passenger Fuse boxes in engine compartment Do not use sharp objects such as a compartment screw driver to open the fuse box in the There are fuse boxes located in the engine dashboard, as this could damage it. compartment on both the driver’s and front passenger side in front of the firewall (dividing wall between engine compart- Opening ment and passenger compartment). ̈ Open the front passenger door. ̈ Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in recess 1 on the edge of cover 2. ̈ Loosen cover 2 from the dashboard using lever. 1 Cover ̈ Using your hands, pull cover 2 in the direction of the arrow and remove. Opening ̈ Pull cover 1 away from fuse box in di- Closing rection of arrow. Fuse box cover, driver’s side ̈ Press cover back onto the dash- 1 2 ̈ Remove cover rearward. Slide board. 2 Closing ̈ Press cover back on until it engages.

375 Practical hints Fuses

Closing Emergency engine shut-down ̈ Replace cover and press it down by 1 If the engine can no longer be stopped us- hand. ing the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* ̈ Push both slides 2 to the ‹ sym- start/stop button, the engine can be bol. turned off by withdrawing two fuses.

! For easy removal of fuses, use the fuse The cover must fit properly and the extractor (supplied with vehicle tool kit) to slide must be positioned at the ‹ pull out the fuses marked on the fuse chart symbol, as moisture or dirt may impair as "ENGINE EMERGENCY STOP". 1 Fuse box cover, front passenger side Slide the functionality of the fuses. The fuse chart is also located in the vehicle 2 tool kit (୴ page 344). Opening ̈ Push both slides 2 to the Œ symbol. ̈ Remove cover 1.

376 Technical data Spare parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly-V-belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main dimensions and weights Weights Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Consumer information

377 Technical data Spare parts service ̄ Spare parts service The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers ! necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of genuine The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz parts required for mainte- parts and accessories not authorized nance and repair work. In addition, strate- by Mercedes-Benz could damage the gically located parts distribution centers vehicle, which is not covered by the provide quick and reliable parts service. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or More than 300 000 different spare parts could compromise the vehicle’s dura- for Mercedes-Benz models are available. bility or safety. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, man- ufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be installed.

378 Technical data Warranty coverage ̄ Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts Information Booklet Warranty Information booklet. Your and Accessories warranties, copies of authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex- which are available at any authorized Should you lose your Service and Warranty change or repair any defective parts origi- Mercedes-Benz Center. Information booklet, have an authorized nally installed on the vehicle in accordance Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re- with the terms of the following warranties: placement. It will be mailed to you. ț New Vehicle Limited Warranty ț Emission System Warranty ț Emission Performance Warranty ț California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty

379 Technical data Identification labels ̄ Identification labels

1 Certification label 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3 Engine number (engraved on engine) (below driver’s door latch) (below right rear passenger seat) 4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield) 5 Emission control label 6 Information label, California version Vacuum line routing for emission control system When ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers.

380 Technical data Layout of poly-V-belt drive ̄ Layout of poly-V-belt drive S 430 / S 500 (all models) S55AMG S 600

1 Automatic belt tensioner The S 55 AMG has two poly-V-belts (belt one 1 Automatic belt tensioner shown in purple/belt two shown in black). 2 ABC tandem pump (pump for 2 ABC tandem pump (pump for power-steering assistance and ABC 1 Idler pulley power-steering assistance and ABC chassis) 2 Automatic belt tensioner chassis) 3 Air conditioning compressor 3 ABC tandem pump (pump for 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Crankshaft power-steering assistance and ABC 4 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump chassis) 5 Coolant pump 6 Generator (alternator) 4 Air conditioning compressor 6 Generator (alternator) 7 Idler pulley 5 Crankshaft 7 Idler pulley 6 Coolant pump 8 Idler pulley 7 Generator (alternator) 9 Idler pulley 8 Idler pulley 9 Automatic belt tensioner a Supercharger

381 Technical data Engine ̄ Engine Model S 430 (220.070, 220.170)1 S 500 (220.175)1 S 430 4MATIC (220.183)1 S 500 4MATIC (220.184)1 Engine 113 113 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 8 8 Bore 3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm) Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.31 in (84.00 mm) Total piston displacement 260.3 cu in (4266 cm3) 303.0 cu in (4966 cm3) Compression ratio 10:1 10:1 Output acc. to SAE J 1349 275 hp/5750 rpm2 302 hp/5600 rpm2 (205 kW/5750 rpm) (225 kW/5600 rpm) Maximum torque 295 lb-ft/3000 - 4400 rpm 339 lb-ft/2700 - 4250 rpm acc. to SAE J 1349 (400 Nm/3000 - 4400 rpm) (460 Nm/2700 - 4250 rpm) Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 Poly-V-belt 2380 mm 2380 mm 1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. 2 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

382 Technical data Engine

Model S 55 AMG (220.174)1 S 600 (220.176)1 Engine 113 275 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 8 12 Bore 3.82 in (97.00 mm) 3.23 in (82.00 mm) Stroke 3.60 in (92.00 mm) 3.43 in (87.00 mm) Total piston displacement 331.8 cu in (5439 cm3) 336.4 cu in (5513 cm3) Compression ratio 9:1 9:1 Output acc. to SAE J 1349 493 hp/6 100 rpm2 493 hp/5000 rpm 2 (368 kW/6100 rpm) (368 kW/5000 rpm) Maximum torque 516 lb-ft/2750 - 4000 rpm 590 lb-ft/1 800 - 3500 rpm acc. to SAE J 1349 (700 Nm/2750 - 4000 rpm) (800 Nm/1 800 - 3500 rpm) Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm 5950 rpm Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9 Poly-V-belt Belt one: 1289 mm 2335 mm Belt two: 2462 mm 1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. 2 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

383 Technical data Rims and tires ̄ Rims and tires Use only tires and rims which have been ! i specifically developed for your vehicle and Moreover, tires and rims not approved Further information on tires and rims is tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, ex- available at any authorized Other tires and rims can have detrimental hibit dimensional variations and differ- Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation effects, such as: ent tire deformation characteristics pressure table is located on the fuel fill- ț Poor handling characteristics that could cause them to come into er flap of the vehicle. The tire pressure contact with the vehicle body or axle should be checked regularly and ț Increased noise parts. This may result in damage to the should only be adjusted on cold tires. ț Increased fuel consumption tires or the vehicle. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.

384 Technical data Rims and tires

Same size tires

S 430, S 430 4MATIC S 600 S 430, S 430 4MATIC S 500, S 500 4MATIC (except Sport Package* and S 500, S 500 4MATIC (except Sport Package* and except Appearance S 600 except Appearance Package*) (Appearance Package*) Package*) Rims (light alloy) 7½ J x17 H2 8 J x18 H21 8 J x18 H21 Wheel offset 1.81 in (46 mm) 1.73 in (44 mm) 1.73 in (44mm) Summer tires (radial-ply tires) - 245/45 R18 96Y1 245/45 R18 96Y1 All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R17 97H M+S - - Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R17 97H M+S 245/45 R18 100V XL M+S1 245/45 R18 100V XL M+S1 or or 245/45 R18 96H M+S1 245/45 R18 96H M+S1 1 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

385 Technical data Rims and tires

S 430, S 500 S 430 4MATIC, S 500 4MATIC S 600 (Sport Package*) (Sport Package*) S 55 AMG Rims (light alloy) 8 J x18 H22 8 J x18 H21,2 or 8½ J x18 EH23 or 8½ J x18 EH23 Wheel offset 1.73 in (44mm) 1.73 in (44 mm) Summer tires (radial-ply tires) - 245/45 R18 100Y XL All-season tires (radial-ply tires) - - Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R18 100V XL M+S2 245/45 R18 100V XL M+S2 or or 245/45 R18 96H M+S2 245/45 R18 96H M+S2 1 For use with winter tires only 2 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center 3 Must not be used with snow chains

386 Technical data Rims and tires

Mixed size tires

S 430 , S 500, S 600 (Sport Package*) S 55 AMG Front axle: AMG light alloy rims 8½ J x 18 EH21 8½ J x 18 EH21 Wheel offset 1.73 in (44 mm) 1.73 in (44 mm) Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R18 100Y XL 245/45 R18 100Y XL or 245/45 R18 96Y Rear axle: AMG light alloy rims 9 J x 18 EH21 9 J x 18 EH21 Wheel offset 1.73 in (44 mm) 1.73 in (44 mm) Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 265/40 R18 101Y XL1 265/40 R18 101Y XL1 or 265/40 R18 97Y 1 1 Must not be used with snow chains

387 Technical data Rims and tires

Spare wheel

S 430, S 430 4MATIC S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500, S 500 4MATIC S 500, S 500 4MATIC (Sport Package* and Appearance Package*), (except Sport Package* and except S 600, S 55 AMG Appearance Package*) Rims (light alloy) 7½ J x 17 H2 8 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset 2.0 in (51 mm) 1.73 in (44 mm) Summer tires (radial-ply tires) - 245/45 R18 96Y All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R17 97H M+S -

388 Technical data Electrical system ̄ Electrical system Model S 430, S 500 S 55 AMG S 600 Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/180 A 14 V/220 A Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW Battery 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah Spark plugs Bosch F 8 DPP 332 NGK IL FR 6 A NGK IFR 6Q-G NGK PFR 5 R-11 Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.028 in (0.7 mm) Tightening torque 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm) 18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)

389 Technical data Main dimensions and weights ̄ Main dimensions and weights Main dimensions

Model S 430 (220.070) S 430 (220.170) S 55 AMG (220.174) S 600 (220.176) S 430 4MATIC (220.183) S 500 (220.175) S 500 4MATIC (220.184) Overall vehicle length 198.3 in (5038 mm) 203.1 in (5158 mm) 203.1 in (5158 mm) 203.1 in (5158 mm) Overall vehicle width 73.0 in (1855 mm) 73.0 in (1855 mm) 73.0 in (1855 mm) 73.0 in (1855 mm) Overall vehicle height 57.2 in (1454 mm) 57.2 in (1454 mm) 57.2 in (1454 mm) 57.4 in (1457 mm) Wheelbase 116.7 in (2965 mm) 121.5 in (3085 mm) 121.5 in (3085 mm) 121.5 in (3085 mm) Track, front 62.0 in (1574 mm) 62.0 in (1574 mm) 62.1 in (1578 mm) 62.0 in (1574 mm) Track, rear 62.0 in (1574 mm) 62.0 in (1574 mm) 62.1 in (1578 mm) 62.0 in (1574 mm)

Weights

Max. roof load 220 lbs (100 kg) Max. trunk load 220 lbs (100 kg)

390 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ̄ Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Capacities Vehicle components and their respective Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser- lubricants must match. Therefore use only vice Products pamphlet, or inquire at your brands tested and approved by us. Mercedes-Benz Center.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Engine with oil filter S 430 8.5 US qt. (8.0 l) Approved engine oils S 500 8.5 US qt. (8.0 l) S 55 AMG 7.9 US qt. (7.5 l) S 600 9.5 US qt. (9.0 l) Automatic transmission 9.1 US qt. (8.6 l) MB Automatic Transmission Oil S 600 8.1 US qt. (7.7 l) Rear axle 1.7 US qt. (1.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 S55AMG 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l) S 600 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l) Front axle S 430 4MATIC 0.63 US qt. (0.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 S 500 4MATIC Transfer case S 430 4MATIC 0.62 US qt. (0.585 l) MB Transfer Case Oil S 500 4MATIC Hydraulic system for ADS or ABC 4.2 US qt. (4.0 l) MB Hydraulic Fluids Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt. (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)

391 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Front wheel hubs approx. 3.5 oz. (100 g) High-temperature roller bearing each grease Brake system 0.7 US qt. (0.7 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+) Cooling system S 430, S 500 approx. 12.1 US qt. (11.5 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze S 55 AMG approx. 14.3 US qt. (13.5 l) S 600 approx. 15.85 US qt. (15 l) Low temperature cooling system S 600 2.3 US qt. (2.2 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Fuel tank S 430, S 500, 23.2 US gal. (88.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline: including a reserve of S55AMG 2.9 US gal. (11.0 l)) Minimum Posted Octane 91 S 600 (Avg.of96RON/86MON) Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12) Windshield washer 3.2 US qt. (3.0 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1 Windshield washer and 7.1 US qt. (6.7 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1 headlamp cleaning system: 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (୴ page 398).

392 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine oils ! Engine oil additives Always check the oil filler cap Engine oils are specifically tested for their (୴ page 277) for important information Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. suitability in our engines. Therefore, only pertaining to the engine oil needing to They may damage the engine. use engine oils approved by meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specifi- Damage or malfunctions resulting from Mercedes-Benz. Information on approved cation (e.g. MB 229.5). If such informa- blending oil additives are not covered by brands is available in the Factory Approved tion is printed on the oil filler cap, only the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Service Products pamphlet, or at an autho- use an engine oil from the list of ap- rized Mercedes-Benz Center. proved engine oils in the Factory Ap- Air conditioning refrigerant proved Service Products pamphlet that meets the specification indicated on R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG the oil filler cap. lubricating oil is used in the air conditioning system. Using engine oils of other specification may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter- Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu- mine the next service interval and will bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the result in engine damage not covered by system will occur. the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Please follow FSS recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

393 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Brake fluid Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements

During vehicle operation, the boiling point Use only premium unleaded fuel: ! of the brake fluid is continuously reduced To maintain the engine’s durability and ț The octane number (posted at the through the absorption of moisture from performance, premium unleaded gaso- pump) must be 91 min. It is an average the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu- line must be used. If premium unleaded of both the Research (R) octane num- ous operating conditions, this moisture gasoline is not available and low octane ber and the Motor (M) octane number: content can lead to the formation of bub- fuel is used, follow these precautions: (R+M)/2). This is also known as the bles in the system, thus reducing the sys- ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. tem’s efficiency. ț Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates Therefore, the brake fluid must be re- up with premium unleaded as soon such as Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be placed every two years, preferably in the as possible. used provided the ratio of any one of these spring. oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed ț Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt Only brake fluid approved by 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. acceleration. Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your au- The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro- ț Do not exceed an engine speed of exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents. vide you with additional information. 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is persons and no luggage. not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, ț Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum can be used. accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in These blends must also meet all other fuel mountainous terrain. requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

394 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Gasoline additives Do not blend any specific fuel additives Coolants with fuel. This only results in unnecessary A major concern among engine manufac- cost and may be harmful to the engine op- The engine coolant is a mixture of water turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso- eration. and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro- line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the vides: Damage or malfunctions resulting from use of quality gasoline containing additives poor fuel quality or from blending specific ț Corrosion protection that prevent the build-up of carbon depos- fuel additives are not covered by the its. ț Freeze protection Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. After an extended period of using fuels ț Boiling protection (by increasing the without such additives, carbon deposits boiling point) can build up especially on the intake valves The cooling system was filled at the factory and in the combustion area, leading to en- with a coolant providing freeze protection gine performance problems such as: to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corro- ț Warm-up hesitation sion protection. ț Unstable idle If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool- ț Knocking/pinging ant in the pressurized cooling system is ț Misfire reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). ț Power loss

395 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

The coolant solution must be used bility of the solution. Therefore, do not use Anticorrosion/antifreeze year-round to provide the necessary corro- more than this amount of Your vehicle contains a number of alumi- sion protection and increase boil-over pro- anticorrosion/antifreeze. num parts. The use of aluminum compo- tection. Refer to Service Booklet for If the coolant level is low, water and nents in motor vehicle engines replacement interval. MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze Coolant system design and coolant used should be used to bring it up to the proper coolant used in such engines be specifical- stipulate the replacement interval. The re- level (have cooling system checked for ly formulated to protect the aluminum placement interval published in the Ser- signs of leakage). parts. (Failure to use such anticorro- vice Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 The water in the cooling system must meet sion/antifreeze coolant will result in a sig- anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other minimum requirements, which are usually nificantly shortened service life.) Mercedes-Benz approved products of satisfied by normal drinking water. If you equal specification (see Factory Approved Therefore, the following product is strongly are not sure about the water quality, con- Service Products pamphlet) are used to re- recommended for use in your vehicle: sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. new the coolant concentration or bring it Mercedes-Benz 325.0 back up to the proper level. Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent. To provide important corrosion protection, Before the start of the winter season (or the solution must be at least 45% once a year in hot southern regions), you anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze freeze protection to approximately - 22°F concentration checked. The coolant is also (-30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more regularly checked each time you bring your than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz protection to approximately - 49°F Center for service. (-45°C)], the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capa-

396 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity

Model Approx. freeze protection – 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C) S 430, S 500 6.1 US qt. (5.75 l) 6.7 US qt. (6.3 l) S 600 (main cooling system) 7.9 US qt. (7.5 l) 8.7 US qt. (8.25 l) S 600 (low temperature cooling system) 1.2 US qt. (1.1 l) 1.3 US qt. (1.2 l) S 55 AMG 7.1 US qt. (6.75 l) 7.8 US qt. (7.4 l)

397 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Windshield and headlamp washer ̈ Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Windshield and headlamp washer fluid system Washer Concentrate and water (or con- mixing ratio centrate and commercially available For temperatures above freezing point, use Both the windshield and headlamp washer premixed windshield washer MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” systems are supplied from the windshield solvent/antifreeze, depending on am- and water: washer fluid reservoir. bient temperatures). ț 1 part “S” to 100 parts water The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approximately: Warning G [40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water]. ț 3.2 US qt. (3.0 l) in vehicles without For temperatures below freezing point, use headlamp cleaning system* Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze and commercially available premixed ț 7.4 US qt. (7.0 l) in vehicles with head- on hot engine parts, because it may ignite windshield washer solvent/antifreeze: lamp cleaning system* or heated reser- and burn. You could be seriously burned. voir ț 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent [40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].

398 Technical data Consumer information ̄ Consumer information The following text is published as required Tread wear Traction of all manufacturers of passenger cars un- The tread wear grade is a comparative rat- The traction grades - from highest to low- der Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regula- ing based on the wear rate of the tire when est - are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep- tions, Part 575 pursuant to the “National tested under controlled conditions on a resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of specified government test course. For ex- pavement as measured under controlled 1966.” ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one conditions on specified government test and one-half (1½) times as well on the gov- surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Uniform tire quality grading ernment course as a tire graded 100. The marked C may have poor traction perfor- relative performance of tires depends mance. Quality grades can be found, where appli- upon the actual conditions of their use, cable, on the tire sidewall between tread however, and may depart significantly shoulder and maximum section width. For Warning G from the norm due to variations in driving example: habits, service practices and differences in The traction grade assigned to this tire is Tread wear Traction Temperature road characteristics and climate. based on straight-ahead braking traction 200 AA A tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

399 Technical data Consumer information

Temperature Warning G The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- The temperature grade for this tire is estab- tance to the generation of heat and its lished for a tire that is properly inflated and ability to dissipate heat when tested under not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin- controlled conditions on a specified indoor flation, or excessive loading, either sepa- laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- rately or in combination, can cause perature can cause the material of the tire excessive heat build-up and possible tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- failure. cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

400 Technical terms

ABC BabySmartTM airbag deactivation BAS (Active Body Control) system (Brake Assist System) Active, computer-controlled system This system detects if a special system System for potentially reducing braking that hydraulically adjusts the suspen- compatible child restraint seat is in- distances in emergency braking situa- sion at all four wheels in response to stalled on the front passenger seat. The tions. The system is activated when it various driving situations. system will automatically deactivate senses an emergency based on how the passenger front airbag when such ABS fast the brake is applied. a seat is properly installed (indicator (Antilock Brake System) Bi-xenon headlamps lamp PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF in the Prevents the wheels from locking up Headlamps which use an electric arc as center console comes on). See an au- during braking so that the vehicle can the light source and produce a more in- thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for continue to be steered. tense light than filament headlamps. availability. Bi-xenon headlamps produce low beam Alignment bolt BabySmartTM compatible child seats and high beam. Metal pin with thread. The centering Special restraint system for children. pin is an aid used when changing a tire The sensor system for the passenger to align the wheel with the wheel hub. seat prevents deployment of the passenger front airbag if a BabySmartTM compatible child seat is installed.

401 Technical terms

CAC COMAND Distronic* (Customer Assistance Center) (Cockpit Management and Data Sys- A driving convenience cruise control Mercedes-Benz customer service cen- tem) system which helps the driver maintain ter, which can help you with any ques- Information and operating center for a pre-selected speed: tions about your vehicle and provide vehicle sound and communications ț If there is no vehicle directly ahead, assistance in the event of a break- systems, including the radio and navi- the system operates in the same down. gation system, as well as other optional way as conventional ->cruise con- equipment (CD changer, telephone, CAN system trol. etc.). (Controller Area Network) ț If a slower moving vehicle is ahead, Data bus network serving to control ve- Control system Distronic will reduce your vehicle hicle functions such as door locking or The control system is used to call up speed to the extent permitted by re- windshield wiping. vehicle information and to change duced throttle and up to 20% brak- component settings. Information and Cockpit ing power to maintain the preset messages appear in the multifunction All instruments, switches, buttons and minimum following distance. display. The driver uses the buttons on indicator/warning lamps in the passen- the multifunction steering wheel to Engine number ger compartment needed for vehicle navigate through the system and to ad- The number set by the manufacturer operation and monitoring. just settings. and stamped on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine pro- Cruise control duced. Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver.

402 Technical terms

Engine oil viscosity FSS KEYLESS-GO* Measurement for the inner friction (vis- (Flexible Service System) System for entering and operating the cosity) of the oil at different tempera- Service indicator in the multifunction vehicle without the use of a SmartKey. tures. The higher the temperature an display that informs the driver when Kickdown oil can tolerate without becoming thin, the next vehicle maintenance service is Depressing the accelerator past the or the lower the temperature it can tol- due. point of resistance shifts the transmis- erate without becoming viscous, the Gear range sion down to the lowest possible gear. better the viscosity. Number of gears which are available to This very quickly accelerates the vehi- ESP the automatic transmission for shifting. cle and should not be used for normal (Electronic Stability Program) The automatic gear shifting process acceleration needs. Improves vehicle handling and direc- can be adapted to specific operating Lock button tional stability. conditions using the selector lever. Button on the door which indicates ETD GPS whether the door is locked or un- (Emergency Tensioning Device) (Global Positioning System) locked. Pushing the lock button down Device which deploys in certain frontal Satellite-based system for relaying on an individual door from inside will and rear collisions exceeding the sys- geographic location information to and lock that door. tem's threshold to tighten the seat from vehicles equipped with special re- Memory function* belts. ceivers. Employs DVD digital maps for Used to store three individual seat, ->SRS navigation. steering wheel and exterior mirror posi- Instrument cluster tions for each SmartKey or SmartKey The displays and indicator/warning with KEYLESS-GO*. lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer, engine temperature and fuel gauge.

403 Technical terms

MON Overspeed range Power train (Motor Octane Number) Engine speeds within the red marking Collective term designating all compo- The Motor Octane Number for gasoline of the tachometer dial. Avoid this en- nents used to generate and transmit as determined by a standardized meth- gine speed range, as it may result in se- motive power to the drive axles, includ- od. It is an indication of a gasoline's rious engine damage that is not ing: ability to resist undesired detonation covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited ț Engine (knocking). The average of both the Warranty. ț Clutch/torque converter MON (Motor Octane Number) and Parktronic* ->RON (Research Octane Number) is System which uses visual and acoustic ț Transmission posted at the pump, also known as AN- signals to assist the driver during park- ț Transfer case TI-KNOCK INDEX. ing maneuvers. ț Multifunction display Drive shaft Poly-V-belt drive Display field in the speedometer used ț Drives engine components (alternator, Differential to present information provided by the AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. ț Axle shafts/axles control system. Program mode selector switch Multifunction steering wheel Used to switch the automatic transmis- Steering wheel with buttons for operat- sion between standard operation S and ing the control system. comfort operation C. S 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift control and manual shift program: in addition to S and C (see above), you can use M for manual operation

404 Technical terms

Remote Vehicle Diagnostics RON Tele Aid System Transmission of vehicle data and cur- (Research Octane Number) (Telematic Alarm Identification on rent location to the Mercedes-Benz The Research Octane Number for gaso- Demand) Customer Assistance Center for sub- line as determined by a standardized The Tele Aid system consists of three scribers to the Tele Aid service. method. It is an indication of a gaso- types of response: automatic and man- REST line's ability to resist undesired detona- ual emergency, Roadside Assistance (Residual engine heat utilization) tion (knocking). The average of both and information. Tele Aid is initially ac- Feature that uses the engine heat the ->MON (Motor Octane Number) tivated by completing a subscriber stored in the coolant to heat the vehi- and RON (Research Octane Number) is agreement and placing an acquain- cle interior for a short time after the en- posted at the pump, also known as AN- tance call. gine has been turned off. TI-KNOCK INDEX. The Tele Aid system is operational pro- Shift lock vided that the vehicle’s battery is Restraint systems When the vehicle is parked, this lock charged, properly connected, not dam- Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and prevents the transmission selector le- aged and cellular and GPS coverage is child restraint systems. As indepen- ver from being inadvertently moved out available. dent systems, their protective func- of position P without the SmartKey Telematics* tions complement one another. turned and the brake pedal depressed. A combination of the terms “telecom- munications” and “informatics.” SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Tightening torque Seat belts, emergency tensioning de- Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug vice and airbags. Though independent wrench) with which threaded fasteners systems, they are closely interfaced to such as wheel bolts are tightened. provide effective occupant protection.

405 Technical terms

Tire speed rating Part of a tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved. Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires. VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) The number set by the manufacturer and stamped on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced. Voice control system* Voice control system for car phones, portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).

406 Index

A Exterior rear view mirror parking Adjustable air vents, rear passenger ABC 220, 401 position 175 compartment 192 Messages in display 313, 318 Front and rear fog lamp 126, 127 Adjusting 34 Setting vehicle level 219, 221 Hazard warning flasher 129 Air distribution 184 ABS 77, 401 Headlamps 47 Air volume 186 Malfunction indicator lamp 304 High beams 128 Backrest tilt 35 Messages in display 314 Ignition 31 Drive-dynamic seat 163 Warning lamp 304 Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* Exterior rear view mirror 38 Accelerator position, automatic start/stop button 33 Head restraint height 36 transmission 170 Immobilizer 53, 83 Head restraint tilt 36 Accident Limiting opening height of Instrument cluster illumination 131 In case of 50 trunk lid* 159 Interior rear view mirror 38 Activating Rear window defroster 189 Lumbar support 112 Air conditioner (cooling) 191 Residual heat 191 Mirrors 38 Air conditioning 190 Seat heater 114, 116 Multicontour backrest* 112 Air recirculation mode 187 Seat ventilation* 117 Power seat bench* 118 Anti-theft alarm system 84 Tow-away alarm 85 Seat cushion depth 35, 112 Central locking (control system) 159 Windshield wipers 48 Seat cushion tilt 35 Charcoal filter 188 Activating steering wheel gearshift control Seat fore and aft adjustment 35 Distance warning function* 215 Downshifting 169, 172 Seat height 35 Distronic* 211 Upshifting 169, 172 Seat in the lumbar region 113 Easy-entry/exit feature 160 Adding Seat in the shoulder region 112 ESP 81 Coolant 279 Seats 34 Exterior lamps 125 Engine oil 277 Steering column height 37 Additional turn signals 353 Steering column in or out 37

407 Index

Steering column up or down 37 AIRMATIC 218 Ashtray 238 Steering wheel 37 Alarm At the gas station 269 Air conditioning Audible 76, 84 ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid) 278 Turning off 190 Canceling 84 AUDIO menu 139 Turning on 190 Visual 83 Operating Air pressure see Tire inflation Alarm system Cassette player 141 pressure 283 Anti-theft 83 Selecting radio station 140 Air recirculation mode 187 Alignment bolt 364 Selecting satellite radio* station Activating 187 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 345, 401 (USA only) 140 Deactivating 188 Antiglare Audio system Air vents, rear passenger compartment Automatic 174 CD mode 142 Adjustable 192 Antilock brake system (ABS) 401 Automatic antiglare for rear view Air volume Anti-theft alarm system mirror 174 Adjusting 186 Arming 84 Automatic central locking AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 311 Canceling alarm 84 Activating/deactivating Airbags 59 Disarming 84 (control system) 159 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Anti-theft systems 83 Automatic climate control 180 system 71, 401 Anti-theft alarm system 83 Air recirculation mode 187 Children 60 Immobilizer 83 Defrosting 187 Front 63 Tow-away alarm 85 Rear window defroster 189 Passenger 63 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 263 Setting the temperature 183 Safety guidelines 62 Armrest Automatic headlamp mode 125 Side impact 63 Storage compartment in front of 232, Window curtain 63 233, 234

408 Index

Automatic lighting control B Battery, vehicle 280, 366 Activating 129 BabySmartTM Charging 367 Deactivating 130 Airbag deactivation system 71 Disconnecting 367 Automatic locking when driving 106 Compatible child seats 71, 401 Reconnecting 368 Automatic transmission 164 Self-test 71 Reinstalling 367 Accelerator position 170 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Removing 367 Comfortable program mode 170 system 401 Bi-Xenon headlamps 401 Deactivating steering wheel gearshift Backrest supports Block heater (Canada only) 293 control 173 Lumbar region 113 Blocking Emergency operation Shoulder region 112 Rear window operation 74 (Limp Home Mode) 173 Backup lamps 354, 358 Brake assist system (BAS) 401 Fluid level 278 Bulbs 354 Brake fluid 270, 394 Gear ranges 166 BAS 78, 401 Brake lamp bulbs 354 Gear selector lever position 167 Messages in display 315 Brake lamp, high mounted 354 Gear shifting malfunctions 173 Batteries, SmartKey Brake pads Kickdown 170 Changing 350 Message in display 321 One-touch gearshifting 165 Check lamp 90, 91 Brakes 260 Program mode selector switch 170 Replacing 349 Warning lamp 305 Selector lever position 164 Battery discharged Break-in period 258 Starting the engine 43 Jump starting 369 Bulbs, replacing 353 Steering wheel gearshift control Battery, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Additional turn signals 353 (Speedshift) S 55 AMG 168 Changing 351 Backup lamps 354 Transmission fluid 278 Check lamp 95 Brake lamps 354 Winter program mode 171 Auxiliary fuse box 374

409 Index

Fog lamps 353 Cassette player SmartKey setting 160 Front lamps 353 Operating 141 Vehicle level 219, 222 High beam 353 Catalytic converter 267 Charcoal filter 188 High mounted brake lamp 354 CD changer* 142 Activating 188 License plate lamps 354, 358 CD mode 142 Deactivating 189 Low beam 353 CD player Charging Parking and standing lamps 353 Operating 141 Vehicle battery 367 Parking lamps 354, 357 Center console 25 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator Rear fog lamp 354 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 311 lamp 306 Rear fog lamps 358 Centigrade Checking Side marker lamps 353, 357 Setting temperature units 154 Brake fluid 270 Standing lamps 353, 354, 357 Central locking Coolant level 278 Tail lamp assemblies 354, 358 Automatic 106 Oil level 271, 273 Turn signal lamps 353, 354 From inside 107 Oil level via control system 274 Switch 107 Tire inflate pressure 271 C Switching on/off (control Vehicle lighting 271 CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 402 system) 159 Child safety 69 Calling up Unlocking from inside 107 Airbags 60 Distronic* settings 147 Changing Infant and child restraint systems 64, Range (distance to empty) 150 Batteries (SmartKey) 350 69 Service indicator 295 Battery (SmartKey with LATCH child seat anchors 73 CAN system 402 KEYLESS-GO*) 351 Cigarette lighter 239 Cargo tie-down hooks 230 CDs 142

410 Index

Cleaning Closing COMAND 402 Cup holder 301 Cup holder 237 COMAND* see separate operating instruc- Distronic* system sensor cover 299 Glove box 231 tions Gear selector lever 301 Hood 273 Combination switch 128 Hard plastic trim items 301 Power windows with High beam flasher 48, 128 Headlamps 177 KEYLESS-GO* 198 Turn signals 47 Headliner and shelf below rear Side windows 196 Windshield wipers 48 window 301 Sliding/pop-up roof 199, 352 Comfortable driving Instrument cluster 301 Sliding/pop-up roof with Transmission program mode 170 Leather upholstery 302 KEYLESS-GO* 202 Consumer information 399 Light alloy wheels 301 Sliding/pop-up roof with Control and operation of radio Nubuck leather upholstery 302 SmartKey 201 transmitters 266 Parktronic* system sensor 299 Trunk lid 98 Control system 134, 402 Plastic and rubber parts 302 Windows 195 AUDIO menu 139 Seat belts 301 Windows with SmartKey 197 Checking oil level 274 Steering wheel 301 Closing from the inside Convenience submenu 160 Upholstery 302 Trunk 100 Display digital speedometer 139 Windows 300 Closing sliding/pop-up roof Distronic* menu 147 Windshield 49 In an emergency 352 Functions 136, 138 Wiper blades 299 Cockpit 20, 402 Instrument cluster submenu 154 Wood trims 302 Cockpit management and data system Lighting submenu 155 Clock 23 (COMAND) 402 Malfunction memory menu 150

411 Index

Menus 137, 138 Coolant level D Multifunction display 134 Checking 278 Daytime running lamp mode 126 Multifunction steering wheel 135 Coolant temperature gauge 23 Setting 156 NAVI menu 147 Courtesy lighting 130 Deactivating Settings menu 151 Cruise control 203, 402 Air conditioner (cooling) 190 Standard display menu 139 Canceling 204 Air recirculation mode 188 Submenus 136, 138 Driving downhill 204 Alarm 84 TEL* menu 144 Driving uphill 204 Anti-theft alarm system 84 Trip computer menu 148 Fine adjustment 205 Automatic climate control 190 Vehicle submenu 159 Lever 210 Central locking (control system) 159 Convenience submenu 160 Setting current speed 204 Charcoal filter 189 Activating easy-entry/exit Setting to last stored speeds 205 Cruise control 204 feature 160 Cruise control lever 203 Defrost 187 Adjusting drive-dynamic seat 163 Cup holder Distance warning function* 215 Setting Key-dependency 160 Cleaning 301 Distronic* 213 Setting parking position for exterior Closing 237 Engine with the SmartKey 53 rear view mirror 162 In front seat armrest 236 ESP 80 Coolant 278 In rear seat armrest 237 Exterior lamps 125 Adding 279 Opening 237 Hazard warning flasher 129 Checking level 278 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 402 Headlamps 53 Messages in display 322, 323 Immobilizer 83 Temperature 268 Interior illumination delayed Temperature gauge 132 switch-off 158 Warning lamp 323

412 Index

Limiting opening height of Discharged battery Distronic* 206, 402 trunk lid* 159 Jump starting 369 Activated 210 Rear window defroster 189 Disconnecting Activating 211 Residual heat 191 Vehicle battery 367 Calling up settings 147, 209 Seat heater 115, 116 Displays Cleaning system sensor 299 Seat ventilation* 117 Digital speedometer 139 Cruise control lever 210 Tow-away alarm 85 Distronic* 208 Deactivated 210 Deactivating steering wheel gearshift Messages 275, 312 Deactivating 213 control 173 Service indicator 294 Deceleration 209 Deceleration Showing malfunctions 150 Decreasing distance 214 With Distronic* 209 Distance Decreasing time interval 213 Deep water see Standing water 265 Decreasing in Distronic* 214 Displays in the speedometer dial 208 Defrosting 187 Increasing in Distronic* 214 Distance warning function 214 Delayed switch-off Setting in Distronic* 213 Driving hints 215 Interior illumination 158 Warning function 214 Fine adjustment 212 Dialing Distance to empty (range) Increasing distance 214 A number (telephone) 145 Calling up 148 Increasing time interval 213 Difficulties Distance warning function* 214 Intermittent signal tone 208 While driving see Problems while Activating 215 Menu 209 driving 50 Deactivating 215 Messages in display 315 Digital clock 23 DTR* warning lamp 214 Sensor cover 299 Digital speedometer 139 Intermittent warning sound 214 Setting a higher speed 211 Direction of rotation (tires) 283 Symbol in multifunction display 147 Setting a slower speed 212

413 Index

Setting following distance 213 In winter 264 E Setting the current speed 211 Problems 50 Easy-entry/exit feature 108 Setting to last stored speed Safety systems 77 Activating 160 ("Resume" function) 212 Through standing water 265 Interrupting movement 161 Warning and indicator lamps 208 With Distronic* 215 Electrical fuses 374 Door control panel 19, 28 Driving abroad 266 Electrical system 389 Door unlock Driving instructions 259 Electrically folding exterior rear view With Tele Aid* 249 Driving off 261 mirrors 176 Doors Driving safety systems Electronic Stability Program see ESP 79, Message in display 325 4MATIC 82 403 Opening from inside vehicle 96 ABS 77 Emergency call system* 242 Opening from outside 89 BAS 78 Emergency calls Downhill driving ESP 79 Initiating an emergency call 245 Cruise control 204 Driving systems 203 With Tele Aid* 244 Downshifting 165, 169, 172 ABC 220 Emergency engine shut-down 376 Drink holder see Cup holder 236 AIRMATIC 218 Emergency operation Drinking and driving 259 Cruise control 203 (Limp Home Mode) 173 Drive-dynamic seat Distronic* 206 Emergency operations Adjusting 163 Driving safety systems 77 Closing sliding/pop-up roof 352 Drive-dynamic seat* 113 Parktronic* 224 Locking the vehicle 349 Driving Vehicle level control 219, 221 Opening sliding/pop-up roof 352 Abroad 266 Remote door unlock 249 General instructions 40, 259 Unlocking the trunk lid 349 Hydroplaning 263 Unlocking the vehicle 348

414 Index

Emergency tensioning device see Display messages 326 F ETD 67, 403 Filler neck 277 Fahrenheit Emission control 267 Messages in display 275, 326 Setting temperature units 154 Ending Viscosity 403 Fastening the seat belts 40 A call (telephone) 145 Engine oil level see Oil level 271 Fine adjustment Engine 382 Engine shut down in an emergency 376 Cruise control 205 Compartment 272 Entry position Distronic* 212 Message in display 306 Messages in display 328 First aid kit 344 Starting 43 ESP 79, 403 Flat tire 361 Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 44 Four wheel electronic traction system Lowering the vehicle 365 Starting with the SmartKey 43 with ESP 82 Mounting the spare wheel 361 Turning off with the SmartKey or the Switching off 80 Preparing the vehicle 361 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 53 Switching on 81 Flexible Service System (FSS) 294, 403 Engine cleaning 298 Synchronizing 316 Fog lamp, rear 127, 354 Engine compartment 272 Warning lamp 307, 308 Fog lamps Fuse box in 375 ETD 403 Replacing bulbs 353 Hood 272 Safety guidelines 62 Fog lamps, front Engine malfunction indicator lamp 306 ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 67 Messages in display 330 Engine number 402 Exterior lamp switch 124 Replacing bulbs 354 Engine oil 273 Exterior rear view mirrors Switching on 127 Adding 277 Adjusting 38 Folding electrically Additives 393 Folding electrically 176 Exterior rear view mirrors Checking level 273 Parking position for 162 176 Consumption 273

415 Index

Four wheel electronic traction system Fuel filler flap 269 G (4MATIC) Locking 269 Garage door opener 250 with ESP 82 Opening 351 Erasing in remote control 255 4MATIC 82 Unlocking 269 Integrated remote control 252 Front airbags 63 Fuel tank Rolling code programming 253 Front lamps Filler flap 269 Gasoline see Fuel 270 Messages in display 330–333 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 391 Gear range 403 Replacing bulbs 353, 355 Functions (control system) 136, 138 Automatic transmission 166 Switching on 124 Resetting 152 Limiting 166 Front seat head restraints Fuse box 374, 375 Shifting into optimal 165 Installing 109 Fuse chart 345 Gear range limit Power seat 109 Fuses 374 Canceling 165 Removing 109 Auxiliary fuse box in trunk 374 Gear selector lever FSS (Flexible Service System) 294, 403 Fuse box in engine compartment 375 Cleaning 301 Fuel 270 Fuse box in passenger Position 167 Fuel reserve warning lamp 308 compartment 374 Glasses Premium unleaded gasoline 270 Fuse boxes in the engine Storage compartment in front of Fuel consumption statistics compartment 376 armrest 234 After start 148 Fuse chart 345 Global Since last reset 149 Fuse extractor 345 Locking 89 Spare fuses 345 Unlocking 89

416 Index

Global Positioning System (GPS) 403 Headlamps Hood 272 Glove box 231 Automatic control 125 Closing 273 Closing 231 Bi-Xenon 401 Message in display 328 Locking 231 Cleaning 298 Opening 272 Opening 231 Cleaning system* 177, 281 Hydroplaning 263 Unlocking 231 Refilling washer fluid 281 I Gloves (vehicle tool kit) 345 Switching off 53 Identification labels 380 Good visibility 174 Switching on 47 Ignition 31, 33 GPS 243, 403 Headliner Switching on 43, 44 Cleaning 301 H Immobilizer 83 Heated steering wheel* 240 Hand-held transmitter Activating 83 Height adjustment Programming integrated remote Deactivating 83 Head restraints 36 control 252 Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and Steering wheel 37 Hands-free microphone 27 warning Height adjustments Hard plastic trim items Individual seats* 118 Vehicle level 219, 221 Cleaning 301 Infant and child restraint systems 69 High beam Hazard warning flasher 128 Installing 72 Replacing bulbs 353 Switching off 129 LATCH child seat anchors 73 High beam flasher 48, 128 Switching on 129 Information High beam headlamps Head restraint folding 119 About service and warranty 10 Messages in display 330 Head restraints 109 Button for Tele Aid* 247 Switching on 128 Headlamp cleaning system* 281 Infrared reflecting windshield 256 High mounted brake lamp 354

417 Index

Inside rear view mirror Interior lighting 129 Locking the vehicle 95 Antiglare 174 Activating automatic control 129 Loss of SmartKey with Installing Deactivating automatic control 130 KEYLESS-GO 96 Infant and child restraint systems 72 Manual operation 130 Messages in display 328 Towing eye bolt 373 Interior rear view mirror Starting the engine 44 Wiper blades 360 Adjusting 38 Turning off engine 54 Instrument cluster 22, 131, 403 Kickdown 170, 403 J Cleaning 301 Kilometers/miles in speedometer 154 Jump starting 369 Coolant temperature gauge 132 Km/h or mph in speedometer 154 Illumination 131 K L Multifunction display 134 Key see SmartKey 30, 53 Lamp bulbs, exterior 353 Outside temperature indicator 133 Key, mechanical 348 Lamps, exterior Selecting language 155 Key, SmartKey Front 353 Integrated remote control Positions in starter switch 31 Light sensor 331 Canadian programming 254 Key, SmartKey, SmartKey with Messages in display 331 Erasing memory 255 KEYLESS-GO* Rear 354 Hand-held transmitter 252 Replacing the battery 349 Lamps, indicator and warning Operating 255 Key-dependency memory ABS 304 Rolling code programming 253 Settings 160 Airbag Off 63 Interior illumination KEYLESS-GO* 403 Battery (SmartKey with Delayed switch-off 158 Activating ignition with 33 KEYLESS-GO*) 94 Closing power windows 198 Battery (SmartKey) 89 Closing sliding/pop-up roof 202 Brakes 305

418 Index

CHECK ENGINE 306 Lighter see Cigarette lighter 239 Locator lighting 126 Coolant 322 Lighting 124 Setting 156 DTR* 208 Automatic headlamp mode 125 Lock button 403 Engine diagnostics 306 Combination switch 128 Lock buttons ESP 307, 308 Daytime running lamp mode 126 Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 55 Fuel reserve 308 Exterior lamp switch 124 Locking 51, 88 Instrument cluster 308 Front fog lamps 127 Fuel filler flap 269 Seat belts 308 High beam flasher 128 Global (SmartKey with Service indicator 294 High beams 128 KEYLESS-GO*) 94 SRS 59 Instrument cluster illumination 131 Global, SmartKey 89 Language Interior 129 Glove box 231 Multifunction display 155 Locator lighting 126 The vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 95 Setting 155 Low beam 124 Trunk lid, separately 105 LATCH child seat anchors 73 Manual headlamp mode 125 Vehicle in an emergency 349 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 381 Night security illumination 126 Loss of SmartKey 91 Leather upholstery Parking lamps 124 Loss of Smartkey with KEYLESS-GO* 96 Cleaning 302 Rear fog lamp 127 Low beam headlamps Lever Settings (control system) 155 Messages in display 330, 331 For cruise control 210 Limiting the gear range 166 Replacing bulbs 353 License plate lamps Limp Home Mode 173 Lowering Replacing bulbs 354, 358 Loading 229 Vehicle 365 Light alloy wheels Cargo tie-down hooks 230 Lumbar support adjustment 112 Cleaning 301 Instructions 229 Light sensor 331 Roof rack 229

419 Index

M Storing key dependent settings 122 Interior rear view mirror 38 Main 390 Menus 136 Storing exterior rear view mirror Main Dimensions 390 AUDIO 139 parking position 122 Maintenance 12, 294 Distronic* 147, 209 MON 270 Malfunction In control system 137, 138 MON (Motor Octane Number) 404 Displaying 150 Malfunction memory 150 Mph or km/h in speedometer 154 Malfunction memory 150 NAVI 147 Multicontour backrest* 112 Calling up 150 Settings menu 151 Multifunction display 134, 404 Manual headlamp mode 125 Standard display 139 Selecting language 155 Manual operations Submenus 136 Standard display 138 Fuel filler flap 351 TEL* 144 Multifunction display messages Interior lighting control 130 Trip computer 148 ABC 313, 318 Locking the vehicle 349 Microphone ABS 314 Sliding/pop-up roof 352 Hands-free microphone 27 BAS 315 Unlocking the driver’s door 348 Miles/kilometers in speedometer Brake fluid 321 Unlocking the trunk lid 349 Setting 154 Brake pads 321 Massage function 113 Mirrors Check engine 306 MAXCOOL Activating exterior rear view mirror Coolant 323 Maximum cooling 186 parking position 175 Coolant level 322 Mechanical key 348 Adjusting 38 Distronic* 315 Memory function 121, 403 Automatic antiglare for rear view Doors 325 Recalling positions from mirror 174 Engine 306 memory 122 Exterior rear view mirror 38 Engine oil level 326 Storing exterior rear view mirror Exterior rear view mirror parking parking positions 122 position 162

420 Index

Entry position 328 O Opening Hood 328 Occupant safety 58 Ashtray 238 Lamps 331 Airbags 59 Cup holder 237 Parking brake 321 Children and airbags 60 Doors from the inside 96 Selector lever 317 Children in the vehicle 69 Fuel filler flap 269 SmartKey 328 Fastening the seat belt 40 Fuel filler flap manually 351 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 328 Infant and child restraint systems 69 Glove box 231 TeleAid 334 LATCH child seat anchors 73 Hood 272 Telephone* 334 Seat belts 40, 62 Side windows 196 Tires 336, 339 Oil Sliding/pop-up roof 199, 352 Trunk 334 Adding 277 Sliding/pop-up roof in an Washer fluid 334 Consumption 273 emergency 352 Multifunction steering wheel 24, 135, Dipstick 273 Sliding/pop-up roof with 404 Filler neck 277 SmartKey 201 Buttons 135 Viscosity 403 Storage compartment in the center Oil level console 232 N Checking 271 Storage compartments in the Navigation system Oil level via control system armrest 233 Operating 147 Checking 274 Storage compartments in the center See separate COMAND* operating One-touch gearshifting 165 console 233, 234 instructions Canceling gear range limit 165 Trunk 97 Night security illumination 126 Downshifting 165 Trunk lid from the inside 97 Nubuck leather upholstery Upshifting 165 Windows 195 Cleaning 302 Windows with SmartKey 197

421 Index

Opening from the inside Override switch see Blocking of rear Parking position Trunk 99 window operation 74 Exterior rear view mirrors 122, 162, Operating Overspeed range 404 175 Cassette player 141 Parktronic 224 P CD player 141 Parktronic* 224, 404 Paintwork 297 COMAND* see separate operating Malfunctioning 228 Panic alarm 76 instructions Sensor 299 Panic button on SmartKey 76 Garage door opener 255 Passenger compartment 266 Parcel net in front passenger Integrated remote control 255 Fuse box in 374 footwell 237 Navigation system 147 Interior lighting 129 Parcel net in trunk 238 Radio 140 Interior rear view mirror 38 Parking 51, 261 Radio transmitters 266 Parcel net in front passenger Parking and standing lamps Telephone* 144 footwell 237 Replacing bulbs 353 Vehicle outside the USA and Passenger safety see Occupant Parking assist see Parktronic* 224 Canada 13 safety 58 Parking brake 45, 52 Operator’s Manual 10 Passenger seat fore and aft Engaging 52 Ornamental moldings 298 adjustment 120 Message in display 321 Outside temperature indicator 133 Passenger seat head restraint Releasing 45 Overdue service 294 height 120 Warning sound 46 Overhead control panel 27 Passenger seat height 120 Parking lamps Garage door opener 27 Pedals 259 Replacing bulbs 354, 357 Reading lamp 27 Phone book* Switching on 124 Rear view mirror 27 Loading 146 Tele Aid button 27 Quick search 146

422 Index

Phone number* Power windows 195 Q Dialing 145 Blocking of rear window operation 74 Quick search Redialing 146 Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 198 Phone book* 146 Plastic and rubber parts Side windows 195 R Cleaning 302 Synchronizing 198 Radio Poly-V-belt drive 404 Practical hints Selecting satellite radio* Positions (Memory function) First aid kit 344 stations 140 Recalling from memory 122 Fuses 374 Selecting stations 140 Positions (Memory function*) Lamp in center console 311 Radio transmitters, control and Storing into memory 122 Lamps in instrument cluster 304 operation 266 Power assistance 259 Messages in the display 312 Range (distance to empty) Power seat Towing the vehicle 371 Calling up 150 Adjusting backrest tilt 35 Vehicle tool kit 344 Rear fog lamp 354 Adjusting head restraint height 36 PRE-SAFE see Preventive occupant Bulb 354 Adjusting head restraint tilt 36 safety 68 Switching on 127 Adjusting seat cushion depth 35 Preventive occupant safety Rear lamp bulbs Adjusting seat cushion tilt 35 (PRE-SAFE) 68 Replacing 358 Adjusting seat height 35 Problems Rear lamps see Tail lamps Front seat head restraints 109 While driving 50 Rear passenger compartment Seat fore and aft adjustment 35 With vehicle 17 Adjustable air vents 192 Power seat bench* 118 Product information 9 Rear seat head restraints Power train 404 Program mode selector switch 404 Folding back with switch 110 Power washer 297 Automatic transmission 170 Placing upright 110 PULSE function (Massage function) 113 Rear seats 110

423 Index

Rear seats 118 Refueling 269 Rear turn signal bulbs 358 Fore and aft adjustment 119 Regular checks 270 Side marker lamp bulbs 357 Head restraint folding 119 Regular driving style 221 Standing lamp bulbs 357 Individual seats* 118 Reinstalling vehicle battery 367 Wiper blades 359 Passenger seat fore and aft Remote controls Reporting adjustment 120 Integrated 252 Safety defects 18 Passenger seat head restraint SmartKey 88, 92 Reset button in the instrument height 120 Remote door unlock cluster 151 Passenger seat height 120 With Tele Aid* 249 Resetting Rear seat head restraints 110 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 405 All functions (control system) 151 Seat height 119 Removing All functions of a submenu 152 Setting front passenger seat position Vehicle battery 367 Fuel consumption 149 from rear* 119 Wheel 364 Service indicator (FSS) 295 Rear view mirror 27 Wiper blades 359 Trip odometer 132 Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 174 Replacing Residual heat utilization 191, 405 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Backup lamp bulbs 358 Residual ventilation 191 Rear window Brake fluid 394 REST (Residual engine heat Blocking operation 74 Brake lamp bulbs 358 utilization) 405 Rear window defroster 189 Bulbs 353 Restraint system see Infant and child Activating 189 Front lamp bulbs 355 restraint systems 69, 72 Deactivating 189 License plate lamp bulbs 358 Rims and Tires 384 Rear window sunshade* 179 Parking lamp bulbs 357 Roadside assistance 12 Reconnecting Rear fog lamp bulbs 358 Tele Aid* 246 Vehicle battery 368 Rear lamp bulbs 354, 358 Rolling code programming 253

424 Index

RON 270 Seat for and aft adjustment 119 Self-test RON (Research Octane Number) 405 Seat heater BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Roof rack 229 Switching off 115 system 71 Rotating wheels 291 Switching on 114 Tele Aid* 243 Rubber parts Seat height 119 Service Cleaning 302 Seat ventilation* Calling up the service indicator 295 Switching off 117 Major service (Service B) 294 S Switching on 117 Minor service (Service A) 294 Safety Seats 108 Overdue 294 Occupant 58 Adjusting 34 Types 294 Safety belts see Seat belts 40 Adjusting lumbar support 113 When due 294 Safety defects Adjusting shoulder support 112 Service (maintenance) 294 Reporting 18 Easy entry/exit feature 108 Service and warranty information 10 Safety systems Heater 114 Service indicator 294 Driving 77 Massage function 113 Calling up 295 Screwdriver (vehicle tool kit) 345 Multicontour backrest* 112 Clearing 294, 295 Seat belt force limiter 67 Rear power seat bench* 118 Service life (tires) 283 Seat belts 64 Rear seats 118 Service System see FSS 294 Cleaning 301 Securing cargo Setting Fastening 40 Cargo tie-down hooks 230 Convenience functions 160 Proper use of 42, 66 Selector lever Cruise control 204 Safety guidelines 62 Lock 43 Daytime running lamp mode 156 Warning lamp 308 Message in display 317 Digital clock 23 Seat cushion depth Position 164 Distronic* time interval 213 Adjusting 112 Following distance in Distronic* 213

425 Index

Higher speed in cruise control 205 Time 23 Shift lock 405 Higher speed in Distronic* 211 To last stored speed in Distronic* Shifting Individual vehicle settings 151 ("Resume" function) 212 Gear selector lever positions 167 Interior illumination delayed Units Into optimal gear range (automatic switch-off 158 Speedometer 154 transmission) 165 Lamps and lighting (control Temperature 154 Shoulder support system) 155 Vehicle level control 219, 221 Seat adjustment 112 Language, multifunction display 155 Setting current speed 204 Side impact airbags 63 Locator lighting 156 Setting front passenger seat position Side marker lamps Lower speed in cruise control 205 from rear* 119 Replacing bulbs 353, 354, 357 Lower speed in Distronic* 212 Settings Side windows Miles/kilometers in Calling up Distronic* 147, 209 Automatic closing 196 speedometer 154 Convenience functions 160 Automatic opening 196 Parking position for exterior rear view Factory, SmartKey 89 Cleaning 300 mirrors 162 Individual (SmartKey) 160 Closing 195, 196, 197 Slower speed in cruise control 205 Lighting (control system) 155 Closing fully (Express-close) 196 Slower speed in Distronic* 212 Menus and submenus 136 Closing with SmartKey 197 SmartKey dependent memory 160 Resetting all (control system) 151 Opening 195, 196, 197 Speed in cruise control 205 Resetting in the submenu 152 Opening fully (Express-open) 196 Speed in Distronic* 211 Selective 89, 94 Opening with SmartKey 197 Speedometer display mode 154 Settings menu Stopping 197 Suspension tuning 220 Functions in 151 Synchronizing power windows 198 Temperature (interior) 183 Individual vehicle settings 151 Temperature indicator 154 Submenus 152

426 Index

Simultaneous wiping and washing Opening and closing windows Spare fuses 345 Windshield wipers 49 with 197 Spare parts service 378 Single wipe 49 Remote controls 88, 92 Spare wheel Sliding/pop-up roof 199 Replacing the batteries 349 Mounting 361 Closing 199, 352 Restoring to factory setting 90 Speed Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 202 Selective setting 89 Setting current 204 Closing with SmartKey 201 Starting the engine 43 Setting to last stored speed in Messages in display 333 Turning off the engine 53 Distronic* ("Resume" Opening 199, 352 Unlocking with 30 function) 212 Opening with SmartKey 201 SmartKey positions in starter switch 31 Speed settings Stopping 200 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Cruise control 205 Synchronizing 202 Checking the battery 95 Distronic* 211, 212 SmartKey 30, 88 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 91 Speedometer Battery check lamp 89, 94 Changing the battery 351 Displaying gear range 166 Changing the batteries 350 Factory setting 94 Displays 208 Checking the batteries 91 Global locking 94 Settings units 154 Factory setting 89 Global unlocking 94 Speedometer display mode Global locking 89 Loss of 96 Selecting 154 Global locking and unlocking 89 Messages in display 328 Sporty driving style 221 Global unlocking 89 Replacing the battery 349 SRS 66, 405 Locking and unlocking 88 Selective setting 94 Indicator lamp 310 Loss of 91 Unlocking 91 SRS indicator lamp 58 Opening and closing the Unlocking with 32 Standing lamps 124 sliding/pop-up roof with 201 Snow chains 293 Replacing bulbs 353, 354, 357

427 Index

Standing water Glove box 231 Suspension tuning Driving instructions 265 In front of armrest 234 For regular driving style 221 Starter switch 31 Parcel net 237 For sporty driving style 221 Positions 31 Storage compartment in front of Setting 220 Starting difficulties 44 armrest 232, 233 Switching off Starting position 31 Storage tray 232, 233, 234 Automatic central locking (control Starting the engine 43 Under the front seats 235 system) 159 Steering column Storing (Memory function*) Engine 53 Height adjustment 37 Positions into memory 122 ESP 80 Length adjustment 37 Submenus Hazard warning flasher 129 Steering wheel Convenience 160 Headlamps 53 Adjusting 37 For settings 136 Switching on Adjustment 37 In control system 138 Automatic central locking (control Cleaning 301 Instrument cluster 154 system) 159 Heated steering wheel* 240 Lighting 155 ESP 81 Steering wheel adjustment 37 Resetting functions in Control Front fog lamps 127 Stolen vehicle system 152 Front lamps 124 Tracking services 250 Selecting 152 Hazard warning flasher 129 Stopping Settings menu 152 Headlamps 47 Sliding/pop-up roof 200 Vehicle 159 High beams 128 Windows 197 Sun visors 178 Parking lamps 124 Storage compartments 231 Supplemental Restraint System Rear fog lamp 127 Armrest 232, 233, 234 (SRS) 405 Windshield wipers 48 Cup holder 236, 237

428 Index

Symbol (Distronic*) Stolen vehicle tracking services 250 Tightening torque 405 Distance warning function* 147 System self-check 243 Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 365 Synchronizing Upgrade signals 248 Time ESP 316 TeleAid Setting digital clock 23 Power windows 198 Messages in display 334 Tire inflation pressure Sliding/pop-up roof 202 Telematics* 405 Checking 271, 283 Telephone holder* Tire inflation pressure see the placard on T Storage compartment in front of the fuel filler flap Tachometer 133 armrest 234 Tire speed rating 263, 406 Overspeed range 133 Telephone* 241 Tire traction 263 Tail lamps Answering a call 145 Tires 282, 399 Cleaning 298 Dialing a number from the phone Direction of rotation 283 Replacing bulbs 354, 358 book 145 Driving instructions 262 Tar stains 297 Ending a call 145 Messages in display 336, 339 Tele Aid Hands-free microphone 27 Retreads 282 Information 247 Loading phone book* 146 Service life 283 Initiating an emergency call Messages in display 334 Temperature 284 manually 245 Operating 144 Tire pressure monitor warning Roadside assistance 246 Redialing 146 lamp* 309 Tele Aid System 242 Temperature Tread depth 292 Tele Aid button 27 Display mode 154 Wear pattern 291 Tele Aid System 405 Setting interior temperature 183 Winter 292 Tele Aid* 242 Setting units in display 154 Tools 344 Emergency calls 244 Tires 284 Remote door unlock 249 Tie-down hooks (Trunk) 230

429 Index

Tow-away alarm 85 Parcel net 238 U Arming 85 Tie-down hooks 230 Units Disarming 85 Trunk lid 97, 99, 100 Setting speedometer units 154 Disarming for transport 85 Trunk lock 349 Setting temperature units 154 Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) 345 Unlocking in an emergency 349 Unlocking 30, 88 Installing 373 Unlocking separately 105, 106 Driver’s door in an emergency 348 Towing the vehicle 371 Unlocking with SmartKey 90 Fuel filler flap 269 Tracking services Trunk lid Global 89 For stolen vehicle 250 Closing 98 Global (SmartKey with Traction 170, 406 Trunk lid emergency release 104 KEYLESS-GO*) 94 Transmission see Automatic Trunk lid opening/closing system* 99 Glove box 231 transmission 278 Turn signal lamps In an emergency 348 Tread depth (tires) 292 Replacing bulbs 353, 354 Selective settings 89, 94 Trip computer 148 Turn signals 47 Trunk in an emergency 349 Trip odometer Additional in mirrors 353 Trunk lid with SmartKey 90 Resetting 132 Cleaning lenses 298 Trunk lid, separately 105, 106 Trunk Front bulbs 353, 356 Vehicle in an emergency 249 Auxiliary fuse box 374 Rear bulbs 354, 358 With the SmartKey 30 Closing from the inside 100 Turning off With the SmartKey with Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 95 Engine 53 KEYLESS-GO* 32, 91 Locking separately 105 Turning off the engine 54 Upgrade signals Message in display 334 Tele Aid* 248 Opening 97 Uphill driving Opening from inside vehicle 97 Cruise control 204 Opening from the inside 99

430 Index

Upholstery Gear selector lever 301 Vehicle level 219, 221 Cleaning 302 Hard plastic trim items 301 Changing 219, 222 Upshifting 165, 169, 172 Headlamps 298 Setting 219, 222 Useful features 231 Instrument cluster 301 Automatic 219, 222 Ashtrays 238 Leather upholstery 302 Manual 219, 222 Cigarette lighter 239 Light alloy wheels 301 Vehicle lighting Garage door opener 250 Nubuck leather upholstery 302 Checking 271 Heated steering wheel* 240 Ornamental moldings 298 Vehicle submenu Storage compartments 231 Paintwork 297 Limiting opening height of trunk Tele Aid* 242 Parktronic* system sensor 299 lid*(Control system) 159 Telephone* 241 Plastic and rubber parts 302 Vehicle tool kit 344, 345 Power washer 297 Alignment bolt 345 V Seat belts 301 Fuse chart 345 Vehicle Side markers 298 Fuse extractor 345 Individual settings 151, 153 Steering wheel 301 Gloves 345 Locking in an emergency 349 Tail lamps 298 Screwdriver 345 Lowering 365 Tar stains 297 Spare fuses 345 Service battery 366 Turn signals 298 Wheel wrench 345 Towing 371 Upholstery 302 Vehicle washing 298 Unlocking in an emergency 348 Vehicle washing 298 Ventilated storage compartment 192 Vehicle battery 366 Window cleaning 300 Ventilation Vehicle care 296 Wiper blades 299 Storage compartment 192 Cup holder 301 Wood trims 302 VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 406 Distronic* system sensor cover 299 Voice control system* 406 Engine cleaning 298 Hands-free microphone 27

431 Index

W Windshield washer fluid Removing 359 Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and Message in display 334 Replacing 359 warning Refilling 281 Wiping Warning sounds Wiping with 49 And washing simultaneously 49 Distance warning function* 214 Windshield wipers 48, 177 Interval 48 Distronic* 208 Fast wiper speed 48 With windshield washer fluid 49 Drivers seat belts 64 Intermittent wiping 48 Wood trims Parking brake 46 Replacing wiper blades 359 Cleaning 302 Warranty coverage 379 Single wipe 49 Wrench, wheel (vehicle tool kit) 345 Washing the vehicle 296 Switching on 48 X Wear pattern (tires) 291 Wiping with windshield washer Xenon headlamps Weights 390 fluid 49 Bi-Xenon 401 Wheel change Winter driving 292 Tightening torque 365 Block heater (Canada only) 293 Wheels Snow chains 293 Rotating 291 Tires 292 Tires and wheels 282 Transmission program mode 171 Window curtain airbags 63 Winter driving instructions 264 Windows see Side windows Winter tires 292 Windshield Wiper blades Refilling washer fluid 281 Cleaning 299 Replacing wiper blades 359 Installing 360 Washer fluid 281

432 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle. For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.

Warning G

To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury. If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Re- printing, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing. Title illustration no. P00.01-2396-31 Press time 01/09/04 GSP/TIP Printed in Germany Order No. 6515 2164 13 Part No. 220 584 87 96 USA Edition B 2004